ONLYOFFICE Docs Enterprise 100

Advanced Settings... and check / uncheck the Cut, copy and paste checkbox.Undo/redo your actions To perform undo/redo operations, click the corresponding icons in the editor header or use the following keyboard shortcuts: · Undo – use the Undo icon on the left side of the editor header or the Ctrl+Z key combination to undo the last operation you performed. · Redo – use the Redo icon on the left part of the editor header or the Ctrl+Y key combination to redo the last undone operation. Note: when you co-edit a document in the Fastmode, the possibility to Redo the last undone operation is not available. Change color scheme Color schemes are applied to the whole document. They are used to quickly change the appearance of your document because they define the Theme Colors palette for different document elements (font, background, tables, autoshapes, charts). If you applied some Theme Colors to the document elements and then select a different Color Scheme, the applied colors in your document will change correspondingly. To change a color scheme, click the downward arrow next to the Change color scheme icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the required color scheme from the list: Office, Grayscale, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry,Median,Metr o,Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, Verve. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list. Once you select the preferred color scheme, you can select other colors in the color palettes window that corresponds to the document element you want to apply the color to. For most document elements, the color palettes window can be accessed by clicking the colored box on the right sidebar when the required element is selected. For the font, this window can be opened using the downward arrow next to the Font color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following palettes are available:· Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the document. · Standard Colors - a set of default colors. The selected color scheme does not affect them. · Custom Color - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Custom color palette.Page formatting Set page parameters To change page layout, i.e. set page orientation and size, adjust margins and insert columns, use the corresponding icons on the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Page Orientation Change the current orientation by type clicking the Orientation icon. The default orientation type is Portrait that can be switched to Album. Page Size Change the default A4 format by clicking the Size icon and selecting the required format from the list. The following preset sizes are available: · US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm) · US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm) · A4 (21cm x 29,7cm) · A5 (14,81cm x 20,99cm) · B5 (17,6cm x 25,01cm) · Envelope #10 (10,48cm x 24,13cm) · Envelope DL (11,01cm x 22,01cm) · Tabloid (27,94cm x 43,17cm) · AЗ (29,7cm x 42,01cm) · Tabloid Oversize (30,48cm x 45,71cm) · ROC 16K (19,68cm x 27,3cm) · Envelope Choukei 3 (11,99cm x 23,49cm) · Super B/A3 (33,02cm x 48,25cm) You can also set a special page size by selecting the Custom Page Size option from the list. The Page Size window will open where you''ll be able to select the required Preset (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) or set custom Width and Height values. Enter new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using the arrow buttons. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes.Page Margins Change the default margins, i.e. the blank space between the left, right, top and bottom page edges and the paragraph text, by clicking the Margins icon and selecting one of the available presets: Normal, US Normal, Narrow,Moderate,Wide. You can also use the Custom Margins option to set your own values in the Margins window. Enter the required Top, Bottom, Left and Right page margin values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Gutter position is used to set up additional space on the left side of the document or at its top. The Gutter option is helpful to make sure that bookbinding does not cover the text. In theMargins enter the required gutter position into the entry fields and choose where it should be placed in. Note: the Gutter position cannot be used when theMirror margins option is checked. In theMultiple pages drop-down menu, choose theMirror margins option to set up facing pages for double-sided documents. With this option checked, Left and Rightmargins turn into Inside and Outsidemargins respectively.In Orientation drop-down menu choose from Portrait and Landscape options. All applied changes to the document will be displayed in the Preview window. When you finish, click OK. The custom margins will be applied to the current document and the Last Custom option with the specified parameters will appear in the Margins list so that you will be able to apply them to other documents. You can also change the margins manually by dragging the border between the grey and white areas on the rulers (the gray areas of the rulers indicate page margins): Columns Apply a multi-column layout by clicking the Columns icon and selecting the necessary column type from the drop-down list. The following options are available: · Two - to add two columns of the same width, · Three - to add three columns of the same width, · Left - to add two columns: a narrow column on the left and a wide column on the right, · Right - to add two columns: a narrow column on the right and a wide column on the left. If you want to adjust column settings, select the Custom Columns option from the list. The Columns window will appear, and you''ll be able to set the required Number of columns (you can add up to 12 columns) and Spacing between columns. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the Column divider box to add a vertical line between the columns. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes. To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move to the new column, click the Breaks icon on the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. The text will be moved to the next column.The inserted column breaks are indicated in your document with a dotted line: . If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar to make them visible. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key. To manually change the column width and spacing, you can use the horizontal ruler. To cancel columns and return to a regular single-column layout, click the Columns icon on the top toolbar and select the One option from the list. Show/hide nonprinting characters Nonprinting characters help you edit a document. They indicate the presence of various types of formatting elements, but they cannot be printed with the document even if they are displayed on the screen. To show or hide nonprinting characters, click the Nonprinting characters icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar. Alternatively, you can use the Ctrl+Shift+Num8 key combination. Nonprinting characters include: Spaces Inserted when you press the Spacebar on the keyboard. They create a space between characters. Tabs Inserted when you press the Tab key. They are used to advance the cursor to the next tab stop. Paragraph marks (i.e. Inserted when you press the Enter key. They ends a hard paragraph and adds a bit of space after it. They also returns) contain information about the paragraph formatting. Line breaks Inserted when you use the Shift+Enter key combination. (i.e. soft They break the current line and put the text lines close returns) together. Soft return are primarily used in titles and headings. Nonbreaking Inserted when you use the Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar key spaces combination. They create a space between characters which can''t be used to start a new line. Page breaks Inserted when you use the Breaks icon on the Insert or Layout tabs of the top toolbar and then select one of the Insert Page Break submenu options(the section break indicator differs depending on which option is selected: Next Page, Continuous Page, Even Page or Odd Page). Inserted when you use the Breaks icon on Section the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then breaks select one of the Insert Section Break submenu options (the section break indicator differs depending on which option is selected: Next Page, Continuous Page, Even Page or Odd Page). Column Inserted when you use the Breaks icon on breaks the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. End-of-cell and end-of Contain formatting codes for an individual cell and a row, row markers respectively. in tables Small black square in the margin Indicates that at least one of the paragraph options was to the left of applied, e.g. Keep lines together, Page break before. a paragraph Indicate the position of floating objects (objects whose Anchor wrapping style is different from Inline), e.g. images, symbols autoshapes, charts. You should select an object to make its anchor visible. Insert section breaks Section breaks allow you to apply different layouts or formatting styles to a certain part of your document. For example, you can use individual headers and footers, page numbering, footnotes format, margins, size, orientation, or column number for each separate section. Note: an inserted section break defines formatting of the preceding part of the document. To insert a section break at the current cursor position: 1. click the Breaks icon on the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the Insert Section Break submenu 3. select the necessary section break type: · Next Page - to start a new section from the next page· Continuous Page - to start a new section on the current page · Even Page - to start a new section from the next even page · Odd Page - to start a new section from the next odd page The added section breaks are indicated in your document with a double dotted line: If you do not see the inserted section breaks, click the icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display them. To remove a section break, select it with the mouse and press the Delete key. Since a section break defines formatting of the previous section, when you remove a section break, this section formatting will also be deleted. When you delete a section break, the text before and after the break is combined into one section. The new combined section will use the formatting from the section that followed the section break. Insert headers and footers To add a new header or footer to your document or edit one that already exists, 1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 2. click the Header/Footer icon on the top toolbar, 3. select one of the following options: · Edit Header to insert or edit the header text. · Edit Footer to insert or edit the footer text. 4. change the current parameters for headers or footers on the right sidebar:· Set the Position of the text: to the top for headers or to the bottom for footers. · Check the Different first page box to apply a different header or footer to the very first page or in case you don''t want to add any header/ footer to it at all. · Use the Different odd and even pages box to add different headers/footer for odd and even pages. · The Link to Previous option is available in case you''ve previously added sections into your document. If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). By default, this box is checked, so that the same headers/footers are applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different headers/footers for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed. To enter a text or edit the already entered text and adjust the header or footer settings, you can also double-click anywhere on the top or bottom margin of your document or click with the right mouse button there and select the only menu option - Edit Header or Edit Footer.To switch to the document body, double-click within the working area. The text you use as a header or footer will be displayed in gray. Insert date and time To insert Date and time into your document, 1. put the cursor where you want to insert Date and time, 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. click the Date & time icon on the top toolbar, 4. in the Date & time window that will appear, specify the following parameters: · Select the required language. · Select one of the suggested formats. · Check the Update automatically checkbox to let the date & time update automatically based on the current state. Note: you can also update the date and time manually by using the Refresh field option from the contextual menu. · Click the Set as default button to make the current format the default for this language. 5. Click the OK button. Insert page numbers To insert page numbers into your document,1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 2. click the Header/Footer icon on the top toolbar, 3. choose the Insert Page Number submenu, 4. select one of the following options: · To add a page number to each page of your document, select the page number position on the page. · To insert a page number at the current cursor position, select the To Current Position option. Note: to insert a current page number at the current cursor position you can also use the Ctrl+Shift+P key combination. To insert the total number of pages in your document (e.g. if you want to create the Page X of Y entry): 1. put the cursor where you want to insert the total number of pages, 2. click the Header/Footer icon on the top toolbar, 3. select the Insert number of pages option. To edit the page number settings, 1. double-click the page number added, 2. change the current parameters on the right sidebar:· Set the Position of page numbers on the page accordingly to the top and bottom of the page. · Check the Different first page box to apply a different page number to the very first page or in case you don''t want to add any number to it at all. · Use the Different odd and even pages box to insert different page numbers for odd and even pages. · The Link to Previous option is available in case you''ve previously added sections into your document. If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). By default, this box is checked, so that unified numbering is applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different page numbering for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed. · The Page Numbering section allows adjusting page numbering options throughout different sections of the document. The Continue from previous section option is selected by default and makes it possible to keep continuous page numbering after a section break. If you want to start page numbering with a specific number in the current section of the document, select the Start at radio button and enter the required starting value in the field on the right. To return to the document editing, double-click within the working area. Insert line numbers wThheenOyNoLuYnOeFeFdICtoEreDfeorctuomaesnpteEcdifiictolirnceaonf cthoeundtolcinuemseinnty, oeu.gr.dinocaumlegeanlt aagurteoemmaeticnat lolyr.aTchoisdfeeascturirpet.cUansebe useful tsheequence iLsinnoetNauppmlibeedrtsottohoel tteoxatpinpltyhelinoebnjeucmtsbseuricnhgatos tthaebledso,ctuemxtebnot.xPelse,acsheanrtost,ehtehaadtethrse/floinoetenrsu,mebobjects are treated as one line. tce.rTinhgese Applying line numbering 1. Open the Layout tab located at the top toolbar and click on the Line Numbers icon. 2. Choose the required parameters for a quick set-up in the opened drop-down menu: · Continuous - each line of the document will be assigned a sequence number.· Restart Each Page - the line numbering sequence will restart on each page of the document. · Restart Each Section - the line numbering sequence will restart in each section of the document. · Suppress for Current Paragraph - the current paragraph will be skipped in the line numbering sequence. To exclude several paragraphs from the sequence, select them via the left-mouse button before applying this parameter. 3. Specify the advanced parameters if needed. Click the Line Numbering Options item in the Line Numbers drop-down menu. Check the Add line numbering box to apply the line numbering to the document and to access the advanced parameters of the option: · Start at sets the starting numeric value of the line numbering sequence. The parameter is set to 1 by default. · From text specifies the distance between the line numbers and the text. Enter the required value in cm. The parameter is set to Auto by default. · Count by specifies the sequence numbers that are displayed if not counted by 1, i.e. the numbers are counted in a bunch by 2s, 3s, 4s, etc. Enter the required numeric value. The parameter is set to 1 by default. · Restart Each Page - the line numbering sequence will restart on each page of the document. · Restart Each Sectionthe line numbering sequence will restart in each section of the document. · Continuous - each line of the document will be assigned a sequence number. · The Apply changes to parameter specifies the part of the document you want to assign sequence numbers to. Choose one of the available presets: Current section to apply line numbering to the selected section of the document; This point forward to apply line numbering to the text following the current cursor position;Whole document to apply line numbering to the whole document. The parameter is set toWhole document by default. · Click OK to apply the changes.Removing line numbering To remove the line numbering sequence, 1. open the Layout tab located at the top toolbar and click on the Line Numbers icon, 2. choose the None option in the opened drop-down menu or choose the Line Numbering Options item in the menu and deactivate the Add line numbering box in the opened Line Numbers window. Insert footnotes You can insert footnotes to add explanations or comments for certain sentences or terms used in your text, make references to the sources, etc. Inserting footnotes To insert a footnote into your document, 1. position the insertion point at the end of the text passage that you want to add the footnote to, 2. switch to the References tab located at the top toolbar, 3. click the Footnote icon on the top toolbar, or click the arrow next to the Footnote icon and select the Insert Footnote option from the menu, The footnote mark (i.e. the superscript character that indicates a footnote) appears in the text of the document, and the insertion point moves to the bottom of the current page. 4. type in the footnote text. Repeat the above mentioned operations to add subsequent footnotes for other text passages in the document. The footnotes are numbered automatically. Display of footnotes in the document If you hover the mouse pointer over the footnote mark in the document text, a small pop-up window with the footnote text appears.Navigating through footnotes To easily navigate through the added footnotes in the text of the document, 1. click the arrow next to the Footnote icon on the References tab located at the top toolbar, 2. in the Go to Footnotes section, use the arrow to go to the previous footnote or the arrow to go to the next footnote. Editing footnotes To edit the footnotes settings, 1. click the arrow next to the Footnote icon on the References tab located at the top toolbar, 2. select the Notes Settings option from the menu, 3. change the current parameters in the Notes Settings window that will appear: · Activate the Footnote box to edit the footnotes only. · Set the Location of footnotes on the page selecting one of the available options from the drop-down menu to the right: o Bottom of page - to position footnotes at the bottom of the page (this option is selected by default).o Below text - to position footnotes closer to the text. This option can be useful in cases when the page contains a short text. · Adjust the footnotes Format: o Number Format - select the necessary number format from the available ones: 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... o Start at - use the arrows to set the number or letter you want to start numbering with. o Numbering - select a way to number your footnotes: o Continuous - to number footnotes sequentially throughout the document, o Restart each section - to start footnote numbering with 1 (or another specified character) at the beginning of each section, o Restart each page - to start footnote numbering with 1 (or another specified character) at the beginning of each page. o Custom Mark - set a special character or a word you want to use as the footnote mark (e.g. * or Note1). Enter the necessary character/word into the text entry field and click the Insert button at the bottom of the Notes Settings window. · Use the Apply changes to drop-down list if you want to apply the specified notes settings to theWhole document or the Current section only. Note: to use different footnotes formatting in separate parts of the document, you need to add section breaks first. 4. When you finish, click the Apply button. Removing footnotes To remove a single footnote, position the insertion point directly before the footnote mark in the text and press Delete. Other footnotes will be renumbered automatically. To delete all the footnotes in the document, 1. click the arrow next to the Footnote icon on the References tab located at the top toolbar, 2. select the Delete All Notes option from the menu. 3. choose the Delete All Footnotes option in the appeared window and click OK. Insert endnotes You can insert endnotes to add explanations or comments to specific terms or sentences, make references to the sources, etc. that are displayed at end of the document. Inserting endnotes To insert an endnote into your document, 1. position the insertion point at the end of the text passage or at the word that you want to add the endnote to,2. switch to the References tab located at the top toolbar, 3. click the Footnote icon on the top toolbar and select the Insert Endnote option from the menu. The endnote mark (i.e. the superscript character that indicates an endnote) appears in the text of the document, and the insertion point moves to the end of the document. 4. type in the endnote text. Repeat the above mentioned operations to add subsequent endnotes for other text passages in the document. The endnotes are numbered automatically: i, ii, iii, etc. by default. Display of endnotes in the document If you hover the mouse pointer over the endnote mark in the document text, a small pop-up window with the endnote text appears. Navigating through endnotes To easily navigate through the added endnotes in the text of the document, 1. click the arrow next to the Footnote icon on the References tab located at the top toolbar, 2. in the Go to Endnotes section, use the arrow to go to the previous endnote or the arrow to go to the next endnote. Editing endnotes To edit the endnotes settings, 1. click the arrow next to the Footnote icon on the References tab located at the top toolbar, 2. select the Notes Settings option from the menu, 3. change the current parameters in the Notes Settings window that will appear:· Set the Location of endnotes on the page selecting one of the available options from the drop-down menu to the right: o End of section - to position endnotes at the end of the sections. o End of document - to position endnotes at the end of the document (set by default). · Adjust the endnotes Format: o Number Format - select the necessary number format from the available ones: 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... o Start at - use the arrows to set the number or letter you want to start numbering with. o Numbering - select a way to number your endnotes: § Continuous - to number endnotes sequentially throughout the document, § Restart each section - to start endnote numbering with 1 (or another specified character) at the beginning of each section, § Restart each page - to start endnote numbering with 1 (or another specified character) at the beginning of each page. o Custom Mark - set a special character or a word you want to use as the endnote mark (e.g. * or Note1). Enter the necessary character/word into the text entry field and click the Insert button at the bottom of the Notes Settings window. · Use the Apply changes to drop-down list if you want to apply the specified notes settings to theWhole document or the Current section only. Note: to use different endnotes formatting in separate parts of the document, you need to add section breaks first. 4. When you finish, click the Apply button.Removing endnotes To remove a single endnote, position the insertion point directly before the endtnote mark in the text and press Delete. Other endnotes will be renumbered automatically. To delete all the endnotes in the document, 1. click the arrow next to the Footnote icon on the References tab located at the top toolbar, 2. select the Delete All Notes option from the menu. 3. choose the Delete All Endnotes option in the appeared window and click OK. Convert footnotes and endnotes yTeo h nu e ONLYOFFICE Document Editor allows you to quickly convert footnotes to endnotes, and vice versa, e.g., if dnsoeteesth, autsseotmheecfooorrtensopteosndinintghetoroelsfuolrtienfgfodrotlecsusmceonntvsehrosuioldn.be placed in the end. Instead of recreating them as 12.. Click the arrow next to the Footnote icon on the References tab located at the top toolbar, Hover over the Convert all notes menu item and choose one of the options from the list to the right: 3. · Convert all Footnotes to Endnotes to change all footnotes into endnotes; · Convert all Endnotes to Footnotes to change all endnotes to footnotes; · Swap Footnotes and Endnotes to change all endnotes to footnotes, and all footnotes to endnotes.Add bookmarks Bookmarks allow quickly access a certain part of the text or add a link to its location in the document. To add a bookmark in a document: 1. specify the place where you want the bookmark to be added: · put the mouse cursor at the beginning of the necessary text passage, or · select the necessary text passage, 2. switch to the References tab of the top toolbar, 3. click the Bookmark icon on the top toolbar, 4. in the Bookmarks window, enter the Bookmark name and click the Add button - a bookmark will be added to the bookmark list displayed below, Note: the bookmark name should begin with a letter, but it can also contain numbers. The bookmark name cannot contain spaces, but can include the underscore character "_". To access one of the added bookmarks within in the text: 1. click the Bookmark icon on the References tab of the top toolbar, 2. in the Bookmarks window, select the bookmark you want to access. To easily find the required bookmark in the list, you can sort the list of bookmarks by Name or by Location in the text, 3. check the Hidden bookmarks option to display hidden bookmarks in the list (i.e. the bookmarks automatically created by the program when adding references to a certain part of the document. For example, if you create a hyperlink to a certain heading withinthe document, the document editor automatically creates a hidden bookmark to the target of this link). 4. click the Go to button - the cursor will be positioned where the selected bookmark was added to the text, or the corresponding text passage will be selected, 5. click the Get Link button - a new window will open where you can press the Copy button to copy the link to the file which specifyes the bookmark location in the document. When you paste this link in a browser address bar and press Enter, the document will be opened where the selected bookmark was added. Note: if you want to share this link with other users, you''ll need to provide them with the corresponding access rights using the Sharing option on the Collaboration tab. 6. click the Close button to close the window. To delete a bookmark, select it in the bookmark list and click the Delete button. Add watermarks A watermark is a text or image placed under the main text layer. Text watermarks allow indicating the status of your document (for example, confidential, draft etc.). Image watermarks allow adding an image, for example, the logo of your company. To add a watermark in a document: 1. Switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar. 2. Click the Watermark icon on the top toolbar and choose the Custom Watermark option from the menu. After that theWatermark Settings window will appear.3. Select a watermark type you wish to insert: · Use the Text watermark option and adjust the available parameters: o Language - select one of the available languages from the list, o Text - select one of the available text examples in the selected language. For English, the following watermark texts are available: ASAP, CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DO NOT COPY, DRAFT, ORIGINAL, PERSONAL, SAMPLE, TOP SECRET, URGENT. o Font - select the font name and size from the corresponding drop-down lists. Use the icons on the right to set the font color or apply one of the font decoration styles: Bold, Italic, Underline, Strikeout, o Semitransparent - check this box if you want to apply transparency, o Layout - select the Diagonal or Horizontal option. · Use the Image watermark option and adjust the available parameters:· Choose the image file source using one of the options from the drop-down list: From File, From URL or From Storage - the image will be displayed in the preview window on the right, · Scale - select the necessary scale value from the available ones: Auto, 500%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 50%. 4. Click the OK button. To edit the added watermark, open theWatermark Settings window as described above, change the necessary parameters and click OK. To delete the added watermark click the Watermark icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and choose the Remove Watermark option from the menu. It''s also possible to use the None option in theWatermark Settings window. Paragraph formatting Align your text in a paragraph The text is commonly aligned in four ways: left-aligned text, right-aligned text, centered text or justified text. To align the text,1. place the cursor to the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text), 2. switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, 3. select the alignment type you would like to apply: · Left alignment (when the text is lined up to the left side of the page with the right side remaining unaligned) is done by clicking the Align left icon on the top toolbar. · Center alignment (when the text is lined up in the center of the page with the right and the left sides remaining unaligned) is done by clicking the Align center icon on the top toolbar. · Right alignment (when the text is lined up to the right side of the page with the left side remaining unaligned) is done by clicking the Align right icon on the top toolbar. · Justified alignment (when the text is lined up to both the left and the right sides of the page, and additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment) is done by clicking the Justified icon on the top toolbar. The alignment parameters are also available in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. 1. right-click the text and choose the Paragraph - Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or use the Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar, 2. open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, switch to the Indents & Spacing tab, 3. select one of the alignment types from the Alignment list: Left, Center, Right, Justified, 4. click the OK button to apply the changes.Select a background color for a paragraph A background color is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin. To apply a background color to a certain paragraph or change the current one, 1. select a color scheme for your document from the available ones clicking the Change color scheme icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar 2. place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text using the Ctrl+A key combination 3. open the color palettes window. You can access it in one of the following ways: · click the downward arrow next to the icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, or · click the color field next to the Background Color caption on the right sidebar, or · click the ''Show advanced settings'' link on the right sidebar or select the ''Paragraph Advanced Settings'' option on the right-click menu, then switch to the ''Borders & Fill'' tab within the ''Paragraph - Advanced Settings'' window and click the color field next to the Background Color caption. 4. select any color among the available palettes After you select the required color by using the icon, you''ll be able to apply this color to any selected paragraph just by clicking the icon (it displays the selected color), without having to choose this color in the palette again. If you use the Background Color option on the right sidebar or within the ''Paragraph - Advanced Settings'' window, remember that the selected color is not retained for quick access. (These options can be useful if you wish to select a different background color for a specific paragraph and if you are also using some general color selected by clicking the icon). To remove the background color from a certain paragraph, 1. place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text using the Ctrl+A key combination 2. open the color palettes window by clicking the color field next to the Background Color caption on the right sidebar 3. select the icon. Set up paragraph outline level An outline level is the paragraph level in the document structure. The following levels are available: Basic Text, Level 1 - Level 9. The outline level can be specified in different ways, for example, by using heading styles: once you assign a heading style (Heading 1 - Heading 9) to a paragraph, it acquires the corresponding outline level. If you assign a level to a paragraph using the paragraph advanced settings, the paragraph acquires the structure level only while its styleremains unchanged. The outline level can be also changed in the Navigation panel on the left using the contextual menu options. To change a paragraph outline level using the paragraph advanced settings, 1. right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or use the Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar, 2. open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, switch to the Indents & Spacing tab, 3. select the necessary outline level from the Outline level list. 4. click the OK button to apply the changes. Change paragraph indents the Document Editor, you can change the first line offset from the left side of the page as well as the paragraph offset from the left and right sides of the page. To do that, · set the necessary parameters on the right sidebar Paragraph settings in the Indents section: · Left - set the paragraph offset from the left side of the page specifying the necessary numeric value, · Right - set the paragraph offset from the right side of the page specifying the necessary numeric value,· Special - set an indent for the first line of the paragraph: select the corresponding menu item ((none), First line, Hanging) and change the default numeric value specified for First Line or Hanging, or 1. place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, 2. click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar, 3. in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, switch to the Indents & Spacing tab and set the necessary parameters in the Indents section (the parameters’ description is given above), 4. click the OK button.1. place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, 2. click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar, 3. in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, switch to the Indents & Spacing tab and set the necessary parameters in the Indents section: · Left - set the paragraph offset from the left side of the page specifying the necessary numeric value, · Right - set the paragraph offset from the right side of the page specifying the necessary numeric value, · Special - set an indent for the first line of the paragraph: select the corresponding menu item ((none), First line, Hanging) and change the default numeric value specified for First Line or Hanging, 4. click the OK button.To quickly change the paragraph offset from the left side of the page, you can also use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar: Decrease indent and Increase indent . You can also use the horizontal ruler to set indents. Select the necessary paragraph(s) and drag the indent markers along the ruler. · The First Line Indentmarker is used to set an offset from the left side of the page for the first line of the paragraph. · The Hanging Indentmarker is used to set an offset from the left side of the page for the second line and all the subsequent lines of the paragraph. · The Left Indentmarker is used to set an offset for the entire paragraph from the left side of the page. · The Right Indentmarker is used to set a paragraph offset from the right side of the page. Set paragraph line spacing In the Document Editor, you can set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current paragraph and the previous one or the subsequent paragraphs.To do that, 1. place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, 2. use the corresponding fields on the right sidebar to achieve the desired results: · Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among three options: at least (sets the minimum line spacing that is needed to fit the largest font or graphic in the line), multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right. · Paragraph Spacing defines the amount of spacing between paragraphs. o Before defines the amount of spacing before the paragraph. o After defines the amount of spacing after the paragraph. o Don''t add interval between paragraphs of the same style - please check this box if you don''t need any spacing between paragraphs of the same style. These parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar. Then switch to the Indents & Spacing tab and go to the Spacing section.To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Paragraph line spacing icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the required value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines. Insert page breaks In the Document Editor, you can add a page break to start a new page, insert a blank page and adjust pagination options. To insert a page break at the current cursor position click the Breaks icon on the Insert or Layout tab of the top toolbar or click the arrow next to this icon and select the Insert Page Break option from the menu. You can also use the Ctrl+Enter key combination. To insert a blank page at the current cursor position click the Blank Page icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar. This action inserts two page breaks that create a blank page. To insert a page break before the selected paragraph i.e. to start this paragraph at the top of a new page: · click the right mouse button and select the Page break before option in the menu, or · click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar, and check the Page break before box at the Line & Page Breaks tab of the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.To keep lines together so that only whole paragraphs will be moved to the new page (i.e. there will be no page break between the lines within a single paragraph), · click the right mouse button and select the Keep lines together option in the menu, or · click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option on the menu or use the Show advanced settings link at the right sidebar, and check the Keep lines together box at the Line & Page Breaks in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. The Line & Page Breaks tab of the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window allows you to set two more pagination options: · Keep with next - is used to prevent a page break between the selected paragraph and the next one. · Orphan control - is selected by default and used to prevent a single line of the paragraph (the first or last) from appearing at the top or bottom of the page. Add borders To add borders to a paragraph, page, or the whole document, 1. place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, 2. click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar, 3. switch to the Borders & Fill tab in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, 4. set the needed value for Border Size and select a Border Color,5. click within the available diagram or use buttons to select borders and apply the chosen style to them, 6. click the OK button. After adding the borders, you can also set paddings i.e. distances between the right, left, top and bottom borders and the paragraph. To set the necessary values, switch to the Paddings tab of the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window:Set tab stops In the Document Editor, you can change tab stops. A tab stop is a term used to describe the location where the cursor stops after the Tab key is pressed. To set tab stops you can use the horizontal ruler: 1. Select the necessary tab stop type by clicking the button in the upper left corner of the working area. The following three tab types are available: · Left Tab Stop lines up the text to the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop while you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler with the Left Tab Stopmarker. · Center Tab Stop centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler with the Center Tab Stopmarker. · Right Tab Stop lines up the text to the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop while you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler with the Right Tab Stopmarker. 2. Click on the bottom edge of the ruler where you want to place the tab stop. Drag it along the ruler to change its position. To remove the added tab stop drag it out of the ruler. You can also use the paragraph properties window to adjust tab stops. Click the right mouse button, select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Showadvanced settings link on the right sidebar, and switch to the Tabs tab in the opened Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. You can set the following parameters: · Default Tab is set at 1.25 cm. You can decrease or increase this value by using the arrow buttons or entering the required value in the box. · Tab Position is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the required value in this box, adjust it more precisely by using the arrow buttons and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. If you''ve previously added some tab stops using the ruler, all these tab positions will also be displayed in the list. · Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center or Right option from the drop-down list and press the Specify button. · Leader - allows choosing a character to create a leader for each tab positions. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between tabs. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the leader type from the drop-down list and press the Specify button. · To delete tab stops from the list, select a tab stop and press the Remove or Remove All button. Create lists To create a list in your document,1. place the cursor to the position where a list will be started (this can be a new line or the already entered text), 2. switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, 3. select the list type you would like to start: · Unordered list with markers is created using the Bullets icon on the top toolbar · Ordered list with digits or letters is created using the Numbering icon on the top toolbar Note: click the downward arrow next to the Bullets or Numbering icon to select how the list is going to look like. 4. each time you press the Enter key at the end of the line, a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the Backspace key and keep on typing common text paragraphs. The program also creates numbered lists automatically when you enter digit 1 with a dot or a bracket and a space after it: 1., 1). Bulleted lists can be created automatically when you enter the -, * characters and a space after them. You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting by clicking the Multilevel list , Decrease indent , and Increase indent icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. To change the list level, click the Numbering , Bullets , orMultilevel list icon and choose the Change List Level option, or place the cursor at the beginning of the line and press the Tab key on a keyboard to move to the next level of the list. Proceed with the list level needed.Note: the additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed on the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. Combine and separate lists To combine a list with the previous one: 1. click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button, 2. use the Join to previous list option from the contextual menu. The lists will be joined and the numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering. To separate a list: 1. click the list item where you want to begin a new list with the right mouse button, 2. use the Separate list option from the contextual menu. The lists will be combined, and the numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering.Change numbering To continue sequential numbering in the second list according to the previous list numbering: 1. click the first item of the second list with the right mouse button, 2. use the Continue numbering option from the contextual menu. The numbering will continue in accordance with the first list numbering. To set a certain numbering initial value: 1. click the list item where you want to apply a new numbering value with the right mouse button, 2. use the Set numbering value option from the contextual menu, 3. in the new opened window, set the required numeric value and click the OK button. Change the list settings To change the bulleted or numbered list settings, such as a bullet/number type, alignment, size and color: 1. click an existing list item or select the text you want to format as a list, 2. click the Bullets or Numbering icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, 3. select the List Settings option, 4. the List Settings window will open. The bulleted list settings window looks like this: The numbered list settings window looks like this:For the bulleted list, you can choose a character used as a bullet, while for the numbered list you can choose the numbering type. The Alignment, Size and Color options are the same both for the bulleted and numbered lists. · Bullet allows selecting the required character used for the bulleted list. When you click on the Font and Symbol field, the Symbol window will appear, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. · Type allows selecting the required numbering type used for the numbered list. The following options are available: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... · Alignment allows selecting the required bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally. The following alignment types are available: Left, Center, Right. · Size allows selecting the required bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number size corresponds to the text size. You can choose one of the predefined sizes ranging from 8 to 96. · Color allows selecting the required bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors in the palette, or specify a custom color. All the changes are displayed in the Preview field. 5. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window.To change the multilevel list settings, 1. click a list item, 2. click theMultilevel list icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, 3. select the List Settings option, 4. the List Settings window will open. The multilevel list settings window looks like this: Choose the necessary level of the list in the Level field on the left, then use the buttons on the top to adjust the bullet or number appearance for the selected level: · Type allows selecting the required numbering type used for the numbered list or the required character used for the bulleted list. The following options are available for the numbered list: None, 1, 2, 3,..., a, b, c,..., A, B, C,..., i, ii, iii,..., I, II, III,.... For the bulleted list, you can choose one of the default symbols or use the New bullet option. When you click this option, the Symbol window will appear, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. · Alignment allows selecting the required bullet/number alignment type that is used to align bullets/numbers horizontally at the beginning of the paragraph. The following alignment types are available: Left, Center, Right. · Size allows selecting the required bullet/number size. The Like a text option is selected by default. You can choose one of the predefined sizes ranging from 8 to 96. · Color allows selecting the required bullet/number color. The Like a text option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the bullet or number color corresponds to the text color. You can choose the Automatic option to apply the automatic color, or select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color.All the changes are displayed in the Preview field. 5. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window. Text formatting Apply formatting styles Each formatting style is a set of predefined formatting options: (font size, color, line spacing, alignment etc.). The styles allow you to quickly format different parts of the document (headings, subheadings, lists, normal text, quotes) instead of applying several formatting options individually each time. This also ensures the consistent appearance of the whole document. You can also use styles to create a table of contents or a table of figures. Applying a style depends on whether this style is a paragraph style (normal, no spacing, headings, list paragraph etc.), or a text style (based on the font type, size, color). It also depends on whether a text passage is selected, or the mouse cursor is placed on a word. In some cases you might need to select the required style from the style library twice, so that it can be applied correctly: when you click the style in the style panel for the first time, the paragraph style properties are applied. When you click it for the second time, the text properties are applied. Use default styles To apply one of the available text formatting styles, 1. place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs, 2. select the required style from the style gallery on the right on the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following formatting styles are available: normal, no spacing, heading 1-9, title, subtitle, quote, intense quote, list paragraph, footer, header, footnote text. Edit existing styles and create new ones To change an existing style:1. Apply the necessary style to a paragraph. 2. Select the paragraph text and change all the formatting parameters you need. 3. Save the changes made: · right-click the edited text, select the Formatting as Style option and then choose the Update ''StyleName'' Style option (''StyleName'' corresponds to the style you''ve applied at the step 1), · or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery, right-click the style you want to change and select the Update from selection option. Once the style is modified, all the paragraphs in the document formatted with this style will change their appearance correspondingly. To create a completely new style: 1. Format a text passage as you need. 2. Select an appropriate way to save the style: · right-click the edited text, select the Formatting as Style option and then choose the Create new Style option, · or select the edited text passage with the mouse, drop-down the style gallery and click the New style from selection option. 3. Set the new style parameters in the opened Create New Style window: · Specify the new style name in the text entry field. · Select the desired style for the subsequent paragraph from the Next paragraph style list. It''s also possible to choose the Same as created new style option. · Click the OK button. The created style will be added to the style gallery. Manage your custom styles: · To restore the default settings of a certain style you''ve changed, right-click the style you want to restore and select the Restore to default option. · To restore the default settings of all the styles you''ve changed, right-click any default style in the style gallery and select the Restore all to default styles option.· To delete one of the new styles you''ve created, right-click the style you want to delete and select the Delete style option. · To delete all the new styles you''ve created, right-click any new style you''ve created and select the Delete all custom styles option. Set the font type, size, and color You can select the font type, its size and color using the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the already existing text in the document, select it with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the formatting. Used to select a font from the list of the the available fonts. If the Font required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available in the desktop version. Used to choose from the preset font size values in the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, Font size 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It''s also possible to manually enter a custom value up to 300 pt in the font size field. Press Enter to confirm. Increment Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time font size the button is pressed.Decrement Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each font size time the button is pressed. Used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates the highlighter pen effect throughout the text. You can select the required part of the text and click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color in the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected Color scheme and includes 16 colors) - the color will be Highlight applied to the selected text. Alternatively, you can first choose a color highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this and you''ll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting, just click the icon once again. To delete the highlight color, choose the No Fill option. The Highlight color is different from the Background color as the latter is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin. Used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. By default, the automatic font color is set in a new blank document. It is displayed as a black font on the white background. If you change the background color to black, the font color will automatically change to white to keep the text clearly visible. To Font color choose a different color, click the downward arrow next to the icon and select a color from the available palettes (the colors in the Theme Colors palette depend on the selected color scheme). After you change the default font color, you can use the Automatic option in the color palettes window to quickly restore the automatic color for the selected text passage. Apply font decoration styles You can apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the already existing text in the document, select it with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the formatting. Bold Used to make the font bold giving it a heavier appearance. Italic Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right. Underline Used to make the text underlined with a line going under the letters. Strikeout Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Superscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions.Subscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. To access the advanced font settings, click the right mouse button and select the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. Then the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window will appear, and you will need to switch to the Font tab. Here you can use the following font decoration styles and settings: · Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. · Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a double line going through the letters. · Superscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. · Subscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. · Small caps is used to make all letters lower case. · All caps is used to make all letters upper case. · Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. · Position is used to set the characters position (vertical offset) in the line. Increase the default value to move characters upwards, or decrease the default value to move characters downwards. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. · All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below.Copy/clear text formatting To copy a certain text formatting, 1. select the text passage whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, 2. click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this ), 3. select the required text passage to apply the same formatting. To apply the copied formatting to multiple text passages, 1. select the text passage whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or use the keyboard, 2. double-click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this and the Copy style icon will remain selected: ), 3. select the necessary text passages one by one to apply the same formatting to each of them, 4. to exit this mode, click the Copy style icon once again or press the Esc key on the keyboard. To quickly remove the applied formatting from your text, 1. select the text passage whose formatting you want to remove, 2. click the Clear style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Add hyperlinks To add a hyperlink, 1. place the cursor in the text that you want to display as a hyperlink, 2. switch to the Insert or References tab of the top toolbar, 3. click the Hyperlink icon on the top toolbar, 4. after that the Hyperlink Settings window will appear, and you will be able to specify the hyperlink parameters: · Select a link type you wish to insert: Use the External Link option and enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com in the Link to field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website.· Use the Place in Document option and select one of the existing headings in the document text or one of previously added bookmarks if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain place in the same document. · Display - enter a text that will get clickable and lead to the address specified in the upper field. · ScreenTip text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window with a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink to be pointed. 5. Click the OK button.To add a hyperlink, you can also use the Ctrl+K key combination or click with the right mouse button at a position where a hyperlink will be added and select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu. Note: it''s also possible to select a character, word, word combination, text passage with the mouse or using the keyboard and then open the Hyperlink Settings window as described above. In this case, the Display field will be filled with the text fragment you selected. By hovering the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear containing the text you specified. You can follow the link by pressing the CTRL key and clicking the link in your document. To edit or delete the added hyperlink, click it with the right mouse button, select the Hyperlink option and then the action you want to perform - Edit Hyperlink or Remove Hyperlink. Insert cross-references Cross-references are used to create links leading to other parts of the same document, e.g. headings or objects such as charts or tables. Such references appear in the form of a hyperlink. Creating a cross-reference 1. Position your cursor in the place you want to insert a cross-reference. 2. Go to the References tab and click on the Cross-reference icon. 3. Set the required parameters in the opened Cross-reference window:· The Reference type drop-down menu specifies the item you wish to refer to, i.e. a numbered item (set by default), a heading, a bookmark, a footnote, an endnote, an equation, a figure, and a table. Choose the required item type. · The Insert reference to drop-down menu specifies the text or numeric value of a reference you want to insert depending on the item you chose in the Reference typemenu. For example, if you chose the Heading option, you may specify the following contents: Heading text, Page number, Heading number, Heading number (no context), Heading number (full context), Above/below.The full list of the options provided depending on the chosen reference type · Check the Insert as hyperlink box to turn the reference into an active link. · Check the Include above/below box (if available) to specify the position of the item you refer to. The ONLYOFFICE Document Editor will automatically insert words “above” or “below” depending on the position of the item. · Check the Separate numbers with box to specify the separator in the box to the right. The separators are needed for full context references. · The For which field offers you the items available according to the Reference type you have chosen, e.g. if you chose the Heading option, you will see the full list of the headings in the document. 4. Click Insert to create a cross-reference. Removing a cross-reference To delete a cross-reference, select the cross-reference you wish to remove and press the Delete key. Insert a drop cap A drop cap is a large capital letter used at the beginning of a paragraph or section. The size of a drop cap is usually several lines. To add a drop cap, 1. place the cursor within the required paragraph, 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. click the Drop Cap icon on the top toolbar, 4. in the opened drop-down list select the option you need: · In Text - to place the drop cap within the paragraph. · In Margin - to place the drop cap in the left margin.The first character of the selected paragraph will be transformed into a drop cap. If you need the drop cap to include some more characters, add them manually: select the drop cap and type in other letters you need. To adjust the drop cap appearance (i.e. font size, type, decoration style or color), select the letter and use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. When the drop cap is selected, it''s surrounded by a frame (a container used to position the drop cap on the page). You can quickly change the frame size dragging its borders or change its position using the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the frame. To delete the added drop cap, select it, click the Drop Cap icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the None option from the drop-down list. To adjust the added drop cap parameters, select it, click the Drop Cap icon at the Insert tab of the top toolbar and choose the Drop Cap Settings option from the drop-down list. The Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window will appear:The Drop Cap tab allows adjusting the following parameters: · Position is used to change the placement of a drop cap. Select the In Text or In Margin option, or click None to delete the drop cap. · Font is used to select a font from the list of the available fonts. · Height in rows is used to define how many lines a drop cap should span. It''s possible to select a value from 1 to 10. · Distance from text is used to specify the amount of spacing between the text of the paragraph and the right border of the drop cap frame. The Borders & Fill tab allows adding a border around a drop cap and adjusting its parameters. They are the following: · Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the borders (top, bottom, left, right or their combination) you want to apply these settings to. · Background color - choose the color for the drop cap background.TheMargins tab allows setting the distance between the drop cap and the Top, Bottom, Left and Right borders around it (if the borders have previously been added). Once the drop cap is added you can also change the Frame parameters. To access them, right click within the frame and select the Frame Advanced Settings from the menu. The Frame - Advanced Settings window will open:The Frame tab allows adjusting the following parameters: · Position is used to select the Inline or Flow wrapping style. You can also click None to delete the frame. · Width and Height are used to change the frame dimensions. The Auto option allows automatically adjusting the frame size to fit the drop cap. The Exactly option allows specifying fixed values. The At least option is used to set the minimum height value (if you change the drop cap size, the frame height changes accordingly, but it cannot be less than the specified value). · Horizontal parameters are used either to set the exact position of the frame in the selected units of measurement with respect to a margin, page or column, or to align the frame (left, center or right) with respect to one of these reference points. You can also set the horizontal Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the vertical frame borders and the text of the paragraph. · Vertical parameters are used either to set the exact position of the frame is the selected units of measurement with respect to a margin, page or paragraph, or to align the frame (top, center or bottom) with respect to one of these reference points. You can also set the vertical Distance from text i.e. the amount of space between the horizontal frame borders and the text of the paragraph. · Move with text is used to make sure that the frame moves as the paragraph to which it is anchored.The Borders & Fill andMargins allow adjusting the same parameters as the corresponding tabs in the Drop Cap - Advanced Settings window. Operations on objects Insert tables Insert a table To insert a table into the document text, 1. place the cursor where the table should be added, 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. click the Table icon on the top toolbar, 4. select the option to create a table: · either a table with predefined number of cells (10 by 8 cells maximum) If you want to quickly add a table, just select the number of rows (8 maximum) and columns (10 maximum). · or a custom table In case you need more than 10 by 8 cell table, select the Insert Custom Table option that will open the window where you can enter the necessary number of rows and columns respectively, then click the OK button. · If you want to draw a table using the mouse, select the Draw Table option. This can be useful, if you want to create a table with rows and colums of different sizes. The mouse cursor will turn into the pencil . Draw a rectangular shape where you want to add a table, then add rows by drawing horizontal lines and columns by drawing vertical lines within the table boundary. 5. once the table is added you can change its properties, size and position. To resize a table, hover the mouse cursor over the handle in its lower right corner and drag it until the table reaches the necessary size.You can also manually change the width of a certain column or the height of a row. Move the mouse cursor over the right border of the column so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the left or right to set the necessary width. To change the height of a single row manually, move the mouse cursor over the bottom border of the row so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border up or down. To move a table, hold down the handle in its upper left corner and drag it to the necessary place in the document. Select a table or its part To select an entire table, click the handle in its upper left corner. To select a certain cell, move the mouse cursor to the left side of the necessary cell so that the cursor turns into the black arrow , then left-click. To select a certain row, move the mouse cursor to the left border of the table next to the necessary row so that the cursor turns into the horizontal black arrow , then left-click. To select a certain column, move the mouse cursor to the top border of the necessary column so that the cursor turns into the downward black arrow , then left-click. It''s also possible to select a cell, row, column or table using options from the contextual menu or from the Rows & Columns section on the right sidebar. Adjust table settings Some of the table properties as well as its structure can be altered using the right-click menu. The menu options are: · Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. · Select is used to select a row, column, cell, or table. · Insert is used to insert a row above or row below the row where the cursor is placed as well as to insert a column at the left or right side from the column where the cursor is placed. · It''s also possible to insert several rows or columns. If you select the Several Rows/Columns option, the Insert Several window will appear. Select the Rows or Columns option from the list, specify the number of rows/column you want to add, choose where they should be added: Above the cursor or Below the cursor and click OK.· Delete is used to delete a row, column, table or cells. If you select the Cells option, the Delete Cells window will open, where you can select if you want to Shift cells left, Delete entire row, or Delete entire column. · Merge Cells is available if two or more cells are selected and is used to merge them. · It''s also possible to merge cells by erasing a boundary between them using the eraser tool. To do this, click the Table icon on the top toolbar, choose the Erase Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the eraser . Move the mouse cursor over the border between the cells you want to merge and erase it. · Split Cell... is used to open a window where you can select the needed number of columns and rows the cell will be split in. · It''s also possible to split a cell by drawing rows or columns using the pencil tool. To do this, click the Table icon on the top toolbar, choose the Draw Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the pencil . Draw a horizontal line to create a row or a vertical line to create a column. · Distribute rows is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same height without changing the overall table height. · Distribute columns is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same width without changing the overall table width. · Cell Vertical Alignment is used to align the text top, center or bottom in the selected cell. · Text Direction - is used to change the text orientation in a cell. You can place the text horizontally, vertically from top to bottom (Rotate Text Down), or vertically from bottom to top (Rotate Text Up). · Table Advanced Settings is used to open the ''Table - Advanced Settings'' window. · Hyperlink is used to insert a hyperlink. · Paragraph Advanced Settings is used to open the ''Paragraph - Advanced Settings'' window.You can also change the table properties on the right sidebar: · Rows and Columns are used to select the table parts that you want to be highlighted. For rows: · Header - to highlight the first row · Total - to highlight the last row · Banded - to highlight every other row For columns: · First - to highlight the first column · Last - to highlight the last column · Banded - to highlight every other column · Select from Template is used to choose a table template from the available ones. · Borders Style is used to select the border size, color, style as well as background color. · Rows & Columns is used to perform some operations with the table: select, delete, insert rows and columns, merge cells, split a cell.· Rows & Columns Size is used to adjust the width and height of the currently selected cell. In this section, you can also Distribute rows so that all the selected cells have equal height or Distribute columns so that all the selected cells have equal width. · Add formula is used to insert a formula into the selected table cell. · Repeat as header row at the top of each page is used to insert the same header row at the top of each page in long tables. · Show advanced settings is used to open the ''Table - Advanced Settings'' window. Adjust table advanced settings To change the advanced table properties, click the table with the right mouse button and select the Table Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The table properties window will open: The Table tab allows changing the properties of the entire table. · The Table Size section contains the following parameters: o Width - by default, the table width is automatically adjusted to fit the page width, i.e. the table occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. You can check this box and specify the necessary table width manually. o Measure in allows specifying the table width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall page width.Note: you can also adjust the table size manually changing the row height and column width. Move the mouse cursor over a row/column border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border. You can also use the markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width and the markers on the vertical ruler to change the row height. o Automatically resize to fit contents - allows automatically change the width of each column in accordance with the text within its cells. · The Default Cell Margins section allows changing the space between the text within the cells and the cell border used by default. · The Options section allows changing the following parameter: o Spacing between cells - the cell spacing which will be filled with the Table Background color. The Cell tab allows changing the properties of individual cells. First you need to select the required cell or select the entire table to change the properties of all its cells. · The Cell Size section contains the following parameters: o Preferred width - allows setting the preferred cell width. This is the size that a cell strives to fit, but in some cases, it may not be possible to fit this exact value. For example, if the text within a cell exceeds the specified width, it will be broken into the next line so that the preferred cell width remains unchanged, but if you insert a new column, the preferred width will be reduced.o Measure in - allows specifying the cell width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall table width. Note: you can also adjust the cell width manually. To make a single cell in a column wider or narrower than the overall column width, select the necessary cell and move the mouse cursor over its right border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow, then drag the border. To change the width of all the cells in a column, use the markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width. · The Cell Margins allows adjusting the space between the text within the cells and the cell border. By default, the standard values are used (the default, these values can also be altered on the Table tab), but you can uncheck the Use default margins box and enter the necessary values manually. · The Cell Options section allows changing the following parameter: o TheWrap text option is enabled by default. It allows wrapping the text within a cell that exceeds its width onto the next line expanding the row height and keeping the column width unchanged. The Borders & Background tab contains the following parameters: · Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the way it will be displayed in the cells. Note: in case you choose not to show the table borders by clicking the button or deselecting all the borders manually on the diagram, they will be indicated with a dottedline in the document. To make them disappear at all, click the Nonprinting characters icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the Hidden Table Borders option. · Cell Background - the color for the background within the cells (available only if one or more cells are selected or the Allow spacing between cells option is selected at the Table tab). · Table Background - the color for the table background or the space background between the cells in case the Allow spacing between cells option is selected on the Table tab. The Table Position tab is available only if the Flow table option on the Text Wrapping tab is selected and contains the following parameters: · Horizontal parameters include the table alignment (left, center, right) relative tomargin, page or text as well as the table position to the right ofmargin, page or text. · Vertical parameters include the table alignment (top, center, bottom) relative tomargin, page or text as well as the table position belowmargin, page or text. · The Options section allows changing the following parameters: o Move object with text ensures that the table moves with the text. o Allow overlap controls whether two tables are merged into one large table or overlap if you drag them near each other on the page.The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: · Text wrapping style - Inline table or Flow table. Use the necessary option to change the way the table is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline table) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select the flow table). · After you select the wrapping style, the additional wrapping parameters can be set both for inline and flow tables: o For the inline table, you can specify the table alignment and indent from left. o For the flow table, you can specify the distance from text and table position on the Table Position tab.The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the table. Use formulas in tables Insert a formula You can perform simple calculations on data in table cells by adding formulas. To insert a formula into a table cell, 1. place the cursor within the cell where you want to display the result, 2. click the Add formula button on the right sidebar, 3. in the opened Formula Settings window, enter the required formula into the Formula field. You can enter the required formula manually using the common mathematical operators (+, -, *, /), e.g. =A1*B2 or use the Paste Function drop-down list to select one of the embedded functions, e.g. =PRODUCT(A1,B2).4. manually specify the required arguments within the parentheses in the Formula field. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas. 5. use the Number Format drop-down list if you want to display the result in a certain number format, 6. click OK. The result will be displayed in the selected cell. To edit the added formula, select the result in the cell and click the Add formula button on the right sidebar, make the required changes in the Formula Settings window and click OK. Add references to cells You can use the following arguments to quickly add references to cell ranges: · ABOVE - a reference to all the cells in the column above the selected cell · LEFT - a reference to all the cells in the row to the left of the selected cell · BELOW - a reference to all the cells in the column below the selected cell · RIGHT - a reference to all the cells in the row to the right of the selected cell These arguments can be used with the AVERAGE, COUNT, MAX, MIN, PRODUCT, SUM functions. You can also manually enter references to a certain cell (e.g., A1) or a range of cells (e.g., A1:B3). Use bookmarks If you have added some bookmarks to certain cells within your table, you can use these bookmarks as arguments when entering formulas. In the Formula Settings window, place the cursor within the parentheses in the Formula entry field where you want the argument to be added and use the Paste Bookmark drop-down list to select one of the previously added bookmarks.Update formula results If you change some values in the table cells, you will need to manually update the formula results: · To update a single formula result, select the necessary result and press F9 or right-click the result and use the Update field option from the menu. · To update several formula results, select the necessary cells or the entire table and press F9. Embedded functions You can use the following standard math, statistical and logical functions: Category Function Description Example The function is used to return Mathematical ABS(x) the absolute value of a =ABS(-10) number. Returns 10 The function is used to check if the logical value you Logical AND(logical1, =AND(1>0,1>3) logical2, ...) entered is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 1 (TRUE) if all Returns 0 the arguments are TRUE. Statistical AVERAGE(argument- The function is used to =AVERAGE(4,10) list) analyze the range of data and find the average value. Returns 7 The function is used to count the number of the selected Statistical COUNT(argument- list) cells which contain numbers =COUNT(A1:B3) ignoring empty cells or those Returns 6 contaning text. The function evaluates if a value in the cell is defined. The function returns 1 if the Logical DEFINED() value is defined and calculated without errors and =DEFINED(A1) returns 0 if the value is not defined or calculated with an error. The function returns 0 Logical FALSE() (FALSE) and does not require =FALSE any argument. Returns 0 Logical IF(logical_test, The function is used to check =IF(3>1,1,0)value_if_true, the logical expression and Returns 1 value_if_false) return one value if it is TRUE, or another if it is FALSE. The function is used to Mathematical INT(x) analyze and return the =INT(2.5) integer part of the specified Returns 2 number. n is used to Statistical MAX(number1, The functio number2, ...) analyze the range of data and =MAX(15,18,6) find the largest number. Returns 18 Statistical MIN(number1, The function is used to 5,18,6) number2, ...) analyze the range of data and =MIN(1 find the smallest number. Returns 6 The function is used to return Mathematical MOD(x, y) the remainder after the =MOD(6,3) division of a number by the Returns 0 specified divisor. The function is used to check if the logical value you entered is TRUE or FALSE. The Logical NOT(logical) function returns 1 (TRUE) if =NOT(2<5) the argument is FALSE and 0 Returns 0 (FALSE) if the argument is TRUE. The function is used to check Logical OR(logical1, if the logical value you =OR(1>0,1>3) logical2, ...) entered is TRUE or FALSE. The function returns 0 (FALSE) if Returns 1 all the arguments are FALSE. The function is used to Mathematical PRODUCT(argument- multiply all the numbers in =PRODUCT(2,5) list) the selected range of cells Returns 10 and return the product. The function is used to round Mathematical ROUND(x, =ROUND(2.25,1) num_digits) the number to the desired number of digits. Returns 2.3 The function is used to return the sign of a number. If the Mathematical SIGN(x) number is positive, the =SIGN(-12) function returns 1. If the Returns -1 number is negative, the function returns -1. If thenumber is 0, the function returns 0. The function is used to add all Mathematical SUM(argument-list) the numbers in the selected =SUM(5,3,2) range of cells and return the Returns 10 result. The function returns 1 (TRUE) Logical TRUE() and does not require any =TRUE argument. Returns 1 Insert images In the Document Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your document. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insert an image To insert an image into the document text, 1. place the cursor where you want the image to be put, 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. click the Image icon on the top toolbar, 4. select one of the following options to load the image: · the Image from File option will open a standard dialog window for to select a file. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary file and click the Open button · the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the web address of the requiredimage, and click the OK button · the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button 5. once the image is added, you can change its size, properties, and position.Move and resize images To change the image size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected image while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the image position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the image. Drag the image to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the image, the guide lines are displayed to help you precisely position the object on the page (if the selected wrapping style is different from the inline). To rotate the image, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating.Adjust image settings Some of the image settings can be altered using the Image settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the image and choose the Image settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: · Size is used to view theWidth and Height of the current image. If necessary, you can restore the actual image size clicking the Actual Size button. The Fit to Margin button allows you to resize the image, so that it occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. The Crop button is used to crop the image. Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of each its side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the icon and drag the area. o To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side. o To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles. o To equally crop the two opposite sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides. o To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles. When the cropping area is specified, click the Crop button once again, or press the Esc key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes.After the cropping area is selected, it''s also possible to use the Fill and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need: o If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while the other parts of the image will be removed. o If you select the Fit option, the image will be resized so that it fits the height and the width of the cropping area. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area. · Rotation is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: o to rotate the image by 90 degrees counterclockwise o to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise o to flip the image horizontally (left to right) o to flip the image vertically (upside down) · Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). · Replace Image is used to replace the current image by loading another one From File, From Storage, or From URL. You can also find some of these options in the right-click menu. The menu options are: · Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. · Arrange is used to bring the selected image to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup images to perform operations with several of them at once. · Align is used to align the image to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle or at the bottom. · Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. · Rotate is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. · Crop is used to apply one of the cropping options: Crop, Fill or Fit. Select the Crop option from the submenu, then drag the cropping handles to set the cropping area, and click one of these three options from the submenu once again to apply the changes. · Actual Size is used to change the current image size to the actual one.· Replace image is used to replace the current image by loading another one From File or From URL. · Image Advanced Settings is used to open the ''Image - Advanced Settings'' window. When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Stroke type, size and color as well as change the shape type selecting another shape from the Change Autoshapemenu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. On the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image. Adjust image advanced settings To change the image advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The image properties window will open:The Size tab contains the following parameters: · Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button.The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: · Angle - use this option to rotate the image by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. · Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the image horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the image vertically (upside down).The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: · Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the image is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). o Inline - the image is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the image moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. o If one of the following styles is selected, the image can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: o Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the image. o Tight - the text wraps the actual image edges. o Through - the text wraps around the image edges and fills in the open white space within the image. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu.o Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the image. o In front - the image overlaps the text. o Behind - the text overlaps the image. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if you select a wrapping style other than inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: · The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: o Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, o Absolute Positionmeasured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin,o Relative positionmeasured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. · The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three image positioning types: o Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, o Absolute Positionmeasured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, o Relative positionmeasured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. · Move object with text ensures that the image moves along with the text to which it is anchored. · Allow overlapmakes is possible for two images to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the image contains.Insert autoshapes Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape to your document, 1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 2. click the Shape icon on the top toolbar, 3. select one of the available autoshape groups: basic shapes, figured arrows, math, charts, stars & ribbons, callouts, buttons, rectangles, lines, 4. click the necessary autoshape within the selected group, 5. place the mouse cursor where the shape should be added, 6. once the autoshape is added, you can change its size, position and properties. Note: to add a caption to an autoshape, make sure the required shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The added text becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it). It''s also possible to add a caption to the autoshape. Move and resize autoshapes To change the autoshape size, drag small squares situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. When modifying some shapes, for example figured arrows or callouts, the yellow diamond- shaped icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow. To alter the autoshape position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the required position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the autoshape, the guide lines are displayed to help you precisely position the object on the page (if the selected wrapping style is not inline). To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging.To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Adjust autoshape settings To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are: · Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. · Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. · Align is used to align the shape to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle, at the bottom. · Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. · Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. · Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the ''Shape - Advanced Settings'' window. Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the shape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: · Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: o Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: o Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fillmenu on the right sidebar:Available menu options: · Style - choose between Linear or Radial: o Linear is used when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to- bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. Click Direction to choose a preset direction and click Angle for a precise gradient angle. o Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. · Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. o Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. o Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. o To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. · Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background.o If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. o If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape, open the From Texturemenu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. o In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. · Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. o Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. o Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. o Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. · No Fill - select this option if you don''t want to use any fill.· Opacity - use this section to set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. · Stroke - use this section to change the autoshape stroke width, color or type. o To change the stroke width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don''t want to use any stroke. o To change the stroke color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. o To change the stroke type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). · Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: o to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise o to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise o to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) o to flip the shape vertically (upside down) · Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below).· Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. · Show shadow - check this option to display the shape with a shadow. Adjust autoshape advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click it and select the Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The ''Shape - Advanced Settings'' window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: · Width - use one of these options to change the autoshape width. o Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). o Relative - specify a percentage relative to the left margin width, the margin (i.e. the distance between the left and right margins), the page width, or the right margin width. · Height - use one of these options to change the autoshape height. o Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab).o Relative - specify a percentage relative to the margin (i.e. the distance between the top and bottom margins), the bottom margin height, the page height, or the top margin height. · If the Lock aspect ratio option is checked, the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: · Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. · Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down).The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: · Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the shape is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). o Inline - the shape is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the shape moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. o If one of the following styles is selected, the shape can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: o Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the shape. o Tight - the text wraps the actual shape edges. o Through - the text wraps around the shape edges and fills in the open white space within the shape. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. o Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the shape.o In front - the shape overlaps the text. o Behind - the text overlaps the shape. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: · The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: o Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, o Absolute Positionmeasured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, o Relative positionmeasured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin.· The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: o Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, o Absolute Positionmeasured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, o Relative positionmeasured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. · Move object with text ensures that the autoshape moves along with the text to which it is anchored. · Allow overlapmakes it possible for two autoshapes to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. TheWeights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: · Line Style - this option group allows specifying the following parameters: o Cap Typ e - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: § Flat - the end points will be flat.§ Round - the end points will be rounded. § Square - the end points will be square. o Join Type - this option allows setting the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: § Round - the corner will be rounded. § Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. § Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. · Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows setting the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists. The Text Padding tab allows changing the Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled.The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains. Insert charts Insert a chart To insert a chart into your document, 1. place the cursor where the chart should be added, 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. click the Chart icon on the top toolbar, 4. select the needed chart type from the available ones: · Column Charts o Clustered column o Stacked column o 100% stacked column o 3-D Clustered Column o 3-D Stacked Column o 3-D 100% stacked columno 3-D Column · Line Charts o Line o Stacked line o 100% stacked line o Line with markers o Stacked line with markers o 100% stacked line with markers o 3-D Line · Pie Charts o Pie o Doughnut o 3-D Pie · Bar Charts o Clustered bar o Stacked bar o 100% stacked bar o 3-D clustered bar o 3-D stacked bar o 3-D 100% stacked bar · Area Charts o Area o Stacked area o 100% stacked area o Stock Charts · XY (Scatter) Charts o Scatter o Stacked bar o Scatter with smooth lines and markers o Scatter with smooth lines o Scatter with straight lines and markers o Scatter with straight lines · Combo Charts o Clustered column - line o Clustered column - line on secondary axis o Stacked area - clustered column o Custom combination 5. after that the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: · and for copying and pasting the copied data · and for undoing and redoing actions · for inserting a function · and for decreasing and increasing decimal places· for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells 6. Click the Select Data button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart Data window will open. 1. Use the Chart Data dialog to manage Chart Data Range, Legend Entries (Series), Horizontal (Category) Axis Label and Switch Row/Column.· Chart Data Range - select data for your chart. o Click the icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select data range. · Legend Entries (Series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries. o In Legend Entries (Series), click Add button. o In Edit Series, type a new legend entry or click the icon on the right of the Select name box.· Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels - change text for category labels. o In Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels, click Edit. o In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select data range. · Switch Row/Column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis. 2. Click OK button to apply the changes and close the window. 7. Click the Change Chart Type button in the Chart Editor window to choose chart type and style. Select a chart from the available sections: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, Stock, XY (Scatter), or Combo.When you choose Combo Charts, the Chart Type window lists chart series and allows choosing the types of charts to combine and selecting data series to place on a seconary axis.8. change the chart settings by clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open.The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. · Specify the Chart Title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: o None to not display a chart title, o Overlay to overlay and center a title on the plot area, o No Overlay to display the title above the plot area. · Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: o None to not display a legend, o Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, o Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, o Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, o Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, o Left Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area, o Right Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area. · Specify the Data Labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: o specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. § For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner Bottom, Inner Top, Outer Top. § For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. § For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to Width, Inner Top, Outer Top. § For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line and Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. o select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series Name, Category Name, Value, o enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data Labels Separator entry field. · Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines. · Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines andMarkers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only.· The Axis Settings section allows specifying whether to display Horizontal/Vertical Axis or not by selecting the Show or Hide option from the drop-down list. You can also specify Horizontal/Vertical Axis Title parameters: o Specify if you wish to display the Horizontal Axis Title or not by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: o None to not display a horizontal axis title, o No Overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis. · Specify the Vertical Axis Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: o None to not display a vertical axis title, o Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, o Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. · The Gridlines section allows specifying which of the Horizontal/Vertical Gridlines you wish to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: Major,Minor, orMajor and Minor. You can hide the gridlines at all using the None option. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines.Note: the Vertical/Horizontal Axis tabs will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes. The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. · The Axis Options section allows setting the following parameters: · Minimum Value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. · Maximum Value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. · Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at theMinimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. · Display Units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you''re working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop- down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000,Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. · Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. · The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set onthe Layout tab. TheMajor/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: · None to not display major/minor tick marks, · Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, · In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, · Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. · The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: · None to not display tick mark labels, · Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, · High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, · Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. · To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: o General o Number o Scientific o Accounting o Currency o Date o Time o Percentage o Fraction o Text o Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. o Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart.Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only. Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series vary considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart. The Secondary Vertical /Horizontal Axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary Vertical/Horizontal Axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal Axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/Horizontal Axis options, see description above/below.The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. · select Hide to hide horizontal axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have horizontal axis displayed. · specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: o None when you don’t want to display a horizontal axis title, o No Overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis, · Gridlines is used to specify the Horizontal Gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None, Major,Minor, orMajor and Minor. · Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point attheMinimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. · Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks. · Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. · The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: o Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. o Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. · The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. o Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. o Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. o Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select theManual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. o To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: o General o Number o Scientific o Accounting o Currency o Date o Timeo Percentage o Fraction o Text o Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. o Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters: · Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well. · Move but don''t size with cells - this option allows to snap the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged.· Don''t move or size with cells - this option allows to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains. Move and resize chartsOnce the chart is added, you can change its size and position. To change the chart size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected chart while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the chart position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the chart. Drag the chart to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the chart, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type the required text. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, size, color or its decoration style. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust Fill, Stroke andWrapping Style of the shape. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape Settings tab on the right panel, you can both adjust the chart area itself and change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend etc and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available at the Shape Settings tab: color, width and type. Note: the Show shadow option is also available at the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard.You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. Adjust chart settings Some of the chart settings can be altered using the Chart settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: · Size is used to view theWidth and Height of the current chart.· Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). · Change Chart Type is used to change the selected chart type and/or style. To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section. · Edit Data is used to open the ''Chart Editor'' window. Note: to quickly open the ''Chart Editor'' window you can also double-click the chart in the document. You can also find some of these options in the right-click menu. The menu options are: · Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. · Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send it to the background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. · Align is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. · Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is unavailable for charts. · Edit Data is used to open the ''Chart Editor'' window. · Chart Advanced Settings is used to open the ''Chart - Advanced Settings'' window. To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select Chart Advanced Settings from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open:The Size tab contains the following parameters: · Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the chart. If the Constant Proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio.The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: · Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the chart is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). o Inline - the chart is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the chart moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. o If one of the following styles is selected, the chart can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: o Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the chart. o Tight - the text wraps the actual chart edges. o Through - the text wraps around the chart edges and fills in the open white space within the chart. o Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the chart.o In front - the chart overlaps the text. o Behind - the text overlaps the chart. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: · The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: o Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, o Absolute Positionmeasured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, o Relative positionmeasured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin.· The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: o Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, o Absolute Positionmeasured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, o Relative positionmeasured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. · Move object with text ensures that the chart moves along with the text to which it is anchored. · Allow overlapmakes it possible for two charts to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains.Insert text objects To make your text more emphatic and draw attention to a specific part of the document, you can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows entering text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows applying some effects to the text). Add a text object You can add a text object anywhere on the page. To do that: 1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the necessary text object type: · to add a text box, click the Text Box icon on the top toolbar, then click where the text box should be added, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. Note: it''s also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the shape from the Basic Shapes group. · to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon on the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added at the current cursor position. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text. 3. click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the document. The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it). As the inserted text object represents a rectangular frame with text in it (Text Art objects have invisible text box borders by default), and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties. To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key on the keyboard. The text within the text box will also be deleted. Format a text box Select the text box by clicking on its border to be able to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines.· to resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape. · to edit the text box fill, stroke, wrapping style or replace the rectangular box with a different shape, click the Shape settings icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options. · to align the text box on the page, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, rotate or flip a text box, change a wrapping style or access the shape advanced settings, right-click on the text box border and use the contextual menu options. Format the text within the text box Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines. Note: it''s also possible to change the text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In thus case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected text fragment separately. To rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (is selected by default), Rotate Text Down (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top). To align the text vertically within the text box, right-click the text, select the Vertical Alignment option and then choose one of the available options: Align Top, Align Center or Align Bottom. Other formatting options that you can apply are the same as the ones for regular text. Please refer to the corresponding help sections to learn more about the necessary operation. You can: · align the text horizontally within the text box · adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets · stheet ltienxet sbpoaxcing, change paragraph indents, adjust tab stops for the multi-line text within · insert a hyperlink You can also click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar and change some style parameters. Edit a Text Art style Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar.Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style by selecting a different font type, size etc. Change the font Fill. You can choose the following options: · Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of letters. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: · Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the letters with two colors which smoothly change from one to another.o Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges). o Direction - choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available. o Gradient - click on the left slider under the gradient bar to activate the color box which corresponds to the first color. Click on the color box on the right to choose the first color in the palette. Drag the slider to set the gradient stop i.e. the point where one color changes into another. Use the right slider under the gradient bar to specify the second color and set the gradient stop. Note: if one of these two options is selected, you can also set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. · No Fill - select this option if you don''t want to use any fill. Adjust the font Stroke width, color and type. · To change the stroke width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don''t want to use any stroke. · To change the stroke color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. · To change the stroke type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines).Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of the text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle. Add captions A caption is a numbered label that can be applied to objects, such as equations, tables, figures, and images in the document. A caption allows making a reference in the text - an easily recognizable label on an object. You can also use captions to create a table of figures. To add a caption to an object: · select the required object to apply a caption; · switch to the References tab of the top toolbar; · click the Caption icon on the top toolbar or right-click on the object and select the Insert Caption option to open the Insert Caption dialogue box o choose the label to use for your caption by clicking the label drop-down and choosing the object. or o create a new label by clicking the Add label button to open the Add label dialogue box. Enter a name for the label into the label text box. Then click the OK button to add a new label into the label list; · check the Include chapter number checkbox to change the numbering for your caption; · in Insert drop-down menu choose Before to place the label above the object or After to place it below the object; · check the Exclude label from caption checkbox to leave only a number for this particular caption in accordance with a sequence number; · you can then choose how to number your caption by assigning a specific style to the caption and adding a separator; · to apply the caption click the OK button.Deleting a label To delete a label you have created, choose the label from the label list within the caption dialogue box then click the Delete label button. The label you created will be immediately deleted. Note: You may delete labels you have created but you cannot delete the default labels. Formatting captions As soon as you add a caption, a new style for captions is automatically added to the styles section. To change the style for all captions throughout the document, you should follow these steps: · select the text to copy a new Caption style; · search for the Caption style (highlighted in blue by default) in the styles gallery on the Home tab of the top toolbar; · right-click on it and choose the Update from selection option. Grouping captions up To move the object and the caption as one unit, you need to group the object and the caption:· select the object; · select one of theWrapping styles using the right sidebar; · add the caption as it is mentioned above; · hold down Shift and select the items to be grouped up; · right-click item and choose Arrange > Group. Now both items will move simultaneously if you drag them somewhere else in the document. To unbind the objects, click on Arrange > Ungroup respectively. Insert symbols and characters To insert a special symbol which can not be typed on the keyboard, use the Insert symbol option and follow these simple steps: · place the cursor where a special symbol should be inserted, · switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, · click the Symbol,· The Symbol dialog box will appear, and you will be able to select the required symbol, · use the Range section to quickly find the necessary symbol. All symbols are divided into specific groups, for example, select ''Currency Symbols'' if you want to insert a currency character. If the required character is not in the set, select a different font. Many of them also have characters that differ from the standard set. Or enter the Unicode hex value of the required symbol you want into the Unicode hex value field. This code can be found in the Character map. You can also use the Special characters tab to choose a special character from the list.The previously used symbols are also displayed in the Recently used symbols field, · click Insert. The selected character will be added to the document. Insert ASCII symbols The ASCII table is also used to add characters. To do this, hold down the ALT key and use the numeric keypad to enter the character code. Note: be sure to use the numeric keypad, not the numbers on the main keyboard. To enable the numeric keypad, press the Num Lock key. For example, to add a paragraph character (§), press and hold down ALT while typing 789, and then release the ALT key. Insert symbols using the Unicode table Additional characters and symbols can also be found in the Windows symbol table. To open this table, do of the following: · in the Search field write ''Character table'' and open it, · simultaneously press Win + R, and then in the following window type charmap.exe and click OK.In the opened Character Map, select one of the Character sets, Groups, and Fonts. Next, click on the required characters, copy them to the clipboard, and paste where necessary. Align and arrange objects on the page The added autoshapes, images, charts or text boxes can be aligned, grouped and ordered on the page. To perform any of these actions, first select a separate object or several objects on the page. To select several objects, hold down the Ctrl key and left-click the required objects. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it. After that you can use either the icons on the Layout tab of the top toolbar described below or the corresponding options from the right-click menu. Align objects To align two or more selected objects, 1. Click the Align icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options: · Align to Page to align objects relative to the edges of the page, · Align to Margin to align objects relative to the page margins, · Align Selected Objects (this option is selected by default) to align objects relative to each other, 2. Click the Align icon once again and select the necessary alignment type from the list: · Align Left - to line up the objects horizontally by the left edge of the leftmost object/left edge of the page/left page margin,· Align Center - to line up the objects horizontally by their centers/center of the page/center of the space between the left and right page margins, · Align Right - to line up the objects horizontally by the right edge of the rightmost object/right edge of the page/right page margin, · Align Top - to line up the objects vertically by the top edge of the topmost object/top edge of the page/top page margin, · Align Middle - to line up the objects vertically by their middles/middle of the page/middle of the space between the top and bottom page margins, · Align Bottom - to line up the objects vertically by the bottom edge of the bottommost object/bottom edge of the page/bottom page margin. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available alignment options. If you want to align a single object, it can be aligned relative to the edges of the page or to the page margins. The Align to Margin option is selected by default in this case. Distribute objects To distribute three or more selected objects horizontally or vertically so that there is equal space between them, 1. Click the Align icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options: · Align to Page to distribute objects between the edges of the page, · Align to Margin to distribute objects between the page margins, · Align Selected Objects (this option is selected by default) to distribute objects between two outermost selected objects, 2. Click the Align icon once again and select the necessary distribution type from the list: · Distribute Horizontally - to distribute objects evenly between the leftmost and rightmost selected objects/left and right edges of the page/left and right page margins. · Distribute Vertically - to distribute objects evenly between the topmost and bottommost selected objects/top and bottom edges of the page/top and bottom page margins. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available distribution options. Note: the distribution options are disabled if you select less than three objects. Group objects To group two or more selected objects or ungroup them, click the arrow next to the Group icon at the Layout tab on the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the list:· Group - to combine several objects into a group so that they can be simultaneously rotated, moved, resized, aligned, arranged, copied, pasted, formatted like a single object. · Ungroup - to ungroup the selected group of the previously combined objects. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Arrange option from the contextual menu and then use the Group or Ungroup option. Note: the Group option is disabled if you select less than two objects. The Ungroup option is available only when a group of the previously combined objects is selected. Arrange objects To arrange objects (i.e. to change their order when several objects overlap each other), you can use the Bring Forward and Send Backward icons on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the required arrangement type from the list. To move the selected object(s) forward, click the arrow next to the Bring Forward icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the required arrangement type from the list: · Bring To Foreground - to move the object(s) in front of all other objects, · Bring Forward - to move the selected object(s) by one level forward as related to other objects. To move the selected object(s) backward, click the arrow next to the Send Backward icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the required arrangement type from the list: · Send To Background - to move the object(s) behind all other objects, · Send Backward - to move the selected object(s) by one level backward as related to other objects. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected object(s), choose the Arrange option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available arrangement options. Change the text wrapping TheWrapping Style option determines the way the object is positioned relative to the text. You can change the text wrapping style for inserted objects, such as shapes, images, charts, text boxes or tables. Change text wrapping for shapes, images, charts, text boxes To change the currently selected wrapping style: 1. left-click a separate object to select it. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it. 2. open the text wrapping settings:· switch to the the Layout tab of the top toolbar and click the arrow next to the Wrapping icon, or · right-click the object and select theWrapping Style option from the contextual menu, or · right-click the object, select the Advanced Settings option and switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the object Advanced Settings window. 3. select the necessary wrapping style: · Inline - the object is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the object moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. · If one of the following styles is selected, the object can be moved independently of the text and precisely positioned on the page: · Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the object. · Tight - the text wraps the actual object edges. · Through - the text wraps around the object edges and fills the open white space within the object. To apply this effect, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. · Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the object. · In front - the object overlaps the text. · Behind - the text overlaps the object. If you select the Square, Tight, Through, or Top and bottom style, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - Distance from Text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). To access these parameters, right-click the object, select the Advanced Settings option and switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the object Advanced Settings window. Set the required values and click OK. If you select a wrapping style other than Inline, the Position tab is also available in the object Advanced Settings window. To learn more on these parameters, please refer to the corresponding pages with the instructions on how to work with shapes, images or charts. If you select a wrapping style other than Inline, you can also edit the wrap boundary for images or shapes. Right-click the object, select theWrapping Style option from the contextual menu and click the Edit Wrap Boundary option. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the required position. Change text wrapping for tables For tables, the following two wrapping styles are available: Inline table and Flow table. To change the currently selected wrapping style: 1. right-click the table and select the Table Advanced Settings option, 2. switch to the Text Wrapping tab of the Table - Advanced Settings window,3. select one of the following options: · Inline table is used to select the wrapping style when the text is broken by the table as well as to set the alignment: left, center, right. · Flow table is used to select the wrapping style when the text is wrapped around the table. Using the Text Wrapping tab of the Table - Advanced Settings window, you can also set up the following additional parameters: · For inline tables, you can set the table Alignment type (left, center or right) and Indent from left. · For floating tables, you can set the Distance from text and the table position on the Table Position tab. Insert content controls Content controls are objects containing different types of content, such as text, objects, etc. Depending on the selected content control type, you can collaborate on documents by using the available content controls array, or lock the ones that do not need further editing and unlock those that require your colleagues’ input, etc. Content controls are typically used to facilitate data gathering and processing or to set necessary boundaries for documents edited by other users. ONLYOFFICE Document Editor allows you to insert classic content controls, i.e. they are fully backward compatible with the third-party word processors such as Microsoft Word. Note: the feature to add new content controls is available in the paid version only. In the free Community version, you can edit existing content controls, as well as copy and paste them. To enable this feature in the desktop version, refer to this article. ONLYOFFICE Document Editor supports the following classic content controls: Plain Text, Rich Text, Picture, Combo box, Drop-down list, Date, Check box. · Plain Text is an object containing text that cannot be formatted. Plain text content controls cannot contain more than one paragraph. · Rich Text is an object containing text that can be formatted. Rich text content controls can contain several paragraphs, lists, and objects (images, shapes, tables etc.). · Picture is an object containing a single image. · Combo box is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows choosing one of the predefined values from the list and edit the selected value if necessary. · Drop-down list is an object containing a drop-down list with a set of choices. It allows choosing one of the predefined values from the list. The selected value cannot be edited. · Date is an object containing a calendar that allows choosing a date.· Check box is an object that allows displaying two states: the check box is selected and the check box is cleared. Adding content controls Create a new Plain Text content control 1. position the insertion point within the text line where the content control should be added, or select a text passage to transform it into a content control. 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. 3. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. 4. choose the Plain Text option from the menu. The content control will be inserted at the insertion point within existing text line. Replace the default text within the content control ("Your text here") with your own text: select the default text, and type in a new text or copy a text passage from anywhere and paste it into the content control. The Plain text content controls do not allow adding line breaks and cannot contain other objects such as images, tables, etc. Create a new Rich Text content control 1. position the insertion point within the text line where the content control should be added, or select one or more of the existing paragraphs you want to become the control contents. 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. 3. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. 4. choose the Rich Text option from the menu. The control will be inserted in a new paragraph. Replace the default text within the control ("Your text here") with your own one: select the default text, and type in a new text or copy a text passage from anywhere and paste it into the content control. Rich text content controls allow adding line breaks, i.e. can contain multiple paragraphs as well as some objects, such as images, tables, other content controls etc. Create a new Picture content control 1. position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added. 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. 3. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon.4. choose the Picture option from the menu - the content control will be inserted at the insertion point. 5. click the image icon in the button above the content control border - a standard file selection window will open. Choose an image stored on your computer and click Open. The selected image will be displayed within the content control. To replace the image, click the image icon in the button above the content control border and select another image. Create a new Combo box or Drop-down list content control The Combo box and Drop-down list content controls contain a drop-down list with a set of choices. They can be created amost in the same way. The main difference between them is that the selected value in the drop-down list cannot be edited, while the selected value in the combo box can be replaced. 1. position the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the control to be added. 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. 3. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. 4. choose the Combo box or Drop-down list option from the menu - the control will be inserted at the insertion point. 5. right-click the added control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. 6. in the the opened Content Control Settings window, switch to the Combo box or Drop-down list tab, depending on the selected content control type.7. to add a new list item, click the Add button and fill in the available fields in the the opened window: 1. specify the necessary text in the Display name field, e.g. Yes, No, Other. This text will be displayed in the content control within the document. 2. by default, the text in the Value field corresponds to the one entered in the Display name field. If you want to edit the text in the Value field, note that the entered value must be unique for each item. 3. click the OK button. 8. you can edit or delete the list items by using the Edit or Delete buttons on the right or change the item order using the Up and Down button. 9. when all the necessary choices are set, click the OK button to save the settings and close the window. You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Combo box or Drop-down list content control to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Once the necessaryitem is selected from the Combo box, you can edit the displayed text by replacing it with your text entirely or partially. The Drop-down list does not allow editing the selected item. Create a new Date content control 1. position the insertion point within the text where content control should be added. 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. 3. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. 4. choose the Date option from the menu - the content control with the current date will be inserted at the insertion point. 5. right-click the added content control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. 6. in the opened Content Control Settings window, switch to the Date format tab. 7. choose the necessary Language and select the necessary date format in the Display the date like this list. 8. click the OK button to save the settings and close the window.You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Date content control to open the calendar and choose the necessary date. Create a new Check box content control 1. position the insertion point within the text line where the content control should be added. 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. 3. click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon. 4. choose the Check box option from the menu - the content control will be inserted at the insertion point. 5. right-click the added content control and choose the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. 6. in the opened Content Control Settings window, switch to the Check box tab.7. click the Checked symbol button to specify the necessary symbol for the selected check box or the Unchecked symbol to select how the cleared check box should look like. The Symbol window will open. To learn more on how to work with symbols, please refer to this article. 8. when the symbols are specified, click the OK button to save the settings and close the window. The added check box is displayed in the unchecked mode. If you click the added check box it will be checked with the symbol selected in the Checked symbol list. Note: The content control border is only visible when the control is selected. The borders do not appear on a printed version. Moving content controls Content controls can be moved to another place in the document: click the button on the left of the control border to select the control and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the text.You can also copy and paste content controls: select the necessary control and use the Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V key combinations. Editing plain text and rich text content controls Text within plain text and rich text content controls can be formatted by using the icons on the top toolbar: you can adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets. It''s also possible to use the Paragraph - Advanced settings window accessible from the contextual menu or from the right sidebar to change the text properties. Text within rich text content controls can be formatted like a regular text, i.e. you can set line spacing, change paragraph indents, adjust tab stops, etc. Changing content control settings No matter which type of content controls is selected, you can change the content control settings in the General and Locking sections of the Content Control Settings window. To open the content control settings, you can proceed in the following ways: · Select the necessary content control, click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon on the top toolbar and select the Control Settings option from the menu. · Right-click anywhere within the content control and use the Content control settings option from the contextual menu. A new window will open. Ot the General tab, you can adjust the following settings: · Specify the content control Title, Placeholder, or Tag in the corresponding fields. The title will be displayed when the control is selected. The placeholder is the main textdisplayed within the content control element. Tags are used to identify content controls so that you can make a reference to them in your code. · Choose if you want to display the content control with a Bounding box or not. Use the None option to display the control without the bounding box. If you select the Bounding box option, you can choose the Color of this box using the field below. Click the Apply to All button to apply the specified Appearance settings to all the content controls in the document. On the Locking tab, you can protect the content control from being deleted or edited using the following settings: · Content control cannot be deleted - check this box to protect the content control from being deleted. · Contents cannot be edited - check this box to protect the contents of the content control from being edited. For certain types of content controls, the third tab that contains the specific settings for the selected content control type is also available: Combo box, Drop-down list, Date, Check box. These settings are described above in the sections about adding the corresponding content controls. Click the OK button within the settings window to apply the changes. It''s also possible to highlight content controls with a certain color. To highlight controls with a color: 1. Click the button on the left of the control border to select the control, 2. Click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon on the top toolbar, 3. Select the Highlight Settings option from the menu,4. Choose the required color from the available palettes: Theme Colors, Standard Colors or specify a new Custom Color. To remove previously applied color highlighting, use the No highlighting option. The selected highlight options will be applied to all the content controls in the document. Removing content controls To remove a content control and leave all its contents, select a content control, then proceed in one of the following ways: · Click the arrow next to the Content Controls icon on the top toolbar and select the Remove content control option from the menu. · Right-click the content control and use the Remove content control option from the contextual menu. To remove a control and all its contents, select the necessary control and press the Delete key on the keyboard. Create a Table of Contents A table of contents contains a list of all the chapters (sections, etc.) in a document and displays the numbers of the pages where each chapter begins. It allows easily navigating through a multi-page document and quickly switching to the required part of the text. The table of contents is generated automatically on the basis of the document headings formatted using built-in styles. This makes it easy to update the created table of contents without having to edit the headings and change the page numbers manually if the text of the document has been changed. Define the heading structure Format headings First of all, format the headings in your document using one of the predefined styles. To do that, 1. Select the text you want to include into the table of contents. 2. Open the style menu on the right side of the Home tab at the top toolbar. 3. Click the required style to be applied. By default, you can use the Heading 1 - Heading 9 styles. Note: if you want to use other styles (e.g. Title, Subtitle etc.) to format headings that will be included into the table of contents, you will need to adjust the table of contents settings first (see the corresponding section below). Manage headingsOnce the headings are formatted, you can click the Navigation icon on the left sidebar to open the panel that displays the list of all headings with corresponding nesting levels. This panel allows easily navigating between headings in the document text as well as managing the heading structure. Right-click on a heading in the list and use one of the available options from the menu: · Promote - to move the currently selected heading up to the higher level in the hierarchical structure, e.g. change it from Heading 2 to Heading 1. · Demote - to move the currently selected heading down to the lower level in the hierarchical structure, e.g. change it from Heading 1 to Heading 2. · New heading before - to add a new empty heading of the same level before the currently selected one. · New heading after - to add a new empty heading of the same level after the currently selected one. · New subheading - to add a new empty subheading (i.e. a heading with lower level) after the currently selected heading. When the heading or subheading is added, click on the added empty heading in the list and type in your own text. This can be done both in the document text and on the Navigation panel itself. · Select content - to select the text below the current heading in the document (including the text related to all subheadings of this heading). · Expand all - to expand all levels of headings at the Navigation panel. · Collapse all - to collapse all levels of headings, excepting level 1, at the Navigation panel. · Expand to level - to expand the heading structure to the selected level. E.g. if you select level 3, then levels 1, 2 and 3 will be expanded, while level 4 and all lower levels will be collapsed.To manually expand or collapse separate heading levels, use the arrows to the left of the headings. To close the Navigation panel, click the Navigation icon on the left sidebar once again. Insert a Table of Contents into the document To insert a table of contents into your document: 1. Position the insertion point where the table of contents should be added. 2. Switch to the References tab of the top toolbar. 3. Click the Table of Contents icon on the top toolbar, or click the arrow next to this icon and select the necessary layout option from the menu. You can select the table of contents that displays headings, page numbers and leaders, or headings only. Note: the table of content appearance can be adjusted later via the table of contents settings. The table of contents will be added at the current cursor position. To change the position of the table of contents, you can select the table of contents field (content control) and simply drag it to the desired place. To do that, click the button in the upper left corner of the table of contents field and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the document text.To navigate between headings, press the Ctrl key and click the necessary heading within the table of contents field. You will go to the corresponding page. Adjust the created Table of Contents Refresh the Table of Contents After the table of contents is created, you can continue editing your text by adding new chapters, changing their order, removing some paragraphs, or expanding the text related to a heading so that the page numbers that correspond to the previous or the following section may change. In this case, use the Refresh option to automatically apply all changes to the table of contents. Click the arrow next to the Refresh icon on the References tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the menu: · Refresh entire table - to add the headings that you added to the document, remove the ones you deleted from the document, update the edited (renamed) headings as well as update page numbers. · Refresh page numbers only - to update page numbers without applying changes to the headings. Alternatively, you can select the table of contents in the document text and click the Refresh icon at the top of the table of contents field to display the above mentioned options. It''s also possible to right-click anywhere within the table of contents and use the corresponding options from the contextual menu.Adjust the Table of Contents settings To open the table of contents settings, you can proceed in the following ways: · Click the arrow next to the Table of Contents icon on the top toolbar and select the Settings option from the menu. · Select the table of contents in the document text, click the arrow next to the table of contents field title and select the Settings option from the menu. · Right-click anywhere within the table of contents and use the Table of contents settings option from the contextual menu. A new window will open, and you will be able to adjust the following settings:· Show page numbers - this option allows displaying the page numbers. · Right align page numbers - this option allows aligning the page numbers on the right side of the page. · Leader - this option allows choose the required leader type. A leader is a line of characters (dots or hyphens) that fills the space between a heading and the corresponding page number. It''s also possible to select the None option if you do not want to use leaders. · Format Table of Contents as links - this option is checked by default. If you uncheck it, you will not be able to switch to the necessary chapter by pressing Ctrl and clicking the corresponding heading. · Build table of contents from - this section allows specifying the necessary number of outline levels as well as the default styles that will be used to create the table of contents. Check the necessary radio button: o Outline levels - when this option is selected, you will be able to adjust the number of hierarchical levels used in the table of contents. Click the arrows in the Levels field to decrease or increase the number of levels (the values from 1 to 9 are available). E.g., if you select the value of 3, headings that have levels 4 - 9 will not be included into the table of contents. o Selected styles - when this option is selected, you can specify additional styles that can be used to build the table of contents and assign the corresponding outline level to each of them. Specify the desired level value in the field on theright of the style. Once you save the settings, you will be able to use this style when creating a table of contents. · Styles - this options allows selecting the desired appearance of the table of contents. Select the necessary style from the drop-down list. The preview field above displays how the table of contents should look like. The following four default styles are available: Simple, Standard, Modern, Classic. The Current option is used if you customize the table of contents style. Click the OK button within the settings window to apply the changes. Customize the Table of Contents style After you apply one of the default table of contents styles within the Table of Contents settings window, you can additionally modify this style so that the text within the table of contents field looks like you need. 1. Select the text within the table of contents field, e.g. pressing the button in the upper left corner of the table of contents content control. 2. Format table of contents items changing their font type, size, color or applying the font decoration styles. 3. Consequently update styles for items of each level. To update the style, right-click the formatted item, select the Formatting as Style option from the contextual menu andclick the Update toc N style option (toc 2 style corresponds to items that have level 2, toc 3 style corresponds to items with level 3 and so on). 4. Refresh the table of contents. Remove the Table of Contents To remove the table of contents from the document: · click the arrow next to the Table of Contents icon on the top toolbar and use the Remove table of contents option, · or click the arrow next to the table of contents content control title and use the Remove table of contents option. Add and Format a Table of Figures Table of Figures provides an overview of equations, figures and tables added to a document. Similar to a table of contents, a Table of Figures lists, sorts out and arranges captioned objects or text headings that have a certain style applied. This makes it easy to reference them in your document and to navigate between figures. Click the link in the Table of Figures formatted as links and you will be taken directly to the figure or the heading. Any table, equation, diagram, drawing, graph, chart, map, photograph or another type of illustration is presented as a figure.To add a Table of Figures go to the References tab and use the Table of Figures toolbar button to set up and format a table of figures. Use the Refresh button to update a table of figures each time you add a new figure to your document. Creating a Table of Figures Note: You can create a Table of Figures using either captioned figures or styles. Before proceeding, a caption must be added to each equation, table or figure, or a style must be applied to the text so that it is correctly included in a Table of Figures. 1. Once you have added captions or styles, place your cursor where you want to inset a Table of Figures and go to the References tab then click the Table of Figures button to open the Table of Figures dialog box, and generate the list of figures. 2. Choose an option to build a Table of Figures from the Caption or Style group. · You can create a Table of Figures based on captioned objects. Check the Caption box and select a captioned object from the drop-down list: o None; o Equation; o Figure; o Table.· You can create a Table of Figures based on the styles used to format text. Check the Style box and select a style from the drop-down list. The list of options may vary depending on the style applied: o Heading 1; o Heading 2; o Caption; o Table of Figures; o Normal.Formatting a Table of Figures The check box options allow you to format a Table of Figures. All formatting check boxes are activated by default as in most cases it is more reasonable to have them. Uncheck the boxes you don’t need. Show page numbers - to display the page number the figure appears on; Right align page numbers - to display page numbers on the right when Show page numbers is active; uncheck it to display page numbers right after the title; Format table and contents as links - to add hyperlinks to the Table of Figures; Include label and number - to add a label and number to the Table of Figures. · Choose the Leader style from the drop-down list to connect titles to page numbers for a better visualization. · Customize the table of figures text styles by choosing one of the available styles from the drop-down list: o Current - displays the style chosen previously. o Simple - highlights text in bold. o Online - highlights and arranges text as a hyperlink. o Classic - makes the text all caps. o Distinctive - highlights text in italic. o Centered - centers the text and displays no leader. o Formal - displays text in 11 pt Arial to give a more formal look. · Preview window displays how the Table of Figures appears in the document or when printed. Updating a Table of Figures Update a Table of Figures each time you add a new equation, figure or table to your document.The Refresh button becomes active when you click or select the Table of Figures. Click the Refresh button on the References tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the menu: · Refresh page numbers only - to update page numbers without applying changes to the headings. · Refresh entire table - to update all the headings that have been modified and page numbers. Click OK to confirm your choice,or Right-click the Table of Figures in your document to open the contextual menu, then choose the Refresh field to update the Table of Figures. Mail merge Use Mail Merge Note: this option is available in the online version only. TheMail Merge feature is used to create a set of documents combining a common content which is taken from a text document and some individual components (variables, such as names, greetings etc.) taken from a spreadsheet (for example, a customer list). It can be useful if you need to create a lot of personalized letters and send them to recipients. To start working with theMail Merge feature, 1. Prepare a data source and load it to the main document 1. A data source used for the mail merge must be an .xlsx spreadsheet stored on your portal. Open an existing spreadsheet or create a new one and make sure that it meets the following requirements. The spreadsheet should have a header row with the column titles, as values in the first cell of each column will designate merge fields (i.e. variables that you can insert into the text). Each column should contain a set of actual values for a variable. Each row in the spreadsheet should correspond to a separate record (i.e. a set of values that belongs to a certain recipient). During the merge process, a copy of the main document will be created for each record and each merge field inserted into the main text will be replaced with an actual value from the corresponding column. If you are goung to send results by email, the spreadsheet must also include a column with the recipients'' email addresses. 2. Open an existing text document or create a new one. It must contain the main text which will be the same for each version of the merged document. Click theMail Merge icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. 3. The Select Data Source window will open. It displays the list of all your .xlsx spreadsheets stored in theMy Documents section. To navigate between other Documentsmodule sections, use the menu on the left part of the window. Select the required file and click OK. Once the data source is loaded, theMail Merge setting tab will be available on the right sidebar.2. Verify or change the recipients list 1. Click the Edit recipients list button on the top of the right sidebar to open theMail Merge Recipients window, where the content of the selected data source is displayed. 2. In the opened window, you can add new information, edit or delete the existing data if necessary. To simplify working with data, you can use the icons at the top of the window: · and - to copy and paste the copied data · and - to undo and redo undone actions · and - to sort your data within a selected range of cells in ascending or descending order· - to enable the filter for the previously selected range of cells or to remove the applied filter · - to clear all the applied filter parameters Note: to learn more on how to use the filter, please refer to the Sort and filter data section of the Spreadsheet Editor help. · - to search for a certain value and replace it with another one, if necessary Note: to learn more on how to use the Find and Replace tool, please refer to the Search and Replace Functions section of the Spreadsheet Editor help. 3. After all the necessary changes are made, click the Save & Exit button. To discard the changes, click the Close button 3. Insert merge fields and check the results 1. Place the mouse cursor where the merge field should be inserted, click the Insert Merge Field button on the right sidebar and select the necessary field from the list. The available fields correspond to the data in the first cell of each column of the selected data source. All the required fields can be added anywhere. 2. Turn on the Highlight merge fields switcher on the right sidebar to make the inserted fields more noticeable in the text. 3. Turn on the Preview results switcher on the right sidebar to view the text with the merge fields replaced with actual values from the data source. Use the arrow buttons to preview the versions of the merged document for each record.· To delete an inserted field, disable the Preview resultsmode, select the field with the mouse and press the Delete key on the keyboard. · To replace an inserted field, disable the Preview resultsmode, select the field with the mouse, click the Insert Merge Field button on the right sidebar and choose a new field from the list. 4. Specify the merge parameters 1. Select the merge type. You can start mass mailing or save the result as a PDF or Docx file to print or edit it later. Select the necessary option from the Merge to list: · PDF - to create a single PDF document that includes all the merged copies that can be printed later · Docx - to create a single Docx document that includes all the merged copies that can be edited individually later · Email - to send the results to recipients by email Note: the recipients'' email addresses must be specified in the loaded data source and you need to have at least one email account connected in theMailmodule on your portal. 2. Choose all the required records to be applied: · All records (this option is selected by default) - to create merged documents for all records from the loaded data source · Current record - to create a merged document for the record that is currently displayed· From ... To - to create merged documents for a range of records (in this case you need to specify two values: the number of the first record and the last record in the desired range) Note: the maximum allowed quantity of recipients is 100. If you have more than 100 recipients in your data source, please, perform the mail merge by stages: specify the values from 1 to 100, wait until the mail merge process is over, then repeat the operation specifying the values from 101 to N etc. 3. Complete the merge · If you''ve decided to save the merge results as a file, o click the Download button to save the file on your PC. You''ll find the downloaded file in your default Downloads folder. o click the Save button to save the file on your portal. In the opened Folder for save window, you can change the file name and specify the folder where you want to save the file. You can also check the Open merged document in new tab box to check the result when the merge process is finished. Finally, click Save in the Folder for save window. · If you''ve selected the Email option, theMerge button will be available on the right sidebar. After you click it, the Send to Email window will open: · In the From list, select the required mail account if you have several accounts connected to theMailmodule.· In the To list, select the merge field corresponding to the email addresses of the recipients if this option was not selected automatically. · Enter your message subject in the Subject Line field. · Select the mail format from the list: HTML, Attach as DOCX or Attach as PDF. When one of the two latter options is selected, you also need to specify the File name for attachments and enter theMessage (the text of your letter that will be sent to recipients). · Click the Send button. Once the mailing is over, you''ll receive a notification to your email specified in the From field. Math equations Insert equations The Document Editor allows you to build equations using the built-in templates, edit them, insert special characters (including mathematical operators, Greek letters, accents, etc.). Add a new equation To insert an equation from the gallery, 1. put the cursor within the necessary line , 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. click the arrow next to the Equation icon on the top toolbar, 4. in the opened drop-down list select the equation category you need. The following categories are currently available: Symbols, Fractions, Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Brackets, Functions, Accents, Limits and Logarithms, Operators, Matrices, 5. click the certain symbol/equation in the corresponding set of templates. The selected symbol/equation box will be inserted at the cursor position. If the selected line is empty, the equation will be centered. To align such an equation to the left or to the right, click on the equation box and use the or icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Each equation template represents a set of slots. A slot is a position for each element that makes up the equation. An empty slot (also called as a placeholder) has a dotted outline . You need to fill in all the placeholders specifying the necessary values. Note: to start creating an equation, you can also use the Alt + = keyboard shortcut.Enter values The insertion point specifies where the next character will appear. To position the insertion point precisely, click within the placeholder and use the keyboard arrows to move the insertion point by one character left/right or one line up/down. If you need to create a new placeholder below the slot with the insertion point within the selected template, press Enter. Once the insertion point is positioned, you can fill in the placeholder: · enter the desired numeric/literal value using the keyboard, · insert a special character using the Symbols palette from the Equationmenu on the Insert tab of the top toolbar or typing them from the keyboard (see the Math AutoСorrect option description), · add another equation template from the palette to create a complex nested equation. The size of the primary equation will be automatically adjusted to fit its content. The size of the nested equation elements depends on the primary equation placeholder size, but it cannot be smaller than the sub-subscript size. To add some new equation elements you can also use the right-click menu options: · To add a new argument that goes before or after the existing one within Brackets, you can right-click on the existing argument and select the Insert argument before/after option from the menu. · To add a new equation within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group (or equations of other types, if you''ve previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter), you can right-click on an empty placeholder or entered equation within it and select the Insert equation before/after option from the menu. · To add a new row or a column in a Matrix, you can right-click on a placeholder within it, select the Insert option from the menu, then select Row Above/Below or Column Left/Right. Note: currently, equations cannot be entered using the linear format, i.e. \sqrt(4&x^3). When entering the values of the mathematical expressions, you do not need to use Spacebar as the spaces between the characters and signs of operations are set automatically.If the equation is too long and does not fit a single line, automatic line breaking occurs while typing. You can also insert a line break in a specific position by right-clicking on a mathematical operator and selecting the Insert manual break option from the menu. The selected operator will start a new line. Once the manual line break is added, you can press the Tab key to align the new line to any math operator of the previous line. To delete the added manual line break, right-click on the mathematical operator that starts a new line and select the Delete manual break option. Format equations To increase or decrease the equation font size, click anywhere within the equation box and use the and buttons on the Home tab of the top toolbar or select the necessary font size from the list. All the equation elements will change correspondingly. The letters within the equation are italicized by default. If necessary, you can change the font style (bold, italic, strikeout) or color for a whole equation or its part. The underlined style can be applied to the entire equation only, not to individual characters. Select the necessary part of the equation by clicking and dragging it. The selected part will be highlighted in blue. Then use the necessary buttons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to format the selected part. For example, you can remove the italic format for ordinary words that are not variables or constants. To modify some equation elements, you can also use the right-click menu options: · To change the Fractions format, you can right-click on a fraction and select the Change to skewed/linear/stacked fraction option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected fraction type). · To change the Scripts position relating to text, you can right-click on the equation that includes scripts and select the Scripts before/after text option from the menu. · To change the argument size for Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Limits and Logarithms, Operators as well as for overbraces/underbraces and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the argument you want to change and select the Increase/Decrease argument size option from the menu. · To specify whether an empty degree placeholder should be displayed or not for a Radical, you can right-click on the radical and select the Hide/Show degree option from the menu. · To specify whether an empty limit placeholder should be displayed or not for an Integral or Large Operator, you can right-click on the equation and select the Hide/Show top/bottom limit option from the menu.· To change the limits position relating to the integral or operator sign for Integrals or Large Operators, you can right-click on the equation and select the Change limits location option from the menu. The limits can be displayed on the right of the operator sign (as subscripts and superscripts) or directly above and below the operator sign. · To change the limits position relating to text for Limits and Logarithms and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Limit over/under text option from the menu. · To choose which of the Brackets should be displayed, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Hide/Show opening/closing bracket option from the menu. · To control the Brackets size, you can right-click on the expression within them. The Stretch brackets option is selected by default so that the brackets can grow according to the expression within them, but you can deselect this option to prevent brackets from stretching. When this option is activated, you can also use the Match brackets to argument height option. · To change the character position relating to text for overbraces/underbraces or overbars/underbars from the Accents group, you can right-click on the template and select the Char/Bar over/under text option from the menu. · To choose which borders should be displayed for a Boxed formula from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Border properties option from the menu, then select Hide/Show top/bottom/left/right border or Add/Hide horizontal/vertical/diagonal line. · To specify whether empty placeholders should be displayed or not for a Matrix, you can right-click on it and select the Hide/Show placeholder option from the menu. To align some equation elements you can use the right-click menu options: · To align equations within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group (or equations of other types, if you''ve previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter), you can right-click on an equation, select the Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom. · To align a Matrix vertically, you can right-click on the matrix, select the Matrix Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom. · To align elements within a Matrix column horizontally, you can right-click on a placeholder within the column, select the Column Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Left, Center, or Right. Delete equation elements To delete a part of the equation, select it by dragging the mouse or holding down the Shift key and using the arrow buttons, then press the Delete key on the keyboard. A slot can only be deleted together with the template it belongs to.To delete the entire equation, select it completely by dragging the mouse or double-clicking on the equation box and press the Delete key on the keyboard. To delete some equation elements, you can also use the right-click menu options: · To delete a Radical, you can right-click on it and select the Delete radical option from the menu. · To delete a Subscript and/or Superscript, you can right-click on the expression that contains them and select the Remove subscript/superscript option from the menu. If the expression contains scripts that go before text, the Remove scripts option is available. · To delete Brackets, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Delete enclosing characters or Delete enclosing characters and separators option from the menu. · If the expression within Brackets inclides more than one argument, you can right-click on the argument you want to delete and select the Delete argument option from the menu. · If Brackets enclose more than one equation (i.e. Cases with several conditions), you can right-click on the equation you want to delete and select the Delete equation option from the menu. This option is also available for equations of other types if you''ve previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter. · To delete a Limit, you can right-click on it and select the Remove limit option from the menu. · To delete an Accent, you can right-click on it and select the Remove accent character, Delete char or Remove bar option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected accent). · To delete a row or a column of a Matrix, you can right-click on the placeholder within the row/column you need to delete, select the Delete option from the menu, then select Delete Row/Column. Convert equations If you open an existing document containing equations which were created with an old version of equation editor (for example, with MS Office versions before 2007), you need to convert these equations to the Office Math ML format to be able to edit them. To convert an equation, double-click it. The warning window will appear:To convert the selected equation only, click the Yes button in the warning window. To convert all equations in this document, check the Apply to all equations box and click Yes. Once the equation is converted, you can edit it. Document co-editing Collaborative Document Editing The Document Editor allows you to collaboratively work on a document with other users. This feature includes: · simultaneous multi-user access to the document to be edited · visual indication of passages that are being edited by other users · real-time display of changes or synchronization of changes with one button click · chat to share ideas concerning particular parts of the document · comments with the description of a task or problem that should be solved (it''s also possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version) Connecting to the online version In the desktop editor, open the Connect to cloud option of the left-side menu in the main program window. Connect to your cloud office specifying your account login and password. Co-editing The Document Editor allows you to select one of the two available co-editing modes: · Fast is used by default and shows the changes made by other users in real time.· Strict is selected to hide changes made by other users until you click the Save icon to save your own changes and accept the changes made by co-authors. The mode can be selected in the Advanced Settings. It''s also possible to choose the required mode using the Co-editing Mode icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar: Note: when you co-edit a document in the Fastmode, the possibility to Redo the last undone operation is not available. When a document is being edited by several users simultaneously in the Strictmode, the edited text passages are marked with dashed lines of different colors. By hovering the mouse cursor over one of the edited passages, the name of the user who is editing it at the moment is displayed. The Fastmode will show the actions and the names of the co-editors when they are editing the text. The number of users who are working on the current document is displayed on the right side of the editor header - . If you want to see who exactly is editing the file now, you can click this icon or open the Chat panel with the full list of the users. When no users are viewing or editing the file, the icon in the editor header will look like allowing you to manage the users who have access to the file right from the document: invite new users giving them permissions to edit, read, comment, fill forms or review the document, or deny some users access rights to the file. Click this icon to manage the access to the file; this can be done both when there are no other users who view or co-edit the document at the moment and when there are other users and the icon looks like . It''s also possible to set access rights using the Sharing icon at the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. As soon as one of the users saves his/her changes by clicking the icon, the others will see a note within the status bar stating that they have updates. To save the changes you made, so that other users can view them, and get the updates saved by your co-editors, click the icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar. The updates will be highlighted for you to check what exactly has been changed. You can specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing if you click the File tab on the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option and choose between none, all and last real-time collaboration changes. Selecting View all changes, all thechanges made during the current session will be highlighted. Selecting View last changes, only the changes made since you last time clicked the icon will be highlighted. Selecting View None changes, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted. Anonymous Portal users who are not registered and do not have a profile are considered to be anonymous, although they still can collaborate on documents. To have a name assigned to them, the anonymous user should enter a name they prefer in the corresponding field appearing in the right top corner of the screen when they open the document for the first time. Activate the “Don’t ask me again” checkbox to preserve the name. Chat You can use this tool to coordinate the co-editing process on-the-fly, for example, to distribute tasks and paragraphs to be edited by the collaborators, etc. The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the document content, it is better to use comments which are stored until they are deleted. To access the chat and leave a message for other users, 1. click the icon on the left sidebar, or switch to the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Chat button, 2. enter your text into the corresponding field below, 3. press the Send button. All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven''t read yet, the chat icon will look like this - . To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon on the left sidebar or the Chat button at the top toolbar once again. Comments It''s possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version. To leave a comment,1. select a text passage where you think there is an error or problem, 2. switch to the Insert or Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Comment button, or use the icon on the left sidebar to open the Comments panel and click the Add Comment to Document link, or right-click the selected text passage and select the Add Сomment option from the contextual menu, 3. enter the required text, 4. click the Add Comment/Add button. The comment will be seen on the Comments panel on the left. Any other user can answer the added comment asking questions or reporting on the work he/she has done. For this purpose, click the Add Reply link situated under the comment, type in your reply in the entry field and press the Reply button. If you are using the Strict co-editing mode, new comments added by other users will become visible only after you click the icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar. The text passage you commented will be highlighted in the document. To view the comment, just click within the passage. If you need to disable this feature, click the File tab at the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option and uncheck the Turn on display of the comments box. In this case the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the icon. You can manage the added comments using the icons in the comment balloon or on the Comments panel on the left: · edit the currently selected comment by clicking the icon, · delete the currently selected comment by clicking the icon, · close the currently selected discussion by clicking the icon if the task or problem you stated in your comment was solved, after that the discussion you opened with your comment gets the resolved status. To open it again, click the icon. If you want to hide resolved comments, click the File tab on the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, uncheck the Turn on display of the resolved comments box and click Apply. In this case the resolved comments will be highlighted only if you click the icon. Adding mentions When entering comments, you can use thementions feature that allows you to attract somebody''s attention to the comment and send a notification to the mentioned user via email and Talk. To add a mention enter the "+" or "@" sign anywhere in the comment text - a list of the portal users will open. To simplify the search process, you can start typing a name in the comment field - the user list will change as you type. Select the necessary person from the list. If the filehas not yet been shared with the mentioned user, the Sharing Settings window will open. Read only access type is selected by default. Change it if necessary and click OK. The mentioned user will receive an email notification that he/she has been mentioned in a comment. If the file has been shared, the user will also receive a corresponding notification. To remove comments, 1. click the Remove button on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the necessary option from the menu: · Remove Current Comments - to remove the currently selected comment. If some replies have been added to the comment, all its replies will be removed as well. · Remove My Comments - to remove comments you added without removing comments added by other users. If some replies have been added to your comment, all its replies will be removed as well. · Remove All Comments - to remove all the comments in the document that you and other users added. To close the panel with comments, click the icon on the left sidebar once again. Document Review When somebody shares a file with you using the review permissions, you need to apply the document Review feature. As a reviewer, you can use the Review option to review the document, change the sentences, phrases and other page elements, correct spelling, etc. without actually editing it. All your changes will be recorded and shown to the person who sent you the document. If you send the file for review, you will need to display all the changes which were made to it, view and either accept or reject them. Enable the Track Changes feature To see changes suggested by a reviewer, enable the Track Changes option in one of the following ways: · click the button in the right lower corner on the status bar, or · switch to the Collaboration tab on the top toolbar and press the Track Changes button. Note: it is not necessary for the reviewer to enable the Track Changes option. It is enabled by default and cannot be disabled when the document is shared with review only access rights. · the following options are available in the opened pop-up menu:o On for me - tracking changes is enabled for the current user only. The option remains enabled for the current editing session, i.e. will be disabled when you reload or open the document anew. It will not be affected by other users enabling or disabling the general tracking changes option. o Off for me - tracking changes is disabled for the current user only. The option remains disabled for the current editing session. It will not be affected by other users enabling or disabling the general tracking changes option. o On for me and everyone - tracking changes is enabled and will remain when you reload or open the document anew (when the document is reloaded, all users will have the tracking enabled). When another user disables the general tracking changes option in the file, it will be switched to Off for me and everyone for all users. o Off for me and everyone - tracking changes is disabled and will remain when you reload or open the document anew (when the document is reloaded, all users will have the tracking disabled). When another user enables the general tracking changes option in the file, it will be switched to On for me and everyone for all users. The corresponding alert message will be shown to every co-author. View changes Changes made by a user are highlighted with a specific color in the document text. When you click on the changed text, a pop-up window opens which displays the user name, the date and time when the change has been made, and the change description. The pop-up window also contains icons used to accept or reject the current change.If you drag and drop a piece of text to some other place in the document, the text in a new position will be underlined with the double line. The text in the original position will be double- crossed. This will count as a single change. Click the double-crossed text in the original position and use the arrow in the change pop-up window to go to the new location of the text. Click the double-underlined text in the new position and use the arrow in the change pop-up window to go to to the original location of the text. Choose the changes display mode Click the Display Mode button on the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list: · Markup - this option is selected by default. It allows both viewing the suggested changes and editing the document. · Final - this mode is used to display all the changes as if they were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. · Original - this mode is used to display all the changes as if they were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Accept or reject changes Use the Previous and the Next buttons on the top toolbar to navigate through the changes. To accept the currently selected change you can: · click the Accept button on the top toolbar, or · click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept Current Change option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or · click the Accept button of the change pop-up window. To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option. To reject the current change you can:· click the Reject button on the top toolbar, or · click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject Current Change option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or · click the Reject button of the change pop-up window. To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option. Note: if you review the document, the Accept and Reject options are not available for you. You can delete your changes using the icon within the change balloon. Compare documents Note: this option is available in the paid online version only starting from Document Server v. 5.5. If you need to compare and merge two documents, you can use the document Compare feature. It allows displaying the differences between two documents and merge the documents by accepting the changes one by one or all at once. After comparing and merging two documents, the result will be stored on the portal as a new version of the original file. If you do not need to merge documents which are being compared, you can reject all the changes so that the original document remains unchanged. Choose a document for comparison To compare two documents, open the original document that you need to compare and select the second document for comparison: 1. switch to the Collaboration tab on the top toolbar and press the Compare button, 2. select one of the following options to load the document: · the Document from File option will open the standard dialog window for file selection. Browse your computer hard disk drive for the necessary .docx file and click the Open button. · the Document from URL option will open the window where you can enter a link to the file stored in a third-party web storage (for example, Nextcloud) if you have corresponding access rights to it. The link must be a direct link for downloading the file. When the link is specified, click the OK button. Note: The direct link allows downloading the file directly without opening it in a web browser. For example, to get a direct link in Nextcloud, find the necessary document in the file list, select the Details option from the file menu. Click the Copy direct link (only works for users who have access to this file/folder) icon on the right of the file name on the details panel. To find out how to get a direct link for downloading the file in adifferent third-party web storage, please refer to the corresponding third-party service documentation. · the Document from Storage option will open the Select Data Source window. It displays the list of all the .docx documents stored on your portal you have corresponding access rights to. To navigate through the sections of the Documentsmodule, use the menu on the left part of the window. Select the necessary .docx document and click the OK button. When the second document for comparison is selected, the comparison process will start and the document will look as if it was opened in the Reviewmode. All the changes are highlighted with a color, and you can view the changes, navigate between them, accept or reject them one by one or all the changes at once. It''s also possible to change the display mode and see how the document looks before comparison, in the process of comparison, or how it will look after comparison if you accept all changes. Choose the changes display mode Click the Display Mode button on the top toolbar and select one of the available modes from the list: · Markup - this option is selected by default. It is used to display the document in the process of comparison. This mode allows both viewing the changes and editing the document. · Final - this mode is used to display the document after comparison as if all the changes were accepted. This option does not actually accept all changes, it only allows you to see how the document will look like after you accept all the changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document.· Original - this mode is used to display the document before comparison as if all the changes were rejected. This option does not actually reject all changes, it only allows you to view the document without changes. In this mode, you cannot edit the document. Accept or reject changes Use the Previous and the Next buttons on the top toolbar to navigate through the changes. To accept the currently selected change, you can: · click the Accept button on the top toolbar, or · click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept Current Change option (in this case, the change will be accepted and you will proceed to the next change), or · click the Accept button of the change pop-up window. To quickly accept all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Accept button and select the Accept All Changes option. To reject the current change you can: · click the Reject button on the top toolbar, or · click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject Current Change option (in this case, the change will be rejected and you will move on to the next available change), or · click the Reject button of the change pop-up window.To quickly reject all the changes, click the downward arrow below the Reject button and select the Reject All Changes option. Additional info on the comparison feature Method of comparison Documents are compared by words. If a word contains a change of at least one character (e.g. if a character was removed or replaced), in the result, the difference will be displayed as the change of the entire word, not the character. The image below illustrates the case when the original file contains the word ''Characters'' and the document for comparison contains the word ''Character''. Authorship of the document When the comparison process is launched, the second document for comparison is being loaded and compared to the current one. · If the loaded document contains some data which is not represented in the original document, the data will be marked as added by a reviewer. · If the original document contains some data which is not represented in the loaded document, the data will be marked as deleted by a reviewer. If the authors of the original and loaded documents are the same person, the reviewer is the same user. His/her name is displayed in the change balloon. If the authors of two files are different users, then the author of the second file loaded for comparison is the author of the added/removed changes. Presence of the tracked changes in the compared document If the original document contains some changes made in the review mode, they will be accepted in the comparison process. When you choose the second file for comparison, you''ll see the corresponding warning message. In this case, when you choose the Original display mode, the document will not contain any changes.Plugins Edit an image ONLYOFFICE comes with a very powerful photo editor, that allows you to adjust the image with filters and make all kinds of annotations. 1. Select an image in your document. 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Photo Editor. You are now in the editing environment. · Below the image you will find the following checkboxes and slider filters: o Grayscale, Sepia, Sepia 2, Blur, Emboss, Invert, Sharpen; o Remove White (Threshhold, Distance), Gradient transparency, Brightness, Noise, Pixelate, Color Filter; o Tint,Multiply, Blend. · Below the filters you will find buttons for o Undo, Redo and Resetting; o Delete, Delete all; o Crop (Custom, Square, 3:2, 4:3, 5:4, 7:5, 16:9); o Flip (Flip X, Flip Y, Reset); o Rotate (30 degree, -30 degree,Manual rotation slider); o Draw (Free, Straight, Color, Size slider); o Shape (Recrangle, Circle, Triangle, Fill, Stroke, Stroke size); o Icon (Arrows, Stars, Polygon, Location, Heart, Bubble, Custom icon, Color); o Text (Bold, Italic, Underline, Left, Center, Right, Color, Text size); o Mask. Feel free to try all of these and remember you can always undo them. 3. When finished, click the OK button. The edited picture is now included in the document. Edit HTML If you are writing a website page in a text editor and want to get it as an HTML code, use the HTML plugin. 1. Open the Plugins tab and click Get and paste html. 2. Select the necessary content. 3. The HTML code of the selected paragraph will be displayed in the plugin field on the left-side panel. You can edit the code to alter the text characteristics, e.g. font size or font family, etc. 4. Click Paste into the document to insert the text with its HTML code edited at the current cursor position in your document. You can also write your own HTML code (without selecting any document content) and then paste it to your document.Correct typography If you need to correct typography in your text, use the Typograf plugin that will automatically place non-breaking spaces and remove extra ones, as well as correct minor typos, insert correct quotes, replace hyphens with dashes, etc. 1. Open the Plugins tab and click Typograf. 2. Click the Show advanced settings button. 3. Choose the locale and the rules you want to apply to your text. 4. Select the text you want to correct. 5. Click the Correct text button. Count words To know the exact number of words and symbols both with and without spaces in your document, as well as the number of paragraphs altogether, use the Word counter plugin. 1. Open the Plugins tab and click Count words and characters. 2. Select the text. Please note that the following elements are not included in the word count: - footnote/endnote symbols, - numbers from numbered lists, - page numbers Include a video You can include a video in your document. It will be shown as an image. By double-clicking the image the video dialog opens. Here you can start the video. 1. Copy the URL of the video you want to include. (the complete address shown in the address line of your browser) 2. Go to your document and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the video. 3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose YouTube. 4. Paste the URL and click OK. 5. Check if it is the correct video and click the OK button below the video. The video is now included in your document. Insert highlighted code You can embed highlighted code with the already adjusted style in accordance with the programming language and coloring style of the program you have chosen.1. Go to your document and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the code. 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Highlight code. 3. Specify the programming Language. 4. Select a Style of the code so that it appears as if it were open in this program. 5. Specify if you want to replace tabs with spaces. 6. Choose Background color. To do this, manually move the cursor over the palette or insert the RBG/HSL/HEX value. 7. Click OK to insert the code. Insert references ONLYOFFICE supportsMendeley, Zotero and EasyBib reference managers to insert references into your document. Mendeley Connect ONLYOFFICE to Mendeley 1. Login to yourMendeley account. 2. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose Mendeley, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document. 3. Click the Copy Link and Open Form button. The browser opens a form on the Mendeley site. Complete this form and note the Application ID for ONLYOFFICE. 4. Switch back to your document. 5. Enter the Application ID and click Save. 6. Click Login. 7. Click Proceed. Now ONLYOFFICE is connected to your Mendeley account. Inserting references 1. Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s). 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Mendeley. 3. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard. 4. Click on or more check-boxes. 5. [Optional] Enter a new search text and click on one or more check-boxes. 6. Choose the reference style from the Style pull-down menu. 7. Click the Insert Bibliography button.Zotero Connect ONLYOFFICE to Zotero 1. Login to your Zotero account. 2. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose Zotero, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document. 3. Click the Zotero API settings link. 4. On the Zotero site, create a new key for Zotero, copy it and save it for later use. 5. Switch to your document and paste the API key. 6. Click Save. Now ONLYOFFICE is connected to your Zotero account. Inserting references 1. Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s). 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Zotero. 3. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard. 4. Click on or more check-boxes. 5. [Optional] Enter a new search text and click on one or more check-boxes. 6. Choose the reference style from the Style pull-down menu. 7. Click the Insert Bibliography button. EasyBib 1. Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s). 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose EasyBib. 3. Select the type of sourse you want to find. 4. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard. 5. Click ''+'' on the right side of the suitable Book/Journal article/Website. It will be added to Bibliography. 6. Select references style. 7. Click the Add Bibliography to Doc to insert the references. Translate text You can translate your document from and to numerous languages. 1. Select the text that you want to translate. 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left. 3. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The text will be translated to the required language.Changing the language of your result: 1. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The translation will change immediately. Extract text from an image With ONLYOFFICE you can extract text from an image (.png .jpg) and insert it in your document. 1. Open your document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the text. 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose OCR from the menu. 3. Click Load File and select the image. 4. Choose the recognition language from the Choose Language pull-down menu. 5. Click Recognize. 6. Click Insert text. You should check the inserted text for errors and layout. Read the text out loud ONLYOFFICE has a plugin that can read out the text for you. 1. Select the text to be read out. 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Speech. The text will now be read out. Replace a word by a synonym If you are using the same word multiple times, or a word is just not quite the word you are looking for, ONLYOFFICE let you look up synonyms. It will show you the antonyms too. 1. Select the word in your document. 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Thesaurus. 3. The synonyms and antonyms will show up in the left sidebar. 4. Click a word to replace the word in your document.Upload a document to Wordpress You can write your articles in your ONLYOFFICE environment and upload them as a Wordpress- article. Connect to Wordpress 1. Open your document. 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Wordpress. 3. Log in into your Wordpress account and choose the website page you want to post your document on. 4. Enter a title for your article. 5. Click Publish to publish immediatly or Save as draft to publish later from your WordPress site or app. Tools and settings View document information To access the detailed information about the currently edited document, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Document Info... option. General Information The document information includes a number of the file properties which describe the document. Some of these properties are updated automatically, and some of them can be edited. · Location - the folder in the Documentsmodule where the file is stored. Owner - the name of the user who has created the file. Uploaded - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the online version only. · Statistics - the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, symbols with spaces. · Title, Subject, Comment - these properties allow yoy to simplify your documents classification. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields. · Last Modified - the date and time when the file was last modified. · Last Modified By - the name of the user who has made the latest change to the document. This option is available if the document has been shared and can be edited by several users. · Application - the application the document has been created with. · Author - the person who has created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author. If you changed the file properties, click the Apply button to apply the changes.Note: The online Editors allow you to change the name of the document directly in the editor interface. To do that, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Rename... option, then enter the necessary File name in a new window that will appear and click OK. Permission Information In the online version, you can view the information about permissions to the files stored in the cloud. Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To find out who have rights to view or edit the document, select the Access Rights... option on the left sidebar. You can also change currently selected access rights by pressing the Change access rights button in the Persons who have rights section. Version History In the online version, you can view the version history for the files stored in the cloud. Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To view all the changes made to this document, select the Version History option at the left sidebar. It''s also possible to open the history of versions using the Version History icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. You''ll see the list of this document versions (major changes) and revisions (minor changes) with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For document versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author''s name on the left sidebar. You can use the Restore link below the selected version/revision to restore it. To return to the current version of the document, use the Close History option on the top of the version list.To close the File panel and return to document editing, select the Close Menu option. Save/download/print your document Saving By default, online Document Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you work on it to prevent your data loss in case the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the Fastmode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strictmode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If necessary, you can easily select the preferred co- editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your current document manually in the current format and location, · press the Save icon in the left part of the editor header, or · use the Ctrl+S key combination, or · click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. Note: in the desktop version, to prevent data from loss in case program closes unexpectedly, you can turn on the Autorecover option on the Advanced Settings page. In the desktop version, you can save the document with another name, in a new location or format, 1. click the File tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the Save as... option, 3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, ODT, RTF, TXT, PDF, PDFA. You can also choose the Document template (DOTX or OTT) option. Downloading In the online version, you can download the resulting document onto your computer hard disk drive, 1. click the File tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the Download as... option, 3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Saving a copy In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal, 1. click the File tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the Save Copy as... option,3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, 4. select a location of the file on the portal and press Save. Printing To print out the current document, · click the Print icon in the left part of the editor header, or · use the Ctrl+P key combination, or · click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. It''s also possible to print a selected text passage using the Print Selection option from the contextual menu both in the Edit and Viewmodes (Right Mouse Button Click and choose option Print selection). In the desktop version, the file will be printed directly. In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing. Advanced Settings of the Document Editor The Document Editor allows you to change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings... option. You can also click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select the Advanced settings option. The advanced settings are: · Commenting Display is used to turn on/off the live commenting option: o Turn on display of the comments - if you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. o Turn on display of the resolved comments - this feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments were hidden in the document text. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the document text. · Spell Checking is used to turn on/off the spell checking option. · Proofing - used to automatically replace word or symbol typed in the Replace: box or chosen from the list by a new word or symbol displayed in the By: box. · Alternate Input is used to turn on/off hieroglyphs. · Alignment Guides is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects and allow you to position them on the page precisely.· Compatibility is used to make the files compatible with older MS Word versions when saved as DOCX. · Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing. · Autorecover - is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows automatically recovering documents in case the program closes unexpectedly. · Co-editing Mode is used to select the display of the changes made during the co- editing: o By default the Fastmode is selected, the users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users. o If you prefer not to see other user changes (so that they do not disturb you, or for some other reason), select the Strictmode and all the changes will be shown only after you click the Save icon notifying you that there are changes from other users. · Real-time Collaboration Changes is used to specify what changes you want to be highlighted during co-editing: o Selecting the View None option, changes made during the current session will not be highlighted. o Selecting the View All option, all the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. o Selecting the View Last option, only the changes made since you last time clicked the Save icon will be highlighted. This option is only available when the Strict co-editing mode is selected. · Interface theme is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface. o Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light-gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during daytime. o Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light-gray colors. o Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark-gray, and light-gray colors suitable for working during nighttime. · Default Zoom Value is used to set the default zoom value selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 200%. You can also choose the Fit to Page or Fit to Width option. · Font Hinting is used to select the type a font is displayed in the Document Editor: o Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. o Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. o Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with the hinting embedded into font files. o Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue in the Google Chrome browser with the enabled hardware acceleration occurs.The Document Editor has two cache modes: 1. In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. 2. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies two above mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: o When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. o When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. · Unit of Measurement is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties windows for measuring elements parameters such as width, height, spacing, margins etc. You can select the Centimeter, Point, or Inch option. · Cut, copy and paste - used to show the Paste Options button when content is pasted. Check the box to enable this feature. · Macros Settings - used to set macros display with a notification. o Choose Disable all to disable all macros within the document; o Show notification to receive notifications about macros within the document; o Enable all to automatically run all macros within the document. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button. View Settings and Navigation Tools The Document Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your document: zoom, page number indicator etc. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the document, click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options from the View settings drop-down list: · Hide Toolbar - hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode, click the View settings icon and click the Hide Toolbar option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time.Note: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. · Hide Status Bar - hides the bottommost bar where the Page Number Indicator and Zoom buttons are situated. To show the hidden Status Bar click this option once again. · Hide Rulers - hides rulers which are used to align text, graphics, tables, and other elements in a document, set up margins, tab stops, and paragraph indents. To show the hidden Rulers click this option once again. The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g. image, chart, shape) or text passage and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. When the Comments or Chat panel is opened, the width of the left sidebar is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the width of the sidebar. To restore its original width, move the border to the left. Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your document, use the following tools: The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out the current document. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. Click the Fit to width icon to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area. To fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit to page icon. Zoom settings are also available in the View settings drop-down list that can be useful if you decide to hide the Status Bar. The Page Number Indicator shows the current page as a part of all the pages in the current document (page ''n'' of ''nn''). Click this caption to open the window where you can enter the page number and quickly go to it. Search and Replace Function To search for the required characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document, click the icon situated on the left sidebar or use the Ctrl+F key combination. The Find and Replace window will open:1. Type in your inquiry into the corresponding data entry field. 2. Specify search parameters by clicking the icon and checking the necessary options: · Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is ''Editor'' and this option is selected, such words as ''editor'' or ''EDITOR'' etc. will not be found). To disable this option, click it once again. · Highlight results - is used to highlight all found occurrences at once. To disable this option and remove the highlight, click the option once again. 3. Click one of the arrow buttons at the bottom right corner of the window. The search will be performed either towards the beginning of the document (if you click the button) or towards the end of the document (if you click the button) from the current position. Note: when the Highlight results option is enabled, use these buttons to navigate through the highlighted results. The first occurrence of the required characters in the selected direction will be highlighted on the page. If it is not the word you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next occurrence of the characters you entered. To replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, click the Replace link below the data entry field or use the Ctrl+H key combination. The Find and Replace window will change: 1. Type in the replacement text into the bottom data entry field.2. Click the Replace button to replace the currently selected occurrence or the Replace All button to replace all the found occurrences. To hide the replace field, click the Hide Replace link. Spell-checking The Document Editor allows you to check the spelling of your text in a certain language and correct mistakes while editing. In the desktop version, it''s also possible to add words into a custom dictionary which is common for all three editors. First of all, choose a language for your document. Click the Set Document Language icon on the status bar. In the opened window, select the required language and click OK. The selected language will be applied to the whole document. To choose a different language for any piece within the document, select the necessary text passage with the mouse and use the menu on the status bar. To enable the spell checking option, you can: · click the Spell checking icon on the status bar, or · open the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, check the Turn on spell checking option box and click the Apply button. all misspelled words will be underlined by a red line. Right click on the necessary word to activate the menu and: · choose one of the suggested similar words spelled correctly to replace the misspelled word with the suggested one. If too many variants are found, the More variants... option appears in the menu; · use the Ignore option to skip just that word and remove underlining or Ignore All to skip all the identical words repeated in the text; · if the current word is missed in the dictionary, you can add it to the custom dictionary. This word will not be treated as a mistake next time. This option is available in the desktop version. · select a different language for this word.To disable the spell checking option, you can: · click the Spell checking icon on the status bar, or · open the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, uncheck the Turn on spell checking option box and click the Apply button. AutoCorrect Features The AutoCorrect features in ONLYOFFICE Docs are used to automatically format text when detected or insert special math symbols by recognizing particular character usage. The available AutoCorrect options are listed in the corresponding dialog box. To access it, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options. The AutoCorrect dialog box consists of three tabs: Math Autocorrect, Recognized Functions, and AutoFormat As You Type. Math AutoCorrect When working with equations, you can insert a lot of symbols, accents, and mathematical operation signs typing them on the keyboard instead of choosing a template from the gallery. In the equation editor, place the insertion point within the necessary placeholder, type a math autocorrect code, then press Spacebar. The entered code will be converted into the corresponding symbol, and the space will be eliminated. Note: The codes are case sensitive. You can add, modify, restore, and remove autocorrect entries from the AutoCorrect list. Go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options ->Math AutoCorrect. Adding an entry to the AutoCorrect list · Enter the autocorrect code you want to use in the Replace box. · Enter the symbol to be assigned to the code you entered in the By box. · Click the Add button. Modifying an entry on the AutoCorrect list· Select the entry to be modified. · You can change the information in both fields: the code in the Replace box or the symbol in the By box. · Click the Replace button. Removing entries from the AutoCorrect list · Select an entry to remove from the list. · Click the Delete button. To restore the previously deleted entries, select the entry to be restored from the list and click the Restore button. Use the Reset to default button to restore default settings. Any autocorrect entry you added will be removed and the changed ones will be restored to their original values. To disable Math AutoCorrect and to avoid automatic changes and replacements, uncheck the Replace text as you type box. The table below contains all the currently supported codes available in the Document Editor. The full list of the supported codes can also be found on the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options ->Math AutoCorrect. The supported codesRecognized Functions In this tab, you will find the list of math expressions that will be recognized by the Equation editor as functions and therefore will not be automatically italicized. For the list of recognized functions go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Recognized Functions. To add an entry to the list of recognized functions, enter the function in the blank field and click the Add button. To remove an entry from the list of recognized functions, select the function to be removed and click the Delete button. To restore the previously deleted entries, select the entry to be restored from the list and click the Restore button. Use the Reset to default button to restore default settings. Any function you added will be removed and the removed ones will be restored. AutoFormat As You Type By default, the editor formats the text while you are typing according to the auto-formatting presets, for instance, it automatically starts a bullet list or a numbered list when a list is detected, or replaces quotation marks, or converts hyphens to dashes.If you need to disable auto-formatting presets, uncheck the box for the unnecessary options, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> AutoFormat As You Type. Helpful hints About the Document Editor The Document Editor is an online application that allows you to view through and edit documents directly in your browser. Using the Document Editor, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor, print the edited documents keeping all the formatting details or download them onto your computer hard disk drive of your computer as DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML, FB2, EPUB files. To view the current software version and licensor details in the online version, click the icon on the left sidebar. To view the current software version and licensor details in the desktop version, select the Aboutmenu item on the left sidebar of the main program window. Supported Formats of Electronic Documents An electronic document is one of the most commonly used computer. Due to the highly developed modern computer network, it''s more convenient to distribute electronic documentsthan printed ones. Nowadays, a lot of devices are used for document presentation, so there are plenty of proprietary and open file formats. The Document Editor handles the most popular of them. Formats Description View Edit Download DOC Filename extension for word processing documents created with Microsoft Word + + Office Open XML DOCX Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and + + + word processing documents Word Open XML Document Template Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for DOTX text document templates. A DOTX template contains + + + formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting FB2 An ebook extension that lets you read books on your computer or mobile devices + ODT Word processing file format of OpenDocument, an open standard for electronic documents + + + OpenDocument Document Template OpenDocument file format for text document templates. OTT An OTT template contains formatting settings, styles etc. + + + and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting Rich Text Format RTF Document file format developed by Microsoft for cross- + + + platform document interchange TXT Filename extension for text files usually containing very little formatting + + + Portable Document Format PDF File format used to represent documents regardless of + + the used software, hardware, and operating systems Portable Document Format / A PDF/A An ISO-standardized version of the Portable Document Format (PDF) specialized for use in the archiving and long- + + term preservation of electronic documents. HTML HyperText Markup Language The main markup language for web pages + + +Electronic Publication EPUB Free and open e-book standard created by the + + + International Digital Publishing Forum Open XML Paper Specification XPS Open royalty-free fixed-layout document format + developed by Microsoft File format designed primarily to store scanned DjVu documents, especially those containing a combination of + + text, line drawings, and photographs Extensible Markup Language (XML). XML A simple and flexible markup language that derived from SGML (ISO 8879) and is designed to store and transport + + data. Note: the HTML/EPUB/MHT formats run without Chromium and are available on all platforms. Keyboard Shortcuts For Windows/Linux: Working with Document Open the File panel panel to save, download, print the Open ''File'' panel Alt+F current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access the Document Editor Help Center or advanced settings. Open ''Find Open the Find and Replace dialog box to start searching and Replace'' Ctrl+F for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited dialog box document. Open ''Find and Replace'' dialog box Open the Find and Replace dialog box with the with Ctrl+H replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the replacement found characters. field Repeat the last ''Find'' ⇧ Shift+F4 Repeat the previous Find performed before the key action combination was pressed. Open ''Comments'' Ctrl+⇧ Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or panel Shift+H reply to other users'' comments.Open comment Alt+H Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your field comment. Open ''Chat'' panel Alt+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save Save all the changes to the document currently edited with document Ctrl+S The Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print document Ctrl+P Print the document with one of the available printers or save it as a file. Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited Download As... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S document to the hard disk drive of your computer in one of the supported formats: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, OTT, RTF, HTML. Full screen F11 Switch to the full screen view to fit the Document Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 Open the Document Editor Helpmenu. Open existing file (Desktop Ctrl+O On the Open local file tab in the Desktop Editors, opens Editors) the standard dialog box that allows to select an existing file. Close file (Desktop Ctrl+W, Close the current document window in the Desktop Editors) Ctrl+F4 Editors. Element contextual ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. menu Reset the ‘Zoom’ Ctrl+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current document to a parameter default 100%. Navigation Jump to the beginning of Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. the line Jump to the beginning of the Ctrl+Home Put the cursor to the very beginning of the currently edited document. documentJump to the end of the End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. line Jump to the end of the Ctrl+End Put the cursor to the very end of the currently edited document document. Jump to the beginning of Alt+Ctrl+Page Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which the previous Up preceeds the currently edited one. page Jump to the beginning of Alt+Ctrl+Page Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which the next page Down follows the currently edited one. Scroll down Page Down Scroll the document approximately one visible page down. Scroll up Page Up Scroll the document approximately one visible page up. Next page Alt+Page Down Go to the next page in the currently edited document. Previous page Alt+Page Up Go to the previous page in the currently edited document. Zoom In Ctrl++ Zoom in the currently edited document. Zoom Out Ctrl+- Zoom out the currently edited document. Move one character to ← Move the cursor one character to the left. the left Move one character to → Move the cursor one character to the right. the right Move to the beginning of a word or Ctrl+← Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to one word to the left. the left Move one word to the Ctrl+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. right Move one line up ↑ Move the cursor one line up.Move one line down ↓ Move the cursor one line down. Navigate between controls in ↹ Tab↹/⇧ Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or modal Shift+ Tab previous control in modal dialogues. dialogues Writing End paragraph ↵ Enter End the current paragraph and start a new one. Add line ⇧ Shift+↵ break Enter Add a line break without starting a new paragraph. Delete ← Backspace, Delete one character to the left (← Backspace) or to the right Delete (Delete) of the cursor. Delete word to the left of Ctrl+← ord to the left of the cursor. cursor Backspace Delete one w Delete word to the right of Ctrl+Delete Delete one word to the right of the cursor. cursor Create nonbreaking Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Create a space between characters which cannot be used to space Spacebar start a new line. Create nonbreaking Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ Create a hyphen between characters which cannot be used hyphen to start a new line. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Ctrl+X, Delete the selected text fragment and send it to the Cut ⇧ computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later Shift+Delete inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program.Send the selected text fragment to the computer clipboard Copy Ctrl+C, memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another Ctrl+Insert place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Insert the previously copied text fragment from the Paste C⇧trl+V, computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. Shift+Insert The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address. Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the Copy style Ctrl+⇧ Shift+C currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same document. Apply style Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited document. Text Selection Select all Ctrl+A Select all the document text with tables and images. Select fragment ⇧ Shift+→ ← Select the text character by character. Select from cursor to text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of beginning of ⇧ Shift+Home Select a the current line. line Select from cursor to end ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the of line current line. Select one character to ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. the right Select one character to ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. the left Select to the Ctrl+⇧ end of a word Shift+→ Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word. Select to the beginning of Ctrl+⇧ Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a a word Shift+← word.Select one line up ⇧ Shift+↑ Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select one line down ⇧ Shift+↓ Select one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select the ⇧ Shift+Page Select the page part from the cursor position to the upper page up Up part of the screen. Select the ⇧ Shift+Page Select the page part from the cursor position to the lower page down Down part of the screen. Text Styling Bold Ctrl+B Make the font of the selected text fragment darker and heavier than normal. Italic Ctrl+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized and slightly slanted. Underline Ctrl+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going below the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript Ctrl+. Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+, Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Heading 1 style Alt+1 Apply the style of the heading 1 to the selected text fragment. Heading 2 style Alt+2 Apply the style of the heading 2 to the selected text fragment. Heading 3 style Alt+3 Apply the style of the heading 3 to the selected text fragment. Bulleted list Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Remove Ctrl+␣ formatting Spacebar Remove formatting from the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point.Decrease font Ctrl+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center/left Ctrl+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned. Align Ctrl+J, justified/left Ctrl+L Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned. Align right/left Ctrl+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned. Apply subscript formatting Ctrl+= Apply subscript formatting to the selected text fragment. (automatic spacing) Apply superscript formatting Ctrl+⇧ Shift++ Apply superscript formatting to the selected text fragment. (automatic spacing) Insert page break Ctrl+↵ Enter Insert a page break at the current cursor position. Increase indent Ctrl+M Indent a paragraph from the left incrementally. Decrease Ctrl+⇧ indent Shift+M Remove a paragraph indent from the left incrementally. Add page number Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P Add the current page number at the current cursor position. Nonprinting Ctrl+⇧ characters Shift+Num8 Show or hide the display of nonprinting characters. Delete one character to ← Backspace Delete one character to the left of the cursor. the left Delete one character to Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor. the right Modifying Objects Constrain ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontallymovement or vertically. Set 15-degree ⇧ Shift + drag rotation (when Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. rotating) Maintain ⇧ Shift + drag proportions (when Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing) resizing. ⇧ Shift + drag Draw straight (when line or arrow drawing Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow. lines/arrows) Movement by one-pixel Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows to move increments the selected object by one pixel at a time. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a ↹ Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. row Move to the previous cell ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row. in a row Move to the next row ↓ Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row ↑ Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph ↵ Enter Start a new paragraph within a cell. ↹ Tab in the Add new row lower right Add a new row at the bottom of the table. table cell. Inserting special characters Insert formula Alt+= Insert a formula at the current cursor position. Insert an em dash Alt+Ctrl+Num- Insert an em dash ‘—’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor.Insert a non- breaking Ctrl+⇧ Shift+_ Insert a non-breaking hyphen ‘-’ within the current hyphen document and to the right of the cursor. Insert a no- Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Insert a no-break space ‘o’ within the current document and break space Spacebar to the right of the cursor. For Mac OS: Working with Document Open the File panel panel to save, download, print the Open ''File'' current document, view its info, create a new document or panel ⌥ Option+F open an existing one, access the Document Editor Help Center or advanced settings. Open ''Find and Replace'' ^ Ctrl+F, Open the Find and Replace dialog box to start searching for dialog box ⌘ Cmd+F a character/word/phrase in the currently edited document. Open ''Find and Replace'' dialog box Open the Find and Replace dialog box with the replacement with ^ Ctrl+H field to replace one or more occurrences of the found replacement characters. field Repeat the ⇧ last ''Find'' acti ⌘⌘ Shift+F4, Cmd+ Repeat the previous Find performed before the key on ⇧G,Cmd+ combination was pressed. Shift+F4 Open ^ Ctrl+⇧ ''Comments'' S⌘hift+H, Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or panel Cmd+⇧ reply to other users'' comments. Shift+H Open comment ⌥ Option+H Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your field comment. Open ''Chat'' panel ⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save ^ Save all the changes to the document currently edited with document ⌘Ctrl+S,Cmd+S The Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format.Print ^⌘Ctrl+P, Print the document with one of the available printers or save document Cmd+P it as a file. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited Download Shift+S, document to the hard disk drive of your computer in one of As... ⌘ Cmd+⇧ the supported formats: DOCX, PDF, ODT, TXT, DOTX, PDF/A, Shift+S OTT, RTF, HTML. Help menu F1 Open the Document Editor Helpmenu. Close file (Desktop ^ ment window in the Desktop Editors. Editors) ⌘Ctrl+W, Cmd+W Close the current docu Element contextual ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. menu Reset the ‘Zoom’ ^ Ctrl+0 or⌘ Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current document to a parameter Cmd+0 default 100%. Navigation Jump to the beginning of Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. the line Jump to the beginning of ut the cursor to the very beginning of the currently edited the ^ Ctrl+Home P document. document Jump to the end of the End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. line Jump to the end of the ^ Ctrl+End Put the cursor to the very end of the currently edited document document. Jump to the ⌥ Option+⌘ beginning of Cmd+⇧ Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which the next page Shift+Page follows the currently edited one. Down ⌥Page Down, Scroll down Option+Fn+↑ Scroll the document approximately one visible page down.Page Up, Scroll up ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ Scroll the document approximately one visible page up. ⌥ Next page Option+Page Go to the next page in the currently edited document. Down Previous ⌥ page Option+Page Go to the previous page in the currently edited document. Up Zoom In ^⌘Ctrl+=,Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited document. Zoom Out ^⌘Ctrl+-,Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited document. Move one character to ← Move the cursor one character to the left. the left Move one character to → Move the cursor one character to the right. the right Move to the beginning of a word or ^ one word to ⌘Ctrl+←, Move the cursor Cmd+← to the beginning of a word or one word to the left. the left Move one word to the ^ righ ⌘Ctrl+→, Cmd+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. t Move one line up ↑ Move the cursor one line up. Move one line down ↓ Move the cursor one line down. Navigate between controls in ↹ Tab/⇧ Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or modal Shift+↹ Tab previous control in modal dialogues. dialogues WritingEnd paragraph ↵ Return End the current paragraph and start a new one. Add line ⇧ Shift+↵ break Return Add a line break without starting a new paragraph. Delete ← Backspace, Delete one character to the left (← Backspace) or to the right Delete (Delete) of the cursor. Delete word ^ Ctrl+← to the left of Backspace, curso ⌘ Cmd+← Delete one word to the left of the cursor. r Backspace Delete word ^ Ctrl+Delete, to the right of ⌘ Delete one word to the right of the cursor. cursor Cmd+Delete Create ^ Ctrl+⇧ nonbreaking Shift+␣ Create a space between characters which cannot be used to space Spacebar start a new line. Create nonbreaking ^ Ctrl+⇧ Create a hyphen between characters which cannot be used hyphen Shift+Hyphen to start a new line. Undo and Redo Undo ⌘^ Ctrl+Z, Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. ^ Ctrl+Y, Redo ⌘⌘ Cmd+Y, Cmd+⇧ Repeat the latest undone action. Shift+Z Cut, Copy, and Paste ⌘ Cmd+X, Delete the selected text fragment and send it to the Cut ⇧ computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later Shift+Delete inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Send the selected text fragment to the computer clipboard Copy ⌘ Cmd+C memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Paste ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied text fragment from thecomputer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Insert hyperlink ⌘ Cmd+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address. Copy style ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the Shift+C currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same document. Apply style ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the Shift+V currently edited document. Text Selection Select all ⌘ Cmd+A Select all the document text with tables and images. Select fragment ⇧ Shift+→ ← Select the text character by character. Select from cursor to ⇧ Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of beginning of Shift+Home the current line. line Select from cursor to end ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the of line current line. Select one character to ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. the right Select one character to ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. the left Select one line up ⇧ Shift+↑ Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select one line down ⇧ Shift+↓ Select one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select the ⇧ Shift+Page Select the page part from the cursor position to the upper page up Up part of the screen. Select the ⇧ Shift+Page Select the page part from the cursor position to the lower page down Down part of the screen.Text Styling Bold ⌘^ Ctrl+B, Make the font of the selected text fragment darker and Cmd+B heavier than normal. Italic ⌘^ Ctrl+I, Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized and Cmd+I slightly slanted. Underline ^⌘Ctrl+U, Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going Cmd+U below the letters. Strikeout ^⌘Ctrl+5, Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going Cmd+5 through the letters. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Subscript S⌘hift+>,Cmd+⇧ Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Shift+> ^ Ctrl+⇧ Superscript S⌘hift+<,Cmd+⇧ Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Shift+< Heading 1 ⌥ Option+^ Apply the style of the heading 1 to the selected text style Ctrl+1 fragment. Heading 2 ⌥ Option+^ Apply the style of the heading 2 to the selected text style Ctrl+2 fragment. Heading 3 ⌥ Option+^ Apply the style of the heading 3 to the selected text style Ctrl+3 fragment. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Bulleted list S⌘hift+L,Cmd+⇧ Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Shift+L Increase font ⌘ Cmd+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font ⌘ Cmd+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align ^⌘Ctrl+E,center/left Cmd+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned. Align ^⌘Ctrl+J,justified/left Cmd+J Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned.Align right/left ^ Ctrl+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned. Insert page ^ Ctrl+↵ break Return Insert a page break at the current cursor position. Increase indent ^ Ctrl+M Indent a paragraph from the left incrementally. Decrease ^ Ctrl+⇧ indent Shift+M Remove a paragraph indent from the left incrementally. Add page ^ Ctrl+⇧ number Shift+P Add the current page number at the current cursor position. Delete one character to ← Backspace Delete one character to the left of the cursor. the left Delete one character to Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor. the right Modifying Objects Constrain ⇧ Shift + Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally movement drag or vertically. Set 15-degree ⇧ Shift + rotation drag (when Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. rotating) Maintain ⇧ Shift + the selected object when proportions drag (when Maintain the proportions of resizing) resizing. ⇧ Shift + Draw straight drag (when line or arrow drawing Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow. lines/arrows) Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a ↹ Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. row Move to the ⇧ Shift+↹ previous cell Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row.in a row Move to the next row ↓ Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row ↑ Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph ↵ Return Start a new paragraph within a cell. ↹ Tab in the Add new row lower right Add a new row at the bottom of the table. table cell. Inserting special characters Insert a non- breaking ^ Ctrl+⇧ Insert a non-breaking hyphen ‘-’ within the current document hyphen Shift+Hyphen and to the right of the cursor. Insert a no- ^ Ctrl+⇧ nsert a no-break space ‘o’ within the current document and break space Shift+␣ I Spacebar to the right of the cursor.ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor Program Interface Introducing the Spreadsheet Editor user interface The Spreadsheet Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality. Main window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: Main window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor:The editor interface consists of the following main elements: 1. The Editor header displays the logo, tabs for all opened spreadsheets, with their names and menu tabs. On the left side of the Editor header there are the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located. On the right side of the Editor header along with the user name the following icons are displayed: Open file location - in the desktop version, it allows opening the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, it allows opening the folder in the Documentsmodule where the file is stored, in a new browser tab. - allows adjusting the View Settings and accessing the Advanced Settings of the editor. Manage document access rights - (available in the online version only) allows setting access rights for the documents stored in the cloud. Mark as favorite - click the star to add a file to favorites as to make it easy to find. The added file is just a shortcut so the file itself remains stored in its original location. Deleting a file from favorites does not remove the file from its original location. 2. The top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Layout, Formula, Data, Pivot Table, Collaboration, Protection, View, Plugins. The Copy and Paste options are always available at the left part of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. 3. The Formula bar allows entering and editing formulas or values in the cells. The Formula bar displays the contents of the currently selected cell. 4. The Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains some navigation tools: sheet navigation buttons, sheet tabs, and zoom buttons. The Status bar also displays the number of filtered records if you apply a filter, or the results of automatic calculations if you select several cells containing data. 5. The Left sidebar contains the following icons: · - allows using the Search and Replace tool, · - allows opening the Comments panel, · - (available in the online version only) allows opening the Chat panel, · - (available in the online version only) allows contacting our support team, · - (available in the online version only) allows viewing the information about the program.6. The Right sidebar allows adjusting additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object in a worksheet, the corresponding icon is activated on the right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the right sidebar. 7. TheWorking area allows viewing the contents of a spreadsheet, as well as entering and editing data. 8. The horizontal and vertical Scroll bars allow scrolling up/down and left/right. For your convenience, you can hide some components and display them again when necessary. File tab The File tab allows performing basic operations with the current file. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor:Using this tab, you can perform the following operations: · in the online version, save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), download as (save the spreadsheet in the selected format to hard disk drive of the computer), save copy as (save a copy of the spreadsheet in the selected format to the portal documents), print or rename it, in the desktop version, save the current file keeping the current format and location using the Save option or save the current file with a different name, location or format using the Save as option, print the file. · protect the file using a password, change or remove the password (available in the desktop version only); · create a new spreadsheet or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only), · view the general information about the spreadsheet or change some file properties, · manage access rights (available in the online version only), · access the Advanced Settings of the editor, · in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, open the folder in the Documentsmodule, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab. Home tab The Home tab opens by default when you open a spreadsheet. It allows you to format cells and data in them, apply filters, insert functions, etc. Some other options are also available here, such as color schemes, Format as table template feature and so on. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor:The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can: · set the font type, size, style, and colors, · align data in cells, · add cell borders andmerge cells, · insert functions and create named ranges, · sort and filter data, · change the number format, · add or remove cells, rows, columns, · copy/clear the cell formatting, · apply a table template to the selected cell range. Insert tab The Insert tab allows adding visual objects and comments to a spreadsheet. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can: · insert pivot tables, · insert formatted tables, · insert images, shapes, text boxes and Text Art objects, charts, · insert comments and hyperlinks, · insert headers/footers, · insert equations and symbols,· insert slicers. Layout tab The Layout tab allows adjusting the appearance of a spreadsheet: setting up the page parameters and defining the arrangement of visual elements. TThe corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can: · adjust page margins, orientation, size, · specify a print area, · insert headers or footers, · scale a worksheet, · print titles on a page, · align and arrange objects (images, charts, shapes). Formula tab The Formula tab allows working easily with all functions. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can:· insert functions using the Insert Function dialog window, · quickly access Autosum formulas, · access 10 recently used formulas, · work with formulas classified into categories, · work with named ranges, · use the calculation options: calculate the entire workbook, or the current worksheet only. Data tab The Data tab allows to managing data in a sheet. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can: · sort and filter data, · convert text to columns, · remove duplicates from a data range, · group and ungroup data, · set data validation parameters. Pivot Table tab The Pivot Table tab allows creating and editing pivot tables. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor:Using this tab, you can: · create a new pivot table, · choose the necessary layout for your pivot table, · update the pivot table if you change the data in your source data set, · select an entire pivot table with a single click, · highlight certain rows/columns by applying a specific formatting style to them, · choose one of the predefined tables styles. Collaboration tab The Collaboration tab allows working collaboratively on a spreadsheet. In the online version, you can share the file, select the required co-editing mode and manage comments. In the commenting mode, you can add and remove comments and communicate via chat. In the desktop version, you can only manage comments. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can: · adjust the sharing settings (available in the online version only), · switch between the Strict and Fast co-editing modes (available in the online version only), · add or remove comments left in the spreadsheet, · open the Chat panel (available in the online version only). View tab The View tab allows you to manage sheet view presets based on applied filters.The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can: · manage sheet view presets, · adjust zoom value, · freeze panes, · manage the display of formula bars, headings, and gridlines. Plugins tab The Plugins tab allows accessing the advanced editing features using the available third-party components. With this tab, you can also use macros to simplify routine operations. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: The Settings button allows you to open the window where you can view and manage all the installed plugins and add your own ones. TheMacros button allows you to open the window where you can create and run your own macros. Currently, the following plugins are available: · Send allows to send the spreadsheet via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only), · Highlight code allows to highlight syntax of the code selecting the necessary language, style, background color,· Photo Editor allows to edit images: crop, flip, rotate them, draw lines and shapes, add icons and text, load a mask and apply filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc., · Thesaurus allows to search for synonyms and antonyms of a word and replace it with the selected one, · Translator allows to translate the selected text into other languages, Note: this plugin doesn''t work in Internet Explorer. · YouTube allows to embed YouTube videos into your spreadsheet. To learn more about plugins please refer to our API Documentation. All the existing open- source plugin examples are currently available on GitHub. Basic operations Create a new spreadsheet or open an existing one To create a new spreadsheet In the online editor 1. click the File tab on the top toolbar, 2. select the Create New option. In the desktop editor 1. in the main program window, select the Spreadsheetmenu item from the Create new section of the left sidebar - a new file will open in a new tab, 2. when all the necessary changes are made, click the Save icon in the upper left corner or switch to the File tab and choose the Save asmenu item. 3. in the file manager window, select the location of the file, specify its name, choose the required format (XLSX, Spreadsheet template (XLTX), ODS, OTS, CSV, PDF or PDFA) and click the Save button. To open an existing document In the desktop editor 1. in the main program window, select the Open local filemenu item on the left sidebar, 2. choose the necessary spreadsheet from the file manager window and click the Open button. You can also right-click the necessary spreadsheet in the file manager window, select the Open with option and choose the required application from the menu. If documents are associated with the required application, you can also open spreadsheets by double-clicking the file name in the file explorer window.All the directories that you have accessed using the desktop editor will be displayed in the Recent folders list so that you can quickly access them afterwards. Click the necessary folder to select one of the files stored in it. To open a recently edited spreadsheet In the online editor 1. click the File tab on the top toolbar, 2. select the Open Recent... option, 3. choose the required spreadsheet from the list of recently edited documents. In the desktop editor 1. in the main program window, select the Recent filesmenu item on the left sidebar, 2. choose the required spreadsheet from the list of recently edited documents. To open the folder, where the file is stored , in a new browser tab in the online version or in the file explorer window in the desktop version, click the Open file location icon on the right side of the editor header. Alternatively, you can switch to the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Open file location option. Cut/copy/paste data Use basic clipboard operations To cut, copy and paste data in the current spreadsheet make use of the right-click menu or use the corresponding icons available on any tab of the top toolbar, · Cut - select data and use the Cut option from the right-click menu to delete the selected data and send them to the computer clipboard memory. The cut data can be later inserted to another place in the same spreadsheet. · Copy - select data and either use the Copy icon at the top toolbar or right-click and select the Copy option from the menu to send the selected data to the computer clipboard memory. The copied data can be later inserted to another place in the same spreadsheet. · Paste - select a place and either use the Paste icon on the top toolbar or right-click and select the Paste option to insert the previously copied/cut data from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The data can be previously copied from the same spreadsheet. In the online version, the following key combinations are only used to copy or paste data from/into another spreadsheet or some other program, in the desktop version, both the corresponding buttons/menu options and key combinations can be used for any copy/paste operations:· Ctrl+X key combination for cutting; · Ctrl+C key combination for copying; · Ctrl+V key combination for pasting. Note: instead of cutting and pasting data within the same worksheet you can select the required cell/cell range, hover the mouse cursor over the selection border so that it turns into the Arrow icon and drag and drop the selection to the necessary position. To enable / disable the automatic appearance of the Paste Special button after pasting, go to the File tab > Advanced Settings... and check / uncheck the Cut, copy and paste checkbox. Use the Paste Special feature Once the copied data is pasted, the Paste Special button appears next to the lower right corner of the inserted cell/cell range. Click this button to select the necessary paste option. When pasting a cell/cell range with formatted data, the following options are available: · Paste - allows you to paste all the cell contents including data formatting. This option is selected by default. · The following options can be used if the copied data contains formulas: o Paste only formula - allows you to paste formulas without pasting the data formatting. o Formula + number format - allows you to paste formulas with the formatting applied to numbers. o Formula + all formatting - allows you to paste formulas with all the data formatting. o Formula without borders - allows you to paste formulas with all the data formatting except the cell borders. o Formula + column width - allows you to paste formulas with all the data formatting and set the source column`s width for the cell range. o Transpose - allows you to paste data switching them from columns to rows, or vice versa. This option is available for regular data ranges, but not for formatted tables. · The following options allow you to paste the result that the copied formula returns without pasting the formula itself: o Paste only value - allows you to paste the formula results without pasting the data formatting. o Value + number format - allows to paste the formula results with the formatting applied to numbers. o Value + all formatting - allows you to paste the formula results with all the data formatting. · Paste only formatting - allows you to paste the cell formatting only without pasting the cell contents.1. Paste o Formulas - allows you to paste formulas without pasting the data formatting. o Values - allows you to paste the formula results without pasting the data formatting. o Formats - allows you to apply the formatting of the copied area. o Comments - allows you to add comments of the copied area. o Column widths - allows you to set certal column widths of the copied area. o All except borders - allows you to paste formulas, formula results with all its formatting except borders. o Formulas & formatting - allows you to paste formulas and apply formatting on them from the copied area. o Formulas & column widths - allows you to paste formulas and set certaln column widths of the copied area. o Formulas & number formulas - allows you to paste formulas and number formulas. o Values & number formats - allows you to paste formula results and apply the numbers formatting of the copied area. o Values & formatting - allows you to paste formula results and apply the formatting of the copied area. 2. Operation o Add - allows you to automatically add numeric values in each inserted cell. o Subtract - allows you to automatically subtract numeric values in each inserted cell.o Multiply - allows you to automatically multiply numeric values in each inserted cell. o Divide - allows you to automatically divide numeric values in each inserted cell. 3. Transpose - allows you to paste data switching them from columns to rows, or vice versa. 4. Skip blanks - allows you to skip pasting empty cells and their formatting. When pasting the contents of a single cell or some text within autoshapes, the following options are available: · Source formatting - allows you to keep the source formatting of the copied data. · Destination formatting - allows you to apply the formatting that is already used for the cell/autoshape where the data are to be iserted to. Paste delimited text When pasting the delimited text copied from a .txt file, the following options are available: The delimited text can contain several records, and each record corresponds to a single table row. Each record can contain several text values separated with a delimiter (such as a comma, semicolon, colon, tab, space or other characters). The file should be saved as a plain text .txt file. · Keep text only - allows you to paste text values into a single column where each cell contents corresponds to a row in the source text file. · Use text import wizard - allows you to open the Text Import Wizard which helps to easily split the text values into multiple columns where each text value separated by a delimiter will be placed into a separate cell.· When the Text Import Wizard window opens, select the text delimiter used in the delimited data from the Delimiter drop-down list. The data splitted into columns will be displayed in the Preview field below. If you are satisfied with the result, press the OK button. If you pasted delimited data from a source that is not a plain text file (e.g. text copied from a web page etc.), or if you applied the Keep text only feature and now want to split the data from a single column into several columns, you can use the Text to Columns option. To split data into multiple columns: 1. Select the necessary cell or column that contains data with delimiters. 2. Switch to the Data tab. 3. Click the Text to columns button on the top toolbar. The Text to Columns Wizard opens. 4. In the Delimiter drop-down list, select the delimiter used in the delimited data. 5. Click the Advanced button to open the Advanced Settings window in which you can specify the Decimal and Thousands separators.6. Preview the result in the field below and click OK. After that, each text value separated by the delimiter will be located in a separate cell. If there is some data in the cells to the right of the column you want to split, the data will be overwritten. Use the Auto Fill option To quickly fill multiple cells with the same data use the Auto Fill option: 1. select a cell/cell range containing the required data, 2. move the mouse cursor over the fill handle in the right lower corner of the cell. The cursor will turn into the black cross: 3. drag the handle over the adjacent cells to fill them with the selected data. Note: if you need to create a series of numbers (such as 1, 2, 3, 4...; 2, 4, 6, 8... etc.) or dates, you can enter at least two starting values and quickly extend the series selecting these cells and dragging the fill handle. Fill cells in the column with text values If a column in your spreadsheet contains some text values, you can easily replace any value within this column or fill the next blank cell selecting one of already existing text values. Right-click the necessary cell and choose the Select from drop-down list option in the contextual menu.Select one of the available text values to replace the current one or fill an empty cell. Undo/redo your actions To perform the undo/redo operations, use the corresponding icons on the left side of the editor header: · Undo – use the Undo icon to undo the last operation you performed. · Redo – use the Redo icon to redo the last undone operation. The undo/redo operations can be also performed using the Keyboard Shortcuts. Note: when you co-edit a spreadsheet in the Fastmode, the possibility to Undo/Redo the last operation is not available. Operations with sheets Manage sheets By default, a newly created spreadsheet has a single sheet. The simplest way to add a new one is to click the Plus button located to the right of the Sheet Navigation buttons in the left lower corner. Another way to add a new sheet is to: 1. right-click the sheet tab after which you wish to insert a new one, 2. select the Insert option from the right-click menu. A new sheet will be inserted after the selected one. To activate the required sheet, use the sheet tabs in the left lower corner of each spreadsheet. Note: if you have a lot of sheets, you can find the necessary one by using the Sheet Navigation buttons situated in the left lower corner.To delete an unnecessary sheet: 1. right-click the sheet tab you wish to delete, 2. select the Delete option from the right-click menu. The selected sheet will be deleted from the current spreadsheet. To rename an existing sheet: 1. right-click the sheet tab you wish to rename, 2. select the Rename option from the right-click menu, 3. enter the Sheet Name in the dialog box and click OK. The selected sheet name will be changed. To copy an existing sheet: 1. right-click the sheet tab you wish to copy, 2. select the Copy option from the right-click menu, 3. select the sheet before which you wish to insert the copied one or use the Copy to end option to insert the copied sheet after all the existing ones, 4. click the OK button to confirm your choice. The selected sheet will be copied and inserted in the selected place. To move an existing sheet: 1. right-click the sheet tab you wish to move, 2. select theMove option from the right-click menu, 3. select the sheet before which you wish to insert the selected one or use the Move to end option to move the selected sheet after all the existing ones, 4. click the OK button to confirm your choice. Or simply drag the necessary sheet tab and drop it to a new location. The selected sheet will be moved. You can also manualy drag''n''drop a sheet tab from one spreadsheet to another. In this case, the sheet from the original spreadsheet will be deleted. If you have a lot of sheets, you can hide some of them you don''t need to facilitate your work. To do that, 1. right-click the sheet tab you wish to hide, 2. select the Hide option from the right-click menu, To display the hidden sheet tab, right-click any sheet tab, open the Hidden list and select the sheet tab you wish to display. To differentiate the sheets, you can assign different colors to the sheet tabs. To do that, 1. right-click the sheet tab you wish to color,2. select the Tab Color option from the right-click menu, 3. select any color in the available palettes · Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. · Standard Colors - the default colors set. · Custom Color - click this caption if there is no needed color in the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set the specific color by dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also specify a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the necessary numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color will appear in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box, so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is specified, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected tab and added to the Custom color palette.You can work with multiple sheets simultaneously: 1. select the first sheet you want to include into the group, 2. press and hold the Shift key to select several adjacent sheets you want to group, or use the Ctrl key to select several non-adjacent sheets you want to group, 3. right-click one of the selected sheets tab to open the contextual menu, 4. choose the necessary option from the menu: · Insert - to insert the same number of new blank sheets, as in the selected group, · Delete - to delete all the selected sheets at once (you cannot delete all sheets in the workbook, as the workbook must contain at least one visible sheet), · Rename - this option can be applied to each separate sheet only, · Copy - to create copies of all the selected sheets at once and paste them to the selected place, · Move - to move all the selected sheets at once and paste them to the selected place, · Hide - to hide all the selected sheets at once (you cannot hide all sheets in the workbook, as the workbook must contain at least one visible sheet), · Tab color - to assign the same color to all the selected sheet tabs at once, · Select All Sheets - to select all the sheets in the current workbook, · Ungroup Sheets - to ungroup the selected sheets. it''s also possible to ungroup sheets by double-clicking on a sheet which is included into the group, or by clicking any sheet which is not included into the group. Insert headers and footers Headers and footers allow adding some additional information to a printed worksheet, such as date and time, page number, sheet name, etc. Headers and footers are displayed in the printed version of a spreadsheet.To insert a header or footer in a worksheet: 1. switch to the Insert or Layout tab, 2. click the Edit Header/Footer button on the top toolbar, 3. the Header/Footer Settings window will open, and you will be able to adjust the following settings: o check the Different first page box to apply a different header or footer to the very first page or in case you don''t want to add any header/ footer to it at all. The First page tab will appear below. o check the Different odd and even page box to add different headers/footer for odd and even pages. The Odd page and Even page tabs will appear below. o the Scale with document option allows scaling the header and footer together with the worksheet. This parameter is enabled by default. o the Align with page margins option allows aligning the left header/footer to the left margin and the right header/footer to the right margin. This option is enabled by default. 4. insert the necessary data. Depending on the selected options, you can adjust settings for All pages or set up the header/footer for the first page as well as for odd and even pages individually. Switch to the necessary tab and adjust the available parameters. Youcan use one of the ready-made presets or insert the necessary data to the left, center and right header/footer field manually: o choose one of the available presets from the Presets list: Page 1; Page 1 of ?; Sheet1; Confidential, dd/mm/yyyy, Page 1; Spreadsheet name.xlsx; Sheet1, Page 1; Sheet1, Confidential, Page 1; Spreadsheet name.xlsx, Page 1; Page 1, Sheet1; Page 1, Spreadsheet name.xlsx; Author, Page 1, dd/mm/yyyy; Prepared by Author dd/mm/yyyy, Page 1. The corresponding variables will be added. o place the cursor into the left, center, or right field of the header/footer and use the Insert list to add Page number, Page count, Date, Time, File name, Sheet name. 5. format the text inserted into the header/footer using the corresponding controls. You can change the default font, its size, color, apply font styles, such as bold, italic, underlined, strikethrough, use subscript or superscript characters. 6. when you finish, click the OK button to apply the changes. To edit the added headers and footers, click the Edit Header/Footer button on the top toolbar, make the necessary changes in the Header/Footer Settings window, and click OK to save the changes. The added header and/or footer will be displayed in the printed version of the spreadsheet. Cell text formatting Set font type, size, style, and colors You can select the font type and its size, apply one of the decoration styles and change the font and background colors by clicking the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: if you want to apply formatting to the data in the spreadsheet, select them with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the required formatting. If you need to apply the formatting to multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. Used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available fonts. If the Font required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available for use in the desktop version. Used to select the preset font size values from the dropdown list (the Font size default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It''s also possible to manually enter a custom value up to 409 pt in the font size field. Press Enter to confirm. Increme Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the icon nt font is clicked.size Decreme nt font Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the icon size is clicked. Bold Used to make the font bold making it heavier. Italic Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right. Underlin e Used to make the text underlined with a line going below the letters. Strikeout Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Allows choosing the Superscript or Subscript option. Subscript The Superscript option is used to make the text smaller and place it to the /Supersc upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. The Subscript option is used ript to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Font color Used to change the color of the letters/characters in cells. Backgro Used to change the color of the cell background. Using this icon you can und apply a solid color fill. The cell background color can also be changed using color the Fill section on the Cell settings tab of the right sidebar. Used to change the default color palette for worksheet elements (font, Change backgrounfdf, cehats aynsdccahart elements) selecting from the available color scheme Fooputionndsr:yO,Meicdi,aGnra,Metrole,,MAopdeuxl,eAs , y ban , Opdeuclte,nCtiv, OicriCeoln, Ocroiugrinse, E, Paqpueirt, S,oFllsotwic,e , Technic, Trek, Ur , or Verve. Note: it''s also possible to apply one of the formatting presets selecting the cell you wish to format and choosing the desired preset from the list on the Home tab of the top toolbar: To change the font color or use a solid color fill as the cell background, 1. select characters/cells with the mouse or the whole worksheet using the Ctrl+A key combination, 2. click the corresponding icon on the top toolbar, 3. select any color in the available palettes· Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. · Standard Colors - the default colors set. · Custom Color - click this caption if there is no needed color in the available palettes. Select the necessary color range by moving the vertical color slider and set the specific color by dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also specify a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the necessary numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color will appear in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is specified, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected text/cell and added to the Custom color palette. To remove the background color from a certain cell,1. select a cell, or a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet using the Ctrl+A key combination, 2. click the Background color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, 3. select the icon. Add hyperlinks To add a hyperlink, 1. select a cell where a hyperlink should be added, 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. click the Hyperlink icon on the top toolbar, 4. the Hyperlink Settings window will appear, and you will be able to specify the hyperlink settings: · Select the required link type: Use the External Link option and enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com in the Link to field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website. Use the Internal Data Range option, select a worksheet and a cell range in the fields below, or a previously added Named range if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain cell range in the same spreadsheet. You can also generate an external link which will lead to a particular cell or a range of cells by clicking the Get Link button.· Display - enter a text that will become clickable and lead to the web address specified in the upper field. Note: if the selected cell already contains data, it will be automatically displayed in this field. · ScreenTip Text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window with a brief note or label connected to the hyperlink. 5. click the OK button. To add a hyperlink, you can also use the Ctrl+K key combination or click with the right mouse button the position where the hyperlink should be added and select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu. When you hover the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear. To follow the link, click the link in the spreadsheet. To select a cell that contains a link without opening the link, click and hold the mouse button. To delete the added hyperlink, activate the cell containing the added hyperlink and press the Delete key, or right-click the cell and select the Clear All option from the drop-down list. Clear text, format in a cell, copy cell format Clear format You can quickly remove the text or format from the selected cell. To do that,1. select a cell, a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, Note: you can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. 2. click the Clear icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select one of the available options: o use the All option if you wish to remove everything including the text, format, function etc; o use the Text option if you wish to remove the text from the selected range of cell range; o use the Format option if you wish to remove the format of the selected cell range. The text and all functions will remain; o use the Comments option if you wish to remove comments from the selected cell range; o use the Hyperlinks option if you wish to remove hyperlinks from the selected cell range. Note: all these options are also available in the right-click menu. Copy cell format You can quickly copy the format of a certain cell and apply it to other cells. To apply the copied format to a single cell or several adjacent cells, 1. select the cell/cell range with the required format by clicking or using the keyboard, 2. click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, (the mouse pointer will look like this ), 3. select the cell/cell range to apply the required format to. To apply the copied format to multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges, 1. select the cell/cell range with the required format by clicking or using the keyboard, 2. double-click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, (the mouse pointer will look like this and the Copy style icon will remain selected: ), 3. click the required cells or select the cell ranges one by one to apply the same format to all of them, 4. to exit this mode, click the Copy style icon once again or press the Esc key on the keyboard.Editing cell properties Add cell background and borders Add a cell background To apply and format a cell background, 1. select a cell or a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, Note: you can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. 2. to apply a solid color fill to the cell background, click the Background color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and choose the required color. 3. to use other fill types, such as a gradient fill or pattern, click the Cell settings icon on the right sidebar and use the Fill section: · Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to fill the selected cells with. Click the colored box below and select one of the following palettes: o Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. o Standard Colors - a set of default colors. The selected color scheme does not affect them. o Custom Color - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the required colors range moving the vertical colorslider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Custom color palette. · Gradient Fill - fill the selected cells with two colors which smoothly change from one to the other. · Angle - manually specify an exact value in degrees that defines the gradient direction (colors change in a straight line at the specified angle). · Direction - choose a predefined template from the menu. The following directions are available: top-left to bottom-right (45°), top to bottom (90°), top-right to bottom-left(135°), right to left (180°), bottom-right to top-left (225°), bottom to top (270°), bottom- left to top-right (315°), left to right (0°). · Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. o Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. o Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. o To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. · Pattern - select this option to fill the selected cells with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. o Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. o Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. o Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. · No Fill - select this option if you don''t want to use any fill. Add cell borders To add and format borders to a worksheet, 1. select a cell, a range of cells with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, Note: you can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. 2. click the Borders icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar or click the Cell settings icon on the right sidebar and use the Borders Style section,3. select the border style you wish to apply: 1. open the Border Style submenu and select one of the available options, 2. open the Border Color icon submenu or use the Color palette on the right sidebar and select the required color from the palette, 3. select one of the available border templates: Outside Borders , All Borders , Top Borders , Bottom Borders , Left Borders , Right Borders , No Borders , Inside Borders , Inside Vertical Borders , Inside Horizontal Borders , Diagonal Up Border , Diagonal Down Border . Align data in cells You can align data horizontally and vertically or even rotate data within a cell. To do that, select a cell or a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination. You can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. Then perform one of the following operations using the icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. · Apply one of the horizontal alignment styles to the data within a cell, o click the Align left icon to align the data to the left side of the cell (the right side remains unaligned); o click the Align center icon to align the data in the center of the cell (the right and the left sides remains unaligned); o click the Align right icon to align the data to the right side of the cell (the left side remains unaligned);o click the Justified icon to align the data both to the left and the right sides of the cell (additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment). · Change the vertical alignment of the data within a cell, o click the Align top icon to align your data to the top of the cell; o click the Align middle icon to align your data to the middle of the cell; o click the Align bottom icon to align your data to the bottom of the cell. · Change the angle of the data within a cell by clicking the Orientation icon and choosing one of the following options: o use the Horizontal Text option to place the text horizontally (default option), o use the Angle Counterclockwise option to place the text from the bottom left corner to the top right corner of a cell, o use the Angle Clockwise option to place the text from the top left corner to the bottom right corner of a cell, o use the Vertical text option to place the text vertically, o use the Rotate Text Up option to place the text from bottom to top of a cell, o use the Rotate Text Down option to place the text from top to bottom of a cell. o To rotate the text by an exactly specified angle, click the Cell settings icon on the right sidebar and use the Orientation. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the Angle field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. · Fit your data to the column width by clicking the Wrap text icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar or by checking theWrap text checkbox on the right sidebar. Note: if you change the column width, data wrapping adjusts automatically. · Fit your data to the cell width by checking the Shrink to fit on the Layout tab of the top toolbar. The contents of the cell will be reduced in size to such an extent that it can fit in it. Merge cells You can merge two or more adjacent cells into one cell. To do that, 1. select two cells or a cell range with the mouse, Note: the selected cellsMUST be adjacent. 2. click theMerge icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select one of the available options: Note: only the data in the upper-left cell of the selected range will remain in the merged cell. Data in other cells of the selected range will be deleted. · if you select theMerge & Center option the cells of the selected range will be merged, and the data in the merged cell will be centered;· if you select theMerge Across option the cells of each row of the selected range will be merged, and the data in the merged cells will be aligned to the left side (for text) or to the right side (for numeric values); · if you select theMerge Cells option the cells of the selected range will be merged and the data will be aligned to the left side (for text) or to the right side (for numeric values). To split the previously merged cell, use the Unmerge Cells option from theMerge drop-down list. The data of the merged cell will be displayed in the upper left cell. Change number format Apply a number format You can easily change the number format, i.e. the way the numbers appear in a spreadsheet. To do that, 1. select a cell, a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, Note: you can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. 2. drop-down the Number format button list situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selected cells and use the Number Format option from the contextual menu. Select the number format you wish to apply: · General - is used to display the data as plain numbers in the most compact way without any additional signs, · Number - is used to display the numbers with 0-30 digits after the decimal point where a thousand separator is added between each group of three digits before the decimal point, · Scientific (exponential) - is used to keep short the numbers converting in a string of type d.dddE+ddd or d.dddE-ddd where each d is a digit 0 to 9, · Accounting - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the instructions below. Unlike the Currency format, the Accounting format aligns currency symbols to the left side of the cell, represents zero values as dashes and displays negative values in parentheses. Note: to quickly apply the Accounting format to the selected data, you can also click the Accounting style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select one of thefollowing currency symbols: $ Dollar, € Euro, £ Pound, ₽ Rouble, ¥ Yen, kn Croatian Kuna. · Currency - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the instructions below. Unlike the Accounting format, the Currency format places a currency symbol directly before the first digit and displays negative values with the negative sign (-). · Date - is used to display dates, · Time - is used to display time, · Percentage - is used to display the data as a percentage accompanied by a percent sign%, Note: to quickly apply the percent style to the data, you can also use the Percent style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. · Fraction - is used to display the numbers as common fractions rather than decimals. · Text - is used to display the numeric values as a plain text with as much precision as possible. · More formats - is used to create a custom number format or to customize the already applied number formats specifying additional parameters (see the description below). · Custom - is used to create a custom format: o select a cell, a range of cells, or the whole worksheet for values you want to format, o choose the Custom option from theMore formatsmenu, o enter the required codes and check the result in the preview area or choose one of the templates and/or combine them. If you want to create a format based on the existing one, first apply the existing format and then edit the codes to your preference, o click OK. 3. change the number of decimal places if needed: · use the Increase decimal icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display more digits after the decimal point, · use the Decrease decimal icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display fewer digits after the decimal point. Customize the number format You can customize the applied number format in the following way: 1. select the cells whose number format you want to customize, 2. drop-down the Number format button list on the Home tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selected cells and use the Number Format option from the contextual menu, 3. select theMore formats option,4. in the opened Number Format window, adjust the available parameters. The options differ depending on the number format that is applied to the selected cells. You can use the Category list to change the number format. · for the Number format, you can set the number of Decimal points, specify if you want to Use 1000 separator or not and choose one of the available Formats for displaying negative values. · for the Scientific and Percentage formats, you can set the number of Decimal points. · for the Accounting and Currency formats, you can set the number of Decimal points, choose one of the available currency Symbols and one of the available Formats for displaying negative values. · for the Date format, you can select one of the available date formats: 4/15, 4/15/06, 04/15/06, 4/15/2006, 4/15/06 0:00, 4/15/06 12:00 AM, A, April 15 2006, 15-Apr, 15-Apr-06, Apr-06, April-06, A-06, 06-Apr, 15-Apr-2006, 2006-Apr-15, 06-Apr- 15, 15/Apr, 15/Apr/06, Apr/06, April/06, A/06, 06/Apr, 15/Apr/2006, 2006/Apr/15, 06/Apr/15, 1 5 Apr, 15 Apr 06, Apr 06, April 06, A 06, 06 Apr, 15 Apr 2006, 2006 Apr 15, 06 Apr 15, 06/4/15, 06/04/15, 2006/4/15. · for the Time format, you can select one of the available time formats: 12:48:58 PM, 12:48, 12:48 PM, 12:48:58, 48:57.6, 36:48:58. · for the Fraction format, you can select one of the available formats: Up to one digit (1/3), Up to two digits (12/25), Up to three digits (131/135), As halves (1/2), As fourths (2/4), As eighths (4/8), As sixteenths (8/16), As tenths (5/10) , As hundredths (50/100). 5. click the OK button to apply the changes.Edit rows/columns Manage cells, rows, and columns You can insert blank cells above or on the left of the selected cell in a worksheet. You can also insert an entire row above the selected one or a column on the left of the selected column. To make it easy to view a large amount of information, you can hide some rows or columns and display them again. It''s also possible to specify the height of a certain row and width of a column. Insert cells, rows, columns To insert a blank cell to the left of the selected cell: 1. right-click the cell to the left of which you wish to insert a new one, 2. click the Insert cells icon situated at the Home tab of the top toolbar or select the Insert item from the right-click menu and use the Shift Cells Right option. The program will shift the selected cell to the right to insert a blank one. To insert a blank cell above the selected cell: 1. right-click the cell above which you wish to insert a new one, 2. click the Insert cells icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar or select the Insert item from the right-click menu and use the Shift Cells Down option. The program will shift the selected cell down to insert a blank one. To insert an entire row: 1. select either the whole row by clicking its heading or a cell in the row above which you wish to insert a new one, Note: to insert multiple rows, select the required number of rows. 2. click the Insert cells icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar and use the Entire row option, or right-click the selected cell, select the Insert item from the right-click menu, then choose the Entire Row option, or right-click the selected row(s) and use the Insert Top option from the right-click menu. The program will shift the selected row down to insert a blank one. To insert an entire column: 1. select either the whole column by clicking its heading or a cell in the column to the left of which you wish to insert a new one, Note: to insert multiple columns, select the required number of columns.2. click the Insert cells icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar and use the Entire column option, or right-click the selected cell, select the Insert item from the right-click menu, then choose the Entire Column option, or right-click the selected column(s) and use the Insert Left option from the right-click menu. The program will shift the selected column to the right to insert a blank one. You can also use the Ctrl+Shift+= keyboard shortcut to open the dialog box for inserting new cells, select the Shift Cells Right, Shift Cells Down, Entire Row, or Entire Column option and click OK. Hide and show rows and columns To hide a row or column: 1. select rows or columns you wish to hide, 2. right-click the selected rows or columns and use the Hide option from the right-click menu. To display the hidden rows or columns, select the visible rows above and below the hidden rows or visible columns to the left and to the right of the hidden columns, right-click them and use the Show option from the right-click menu. Change column width and row height The column width determines how many characters with default formatting can be displayed in the column cell. The default value is set to 8.43 symbols. To change it: 1. select columns you wish to change, 2. right-click the selected columns and use the Set Column Width option from the right- click menu, 3. choose one of the available options: o select the Auto Fit Column Width option to automatically adjust the width of each column according to its content, oro select the Custom Column Width option and specify a new value from 0 to 255 in the Custom Column Width window, then click OK. To change the width of a single column manually, move the mouse cursor over the right border of the column heading so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow . Drag the border to the left or right to set a custom width or double-click the mouse to automatically change the column width according to its content. The default row height value is 14.25 points. To change it: 1. select rows you wish to change, 2. right-click the selected rows and use the Set Row Height option from the right-click menu, 3. choose one of the available options: o select the Auto Fit Row Height option to automatically adjust the height of each row according to its content, or o select the Custom Row Height option and specify a new value from 0 to 408.75 in the Custom Row Height window, then click OK. To change the height of a single row manually, drag the bottom border of the row heading. Delete cells, rows, columns To delete an unnecessary cell, row, or column: 1. select cells, rows, or columns you wish to delete, 2. click the Delete cells icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar or select the Delete item from the right-click menu and select the appropriate option: if you use the Shift Cells Left option, a cell to the right of the deleted one will be moved to the left;if you use the Shift Cells Up option, a cell below the deleted one will be moved up; if you use the Entire Row option, a row below the selected one will be moved up; if you use the Entire Column option, a column to the right of the deleted one will be moved to the left; You can also use the Ctrl+Shift+- keyboard shortcut to open the dialog box for deleting cells, select the Shift Cells Left, Shift Cells Up, Entire Row, or Entire Column option and click OK. You can always restore the deleted data using the Undo icon on the top toolbar. Sort and filter data Sort Data You can quickly sort the data in a spreadsheet using one of the following options: · Ascending is used to sort the data in ascending order - from A to Z alphabetically or from the smallest to the largest number for numerical data. · Descending is used to sort the data in descending order - from Z to A alphabetically or from the largest to the smallest for numerical data. Note: the Sort options are accessible from both Home and Data tab. To sort the data, 1. select a cell range you wish to sort (you can select a single cell in a range to sort the entire range), 2. click the Sort ascending icon situated on the Home or Data tab of the top toolbar to sort the data in ascending order, OR click the Sort descending icon situated on the Home or Data tab of the top toolbar to sort the data in descending order. Note: if you select a single column/row within a cell range or a part of the column/row, you will be asked if you want to expand the selection to include adjacent cells or sort the selected data only.You can also sort your data using the contextual menu options. Right-click the selected range of cells, select the Sort option from the menu and then select Ascending or Descending option from the submenu. It''s also possible to sort the data by color using the contextual menu: 1. right-click a cell containing the color by which you want to sort the data, 2. select the Sort option from the menu, 3. select the necessary option from the submenu: o Selected Cell Color on top - to display the entries with the same cell background color on the top of the column, o Selected Font Color on top - to display the entries with the same font color on the top of the column. Filter Data To display only the rows that meet certain criteria and hide other ones, make use of the Filter option. Note: the Filter options are accessible from both Home and Data tab. To enable a filter, 1. Select a cell range containing data to filter (you can select a single cell in a range to filter the entire range), 2. Click the Filter icon situated at the Home or Data tab of the top toolbar. 3. The drop-down arrow will appear in the first cell of each column of the selected cell range. It means that the filter is enabled. To apply a filter, 1. Click the drop-down arrow . The Filter option list will open:Note: you can adjust the size of the filter window by dragging its right border to the right or to the left to display the data as convenient as possible. 2. Adjust the filter parameters. You can proceed in one of the following ways: select the data to display, filter the data by certain criteria or filter data by color. · Select the data to display Uncheck the boxes near the data you need to hide. For your convenience, all the data within the Filter option list are sorted in ascending order. The number of unique values in the filtered range is displayed to the right of each value within the filter window. Note: the {Blanks} check box corresponds to the empty cells. It is available if the selected cell range contains at least one empty cell. To facilitate the process, make use of the search field on the top. Enter your query, entirely or partially, in the field - the values that include these characters will be displayed in the list below. The following two options will be also available: o Select All Search Results - is checked by default. It allows selecting all the values that correspond to your query in the list. o Add current selection to filter - if you check this box, the selected values will not be hidden when you apply the filter. After you select all the necessary data, click the OK button in the Filter option list to apply the filter. · Filter data by certain criteria Depending on the data in the selected column, you can choose either the Number filter or the Text filter option on the right side of the Filter options list, and then select one of the options from the submenu: o For the Number filter the following options are available: Equals..., Does not equal..., Greater than..., Greater than or equal to..., Less than..., Less than or equal to..., Between, Top 10, Above Average, Below Average, Custom Filter.... o For the Text filter the following options are available: Equals..., Does not equal..., Begins with..., Does not begin with..., Ends with..., Does not end with..., Contains..., Does not contain..., Custom Filter.... After you select one of the above options (apart from Top 10 and Above/Below Average), the Custom Filter window will open. The corresponding criterion will be selected in the upper drop-down list. Enter the necessary value in the field on the right. To add one more criterion, use the And radiobutton if you need the data to satisfy both criteria or click the Or radiobutton if either or both criteria can be satisfied. Then selectthe second criterion from the lower drop-down list and enter the necessary value on the right. Click OK to apply the filter. If you choose the Custom Filter... option from the Number/Text filter option list, the first criterion is not selected automatically, you can set it yourself. If you choose the Top 10 option from the Number filter option list, a new window will open: The first drop-down list allows choosing if you wish to display the highest (Top) or the lowest (Bottom) values. The second field allows specifying how many entries from the list or which percent of the overall entries number you want to display (you can enter a number from 1 to 500). The third drop-down list allows setting the units of measure: Item or Percent. Once the necessary parameters are set, click OK to apply the filter. If you choose the Above/Below Average option from the Number filter option list, the filter will be applied right now. · Filter data by color If the cell range you want to filter contains some cells you have formatted changing their background or font color (manually or using predefined styles), you can use one of the following options:o Filter by cells color - to display only the entries with a certain cell background color and hide other ones, o Filter by font color - to display only the entries with a certain cell font color and hide other ones. When you select the necessary option, a palette that contains colors used in the selected cell range will open. Choose one of the colors to apply the filter. The Filter button will appear in the first cell of the column. It means that the filter is applied. The number of filtered records will be displayed at the status bar (e.g. 25 of 80 records filtered). Note: when the filter is applied, the rows that are filtered out cannot be modified when autofilling, formatting, deleting the visible contents. Such actions affect the visible rows only, the rows that are hidden by the filter remain unchanged. When copying and pasting the filtered data, only visible rows can be copied and pasted. This is not equivalent to manually hidden rows which are affected by all similar actions. Sort filtered data You can set the sorting order of the data you have enabled or applied filter for. Click the drop- down arrow or the Filter button and select one of the options in the Filter option list: · Sort Lowest to Highest - allows sorting the data in ascending order, displaying the lowest value on the top of the column, · Sort Highest to Lowest - allows sorting the data in descending order, displaying the highest value on the top of the column, · Sort by cells color - allows selecting one of the colors and displaying the entries with the same cell background color on the top of the column, · Sort by font color - allows selecting one of the colors and displaying the entries with the same font color on the top of the column. The latter two options can be used if the cell range you want to sort contains some cells you have formatted changing their background or font color (manually or using predefined styles). The sorting direction will be indicated by an arrow in the filter buttons. · if the data is sorted in ascending order, the drop-down arrow in the first cell of the column looks like this: and the Filter button looks the following way: . · if the data is sorted in descending order, the drop-down arrow in the first cell of the column looks like this: and the Filter button looks the following way: . You can also quickly sort the data by color using the contextual menu options:1. right-click a cell containing the color by which you want to sort the data, 2. select the Sort option from the menu, 3. select the necessary option from the submenu: · Selected Cell Color on top - to display the entries with the same cell background color on the top of the column, · Selected Font Color on top - to display the entries with the same font color on the top of the column. Filter by the selected cell contents You can also quickly filter your data by the selected cell contents using the contextualmenu options. Right-click a cell, select the Filter option from the menu and then select one of the available options: · Filter by Selected cell''s value - to display only the entries with the same value as the selected cell contains. · Filter by cell''s color - to display only the entries with the same cell background color as the selected cell has. · Filter by font color - to display only the entries with the same cell font color as the selected cell has. Format as Table Template To facilitate your work with data, the Spreadsheet Editor allows you to apply a table template to a selected cell range automatically enabling the filter. To do that, 1. select a range of cells you need to format, 2. click the Format as table template icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. 3. select the required template in the gallery, 4. in the opened pop-up window check the cell range to be formatted as a table, 5. check the Title if you wish the table headers to be included in the selected cell range, otherwise the header row will be added at the top while the selected cell range will be moved one row down, 6. click the OK button to apply the selected template. The template will be applied to the selected range of cells and you will be able to edit the table headers and apply the filter to work with your data. Reapply Filter If the filtered data has been changed, you can refresh the filter to display an up-to-date result: 1. click the Filter button in the first cell of the column that contains the filtered data, 2. select the Reapply option in the opened Filter option list. You can also right-click a cell within the column that contains the filtered data and select the Reapply option from the contextual menu.Clear Filter To clear the filter, 1. click the Filter button in the first cell of the column that contains the filtered data, 2. select the Clear option in the opened Filter option list. You can also proceed in the following way: 1. select the range of cells containing the filtered data, 2. click the Clear filter icon situated on the Home or Data tab of the top toolbar. The filter will remain enabled, but all the applied filter parameters will be removed, and the Filter buttons in the first cells of the columns will change into the drop-down arrows . Remove Filter To remove the filter, 1. select the range of cells containing the filtered data, 2. click the Filter icon situated on the Home or Data tab of the top toolbar. The filter will be disabled, and the drop-down arrows will disappear from the first cells of the columns. Sort data by several columns/rows To sort data by several columns/rows you can create several sorting levels using the Custom Sort function. 1. select a cell range you wish to sort (you can select a single cell to sort the entire range), 2. click the Custom Sort icon situated on the Data tab of the top toolbar, 3. the Sort window will appear. Sorting by columns is selected by default.To change the sorting orientation (i.e. sorting data by rows instead of columns), click the Options button on the top. The Sort Options window will open: 1. check theMy data has headers box, if necessary, 2. choose the necessary Orientation: Sort top to bottom to sort data by columns or Sort left to right to sort data by rows, 3. click OK to apply the changes and close the window. 4. set the first sorting level in the Sort by field: · in the Column / Row section, select the first column / row you want to sort, · in the Sort on list choose one of the following options: Values, Cell color, or Font color, · in the Order list, specify the necessary sorting order. The available options differ depending on the option chosen in the Sort on list: · if the Values option is selected, choose the Ascending / Descending option if the cell range contains numbers or A to Z / Z to A option if the cell range contains text values, · if the Cell color option is selected, choose the necessary cell color and select the Top / Below option for columns or Left / Right option for rows, · if the Font color option is selected, choose the necessary font color and select the Top / Below option for columns or Left / Right option for rows.5. add the next sorting level by clicking the Add level button, select the second column / row you want to sort and specify other sorting parameters in the Then by field as described above. If necessary, add more levels in the same way. 6. manage the added levels using the buttons at the top of the window: Delete level, Copy level or change the level order by using the arrow buttonsMove the level up /Move the level down, 7. click OK to apply the changes and close the window. The data will be sorted according to the specified sorting levels. Use formatted tables Create a new formatted table To make it easier for you to work with data, the Spreadsheet Editor allows you to apply a table template to the selected cell range and automatically enable the filter. To do that, 1. select a range of cells you need to format, 2. click the Format as table template icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. 3. select the required template in the gallery, 4. in the opened pop-up window, check the cell range to be formatted as a table, 5. check the Title if you wish the table headers to be included in the selected cell range, otherwise, the header row will be added at the top while the selected cell range will be moved one row down, 6. click the OK button to apply the selected template. The template will be applied to the selected range of cells, and you will be able to edit the table headers and apply the filter to work with your data. It''s also possible to insert a formatted table using the Table button on the Insert tab. In this case, the default table template is applied. Note: once you create a new formatted table, the default name (Table1, Table2, etc.) will be automatically assigned to the table. You can change this name making it more meaningful and use it for further work. If you enter a new value in the cell below the last row of the table (if the table does not have the Total row) or in the cell to the right of the last column of the table, the formatted table will be automatically extended to include a new row or column. If you do not want to expand the table, click the Paste special button that will appear and select the Undo table autoexpansion option. Once you undo this action, the Redo table autoexpansion option will be available in this menu.Note: To enable/disable table auto-expansion, select the Stop automatically expanding tables option in the Paste special button menu or go to Advanced Settings -> Spell Checking -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> AutoFormat As You Type. Select rows and columns To select an entire row in the formatted table, move the mouse cursor over the left border of the table row until it turns into the black arrow , then left-click. To select an entire column in the formatted table, move the mouse cursor over the top edge of the column header until it turns into the black arrow , then left-click. If you click once, the column data will be selected (as it is shown on the image below); if you click twice, the entire column including the header will be selected. To select an entire formatted table, move the mouse cursor over the upper left corner of the formatted table until it turns into the diagonal black arrow , then left-click.Edit formatted tables Some of the table settings can be changed using the Table settings tab of the right sidebar that will open if you select at least one cell within the table with the mouse and click the Table settings icon on the right. The Rows and Columns sections on the top allow you to emphasize certain rows/columns applying specific formatting to them, or highlight different rows/columns with different background colors to clearly distinguish them. The following options are available: · Header - allows you to display the header row. · Total - adds the Summary row at the bottom of the table. Note: if this option is selected, you can also select a function to calculate the summary values. Once you select a cell in the Summary row, the button will be available to the right of the cell. Click it and choose the necessary function from the list: Average, Count, Max, Min, Sum, StdDev, or Var. The More functions option allows you toopen the Insert Function window and choose any other function. If you choose the None option, the currently selected cell in the Summary row will not display a summary value for this column. · Banded - enables the background color alternation for odd and even rows. · Filter button - allows you to display the drop-down arrows in each cell of the header row. This option is only available when the Header option is selected. · First - emphasizes the leftmost column in the table with special formatting. · Last - emphasizes the rightmost column in the table with special formatting. · Banded - enables the background color alternation for odd and even columns. The Select From Template section allows you to choose one of the predefined tables styles. Each template combines certain formatting parameters, such as a background color, border style, row/column banding, etc. Depending on the options checked in the Rows and/or Columns sections above, the templates set will be displayed differently. For example, if you''ve checked the Header option in the Rows section and the Banded option in the Columns section, the displayed templates list will include only templates with the header row and banded columns enabled: If you want to remove the current table style (background color, borders, etc.) without removing the table itself, apply the None template from the template list: The Resize table section allows you to change the cell range the table formatting is applied to. Click the Select Data button - a new pop-up window will open. Change the link to the cell rangein the entry field or select the necessary cell range in the worksheet with the mouse and click the OK button. Note: The headers must remain in the same row, and the resulting table range must overlap the original table range. The Rows & Columns section allows you to perform the following operations: · Select a row, column, all columns data excluding the header row, or the entire table including the header row. · Insert a new row above or below the selected one as well as a new column to the left or the right of the selected one. · Delete a row, column (depending on the cursor position or the selection), or the entire table. Note: the options of the Rows & Columns section are also accessible from the right-click menu. The Remove duplicates option can be used if you want to remove duplicate values from the formatted table. The Convert to range option can be used if you want to transform the table into a regular data range removing the filter but preserving the table style (i.e. cell and font colors, etc.). Once you apply this option, the Table settings tab on the right sidebar will be unavailable. The Insert slicer option is used to create a slicer for the formatted table. The Insert pivot table option is used to create a pivot table on the base of the formatted table. Adjust formatted table advanced settings To change the advanced table properties, use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The ''Table - Advanced Settings'' window will open:The Alternative Text tab allows you to specify the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the table contains. Note: To enable/disable table auto-expansion, go to Advanced Settings -> Spell Checking -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> AutoFormat As You Type. Create and edit pivot tables Pivot tables allow you to group and arrange data of large data sets to get summarized information. You can reorganize data in many different ways to display only the necessary information and focus on important aspects. Create a new pivot table To create a pivot table, 1. Prepare the source data set you want to use for creating a pivot table. It should include column headers. The data set should not contain empty rows or columns. 2. Select any cell within the source data range. 3. Switch to the Pivot Table tab of the top toolbar and click the Insert Table icon. If you want to create a pivot table on the base of a formatted table, you can also use the Insert pivot table option on the Table settings tab of the right sidebar. 4. The Create Pivot Table window will appear.· The Source data range is already specified. In this case, all data from the source data range will be used. If you want to change the data range (e.g. to include only a part of source data), click the icon. In the Select Data Range window, enter the necessary data range in the following format: Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. You can also select the necessary cell range on the sheet using the mouse. When ready, click OK. · Specify where you want to place the pivot table. o The New worksheet option is selected by default. It allows you to place the pivot table in a new worksheet. o You can also select the Existing worksheet option and choose a certain cell. In this case, the selected cell will be the upper right cell of the created pivot table. To select a cell, click the icon. In the Select Data Range window, enter the cell address in the following format: Sheet1!$G$2. You can also click the necessary cell in the sheet. When ready, click OK. · When you select the pivot table location, click OK in the Create Table window. An empty pivot table will be inserted in the selected location. The Pivot table settings tab on the right sidebar will be opened. You can hide or display this tab by clicking the icon.Select fields to display The Select Fields section contains the fields named according to the column headers in your source data set. Each field contains values from the corresponding column of the source table. The following four sections are available below: Filters, Columns, Rows, and Values. Check the fields you want to display in the pivot table. When you check a field, it will be added to one of the available sections on the right sidebar depending on the data type and will be displayed in the pivot table. Fields containing text values will be added to the Rows section; fields containing numeric values will be added to the Values section. You can simply drag fields to the necessary section as well as drag the fields between sections to quickly reorganize your pivot table. To remove a field from the current section, drag it out of this section.In order to add a field to the necessary section, it''s also possible to click the black arrow to the right of a field in the Select Fields section and choose the necessary option from the menu: Add to Filters, Add to Rows, Add to Columns, Add to Values. Below you can see some examples of using the Filters, Columns, Rows, and Values sections. · If you add a field to the Filters section, a separate filter will be added above the pivot table. It will be applied to the entire pivot table. If you click the drop-down arrow in the added filter, you''ll see the values from the selected field. When you uncheck some values in the filter option window and click OK, the unchecked values will not be displayed in the pivot table. · If you add a field to the Columns section, the pivot table will contain a number of columns equal to the number of values from the selected field. The Grand Total column will also be added.· If you add a field to the Rows section, the pivot table will contain a number of rows equal to the number of values from the selected field. The Grand Total row will also be added. · If you add a field to the Values section, the pivot table will display the summation value for all numeric values from the selected field. If the field contains text values, the count of values will be displayed. The function used to calculate the summation value can be changed in the field settings. Rearrange fields and adjust their properties Once the fields are added to the necessary sections, you can manage them to change the layout and format of the pivot table. Click the black arrow to the right of a field within the Filters, Columns, Rows, or Values sections to access the field context menu.It allows you to: · Move the selected field Up, Down, to the Beginning, or to the End of the current section if you have added more than one field to the current section. · Move the selected field to a different section - to Filters, Columns, Rows, or Values. The option that corresponds to the current section will be disabled. · Remove the selected field from the current section. · Adjust the selected field settings. The Filters, Columns, and Rows field settings look similarly:The Layout tab contains the following options: · The Source name option allows you to view the field name corresponding to the column header from the source data set. · The Custom name option allows you to change the name of the selected field displayed in the pivot table. · The Report Form section allows you to change the way the selected field is displayed in the pivot table: o Choose the necessary layout for the selected field in the pivot table: § The Tabular form displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers. § The Outline form displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers. It also allows you to display subtotals at the top of groups. § The Compact form displays items from different row section fields in a single column. o The Repeat items labels at each row option allows you to visually group rows or columns together if you have multiple fields in the tabular form. o The Insert blank rows after each item option allows you to add blank lines after items of the selected field. o The Show subtotals option allows you to choose if you want to display subtotals for the selected field. You can select one of the options: Show at top of group or Show at bottom of group.o The Show items with no data option allows you to show or hide blank items in the selected field. The Subtotals tab allows you to choose Functions for Subtotals. Check the necessary functions in the list: Sum, Count, Average, Max, Min, Product, Count Numbers, StdDev, StdDevp, Var, Varp. Values field settings · The Source name option allows you to view the field name corresponding to the column header from the source data set. · The Custom name option allows you to change the name of the selected field displayed in the pivot table.· The Summarize value field by list allows you to choose the function used to calculate the summation value for all values from this field. By default, Sum is used for numeric values, Count is used for text values. The available functions are Sum, Count, Average, Max, Min, Product, Count Numbers, StdDev, StdDevp, Var, Varp. Group and ungroup data Data in pivot tables can be grouped according to custom requirements. Grouping is available for dates and basic numbers. Grouping dates To group dates, create a pivot table incorporating a set of needed dates. Right click any cell in a pivot table with a date, choose the Group option in the pop-up menu, and set the needed parameters in the opened window. · Starting at - the first date in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed date in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the starting point. · Ending at - the last date in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed date in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the ending point. · By - the Seconds,Minutes, and Hours options group the data according to the time given in the source data. TheMonths option eliminates days and leaves months only. The Quarters option operates at a condition: four months constitute a quarter, thus providing Qtr1, Qtr2, etc. The Years option groups dates as per years given in the source data. Combine the options to achieve the needed result. · Number of days - set the required value to determine a date range. · Click OK when finished.Grouping numbers To group numbers, create a pivot table incorporating a set of needed numbers. Right click any cell in a pivot table with a number, choose the Group option in the pop-up menu, and set the needed parameters in the opened window. · Starting at - the smallest number in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed number in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the smallest number. · Ending at - the largest number in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed number in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the largest number. · By - set the required interval for grouping numbers. E.g., “2” will group the set of numbers from 1 through 10 as “1-2”, “3-4”, etc. · Click OK when finished. Ungrouping data To ungroup previously grouped data, 1. right-click any cell that is in the group, 2. select the Ungroup option in the context menu. Change the appearance of pivot tables You can use options available on the top toolbar to adjust the way your pivot table is displayed. These options are applied to the entire pivot table. Select at least one cell within the pivot table with the mouse to activate the editing tools on the top toolbar.· The Report Layout drop-down list allows you to choose the necessary layout for your pivot table: o Show in Compact Form - allows you to display items from different row section fields in a single column. o Show in Outline Form - allows you to display the pivot table in the classic pivot table style. It displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers. It also allows you to display subtotals at the top of groups. o Show in Tabular Form - allows you to display the pivot table in a traditional table format. It displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers.o Repeat All Item Labels - allows you to visually group rows or columns together if you have multiple fields in the tabular form. o Don''t Repeat All Item Labels - allows you to hide item labels if you have multiple fields in the tabular form. · The Blank Rows drop-down list allows you to choose if you want to display blank lines after items: o Insert Blank Line after Each Item - allows you to add blank lines after items. o Remove Blank Line after Each Item - allows you to remove the added blank lines. · The Subtotals drop-down list allows you to choose if you want to display subtotals in the pivot table: o Don''t Show Subtotals - allows you to hide subtotals for all items. o Show all Subtotals at Bottom of Group - allows you to display subtotals below the subtotaled rows. o Show all Subtotals at Top of Group - allows you to display subtotals above the subtotaled rows. · The Grand Totals drop-down list allows you to choose if you want to display grand totals in the pivot table: o Off for Rows and Columns - allows you to hide grand totals for both rows and columns. o On for Rows and Columns - allows you to display grand totals for both rows and columns. o On for Rows Only - allows you to display grand totals for rows only. o On for Columns Only - allows you to display grand totals for columns only. Note: the similar settings are also available in the pivot table advanced settings window in the Grand Totals section of the Name and Layout tab. The Select button allows you to select the entire pivot table. If you change the data in your source data set, select the pivot table and click the Refresh button to update the pivot table.Change the style of pivot tables You can change the appearance of pivot tables in a spreadsheet using the style editing tools available on the top toolbar. Select at least one cell within the pivot table with the mouse to activate the editing tools on the top toolbar. The rows and columns options allow you to emphasize certain rows/columns applying specific formatting to them, or highlight different rows/columns with different background colors to clearly distinguish them. The following options are available: · Row Headers - allows you to highlight the row headers with special formatting. · Column Headers - allows you to highlight the column headers with special formatting. · Banded Rows - enables the background color alternation for odd and even rows. · Banded Columns - enables the background color alternation for odd and even columns. The template list allows you to choose one of the predefined pivot table styles. Each template combines certain formatting parameters, such as a background color, border style, row/column banding, etc. Depending on the options checked for rows and columns, the templates set will be displayed differently. For example, if you''ve checked the Row Headers and Banded Columns options, the displayed templates list will include only templates with the row headers highlighted and banded columns enabled. Filter, sort and add slicers in pivot tables You can filter pivot tables by labels or values and use the additional sort parameters. Filtering Click the drop-down arrow in the Row Labels or Column Labels of the pivot table. The Filter option list will open:Adjust the filter parameters. You can proceed in one of the following ways: select the data to display or filter the data by certain criteria. · Select the data to display Uncheck the boxes near the data you need to hide. For your convenience, all the data within the Filter option list are sorted in ascending order. Note: the (blank) checkbox corresponds to the empty cells. It is available if the selected cell range contains at least one empty cell. To facilitate the process, make use of the search field on the top. Enter your query, entirely or partially, in the field - the values that include these characters will be displayed in the list below. The following two options will be also available: · Select All Search Results - is checked by default. It allows selecting all the values that correspond to your query in the list. · Add current selection to filter - if you check this box, the selected values will not be hidden when you apply the filter. After you select all the necessary data, click the OK button in the Filter option list to apply the filter. · Filter data by certain criteria You can choose either the Label filter or the Value filter option on the right side of the Filter options list, and then select one of the options from the submenu: o For the Label filter the following options are available: § For texts: Equals..., Does not equal..., Begins with..., Does not begin with..., Ends with..., Does not end with..., Contains..., Does not contain... § For numbers: Greater than..., Greater than or equal to..., Less than..., Less than or equal to..., Between, Not between.o For the Value filter the following options are available: Equals..., Does not equal..., Greater than..., Greater than or equal to..., Less than..., Less than or equal to..., Between, Not between, Top 10. After you select one of the above options (apart from Top 10), the Label/Value Filter window will open. The corresponding field and criterion will be selected in the first and second drop-down lists. Enter the necessary value in the field on the right. Click OK to apply the filter. If you choose the Top 10 option from the Value filter option list, a new window will open: The first drop-down list allows choosing if you wish to display the highest (Top) or the lowest (Bottom) values. The second field allows specifying how many entries from the list or which percent of the overall entries number you want to display (you can enter a number from 1 to 500). The third drop-down list allows setting the units of measure: Item, Percent, or Sum. The fourth drop-down list displays the selected field name. Once the necessary parameters are set, click OK to apply the filter. The Filter button will appear in the Row Labels or Column Labels of the pivot table. It means that the filter is applied. Sorting You can sort your pivot table data using the sort options. Click the drop-down arrow in the Row Labels or Column Labels of the pivot table and then select Sort Lowest to Highest or Sort Highest to Lowest option from the submenu.TheMore Sort Options option allows you to open the Sort window where you can select the necessary sorting order - Ascending or Descending - and then select a certain field you want to sort. Adding slicers You can add slicers to filter data easier by displaying only what is needed. Adjust pivot table advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the pivot table, use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The ''Pivot Table - Advanced Settings'' window will open: The Name and Layout tab allows you to change the pivot table common properties. · The Name option allows you to change the pivot table name.· The Grand Totals section allows you to choose if you want to display grand totals in the pivot table. The Show for rows and Show for columns options are checked by default. You can uncheck either one of them or both these options to hide the corresponding grand totals from your pivot table. Note: the similar settings are available on the top toolbar in the Grand Totalsmenu. · The Display fields in report filter area section allows you to adjust the report filters which appear when you add fields to the Filters section: o The Down, then over option is used for column arrangement. It allows you to show the report filters across the column. o The Over, then down option is used for row arrangement. It allows you to show the report filters across the row. o The Report filter fields per column option allows you to select the number of filters to go in each column. The default value is set to 0. You can set the necessary numeric value. · The Field Headers section allows you to choose if you want to display field headers in your pivot table. The Show field headers for rows and columns option is selected by default. Uncheck it to hide field headers from your pivot table. The Data Source tab allows you to change the data you wish to use to create the pivot table. Check the selected Data Range and modify it, if necessary. To do that, click the icon.In the Select Data Range window, enter the necessary data range in the following format: Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. You can also select the necessary cell range in the sheet using the mouse. When ready, click OK. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the pivot table contains. Delete a pivot table To delete a pivot table, 1. Select the entire pivot table using the Select button on the top toolbar. 2. Press the Delete key.Create slicers for tables Create a new slicer Once you create a new formatted table or a pivot table, you can create slicers to quickly filter the data. To do that, 1. select at least one cell within the table with the mouse and click the Table settings icon on the right. 2. click the Insert slicer option on the Table settings tab of the right sidebar. Alternatively, you can switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar and click the Slicer button. The Insert Slicers window will be opened: 3. check the required columns in the Insert Slicers window. 4. click the OK button. A slicer will be added for each of the selected columns. If you add several slicers, they will overlap each other. Once the slicer is added, you can change its size and position as well as its settings.A slicer contains buttons that you can click to filter the table. The buttons corresponding to empty cells are marked with the (blank) label. When you click a slicer button, other buttons will be unselected, and the corresponding column in the source table will be filtered to only display the selected item: If you have added several slicers, the changes made in one slicer can affect the items from another slicer. When one or more filters are applied to a slicer, items with no data can appear in a different slicer (with a lighter color):You can adjust the way to display items with no data in the slicer settings. To select multiple slicer buttons, use the Multi-Select icon in the upper right corner of the slicer or press Alt+S. Select necessary slicer buttons clicking them one by one. To clear the slicer filter, use the Clear Filter icon in the upper right corner of the slicer or press Alt+C. Edit slicers Some of the slicer settings can be changed using the Slicer settings tab of the right sidebar that will open if you select the slicer with the mouse. You can hide or display this tab by clicking the icon on the right.Change the slicer size and position TheWidth and Height options allow you to change the width and/or height of the slicer. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original slicer aspect ratio. The Position section allows you to change the Horizontal and/or Vertical slicer position. The Disable resizing or moving option allows you to prevent the slicer from being moved or resized. When this option is checked, theWidth, Height, Position, and Buttons options are disabled. Change the slicer layout and style The Buttons section allows you to specify the necessary number of Columns and set theWidth and Height of the buttons. By default, a slicer contains one column. If your items contain short text, you can change the column number to 2 or more:If you increase the button width, the slicer width will change correspondingly. If you increase the button height, the scroll bar will be added to the slicer: The Style section allows you to choose one of the predefined slicer styles. Apply sorting and filtering parameters · Ascending (A to Z) is used to sort the data in ascending order - from A to Z alphabetically or from the smallest to the largest number for numerical data. · Descending (Z to A) is used to sort the data in descending order - from Z to A alphabetically or from the largest to the smallest for numerical data. The Hide items with no data option allows you to hide items with no data from the slicer. When this option is checked, the Visually indicate items with no data and Show items with no data last options are disabled. When the Hide items with no data option is unchecked, you can use the following options: · The Visually indicate items with no data option allows you to display items with no data with different formatting (with a lighter color). If you uncheck this option, all items will be displayed with the same formatting.· The Show items with no data last option allows you to display items with no data at the end of the list. If you uncheck this option, all items will be displayed in the same order as in the source table. Adjust advanced slicer settings To change the advanced slicer properties, use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The ''Slicer - Advanced Settings'' window will open: The Style & Size tab contains the following parameters: · The Header option allows you to change the slicer header. Uncheck the Display header option if you do not want to display the slicer header. · The Style section allows you to choose one of the predefined slicer styles. · TheWidth and Height options allow you to change the width and/or height of the slicer. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original slicer aspect ratio. · The Buttons section allows you to specify the necessary number of Columns and set the Height of the buttons.The Sorting & Filtering tab contains the following parameters: · Ascending (A to Z) is used to sort the data in ascending order - from A to Z alphabetically or from the smallest to the largest number for numerical data. · Descending (Z to A) is used to sort the data in descending order - from Z to A alphabetically or from the largest to the smallest for numerical data. The Hide items with no data option allows you to hide items with no data from the slicer. When this option is checked, the Visually indicate items with no data and Show items with no data last options are disabled. When the Hide items with no data option is unchecked, you can use the following options: · The Visually indicate items with no data option allows you to display items with no data with different formatting (with a lighter color). · The Show items with no data last option allows you to display items with no data at the end of the list.The References tab contains the following parameters: · The Source name option allows you to view the field name corresponding to the column header from the source data set. · The Name to use in formulas option allows you to view the slicer name which is displayed in the Name manager. · The Name option allows you to set a custom name for a slicer to make it more meaningful and understandable.The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters: · Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the slicer to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the slicer will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the slicer will change its size as well. · Move but don''t size with cells - this option allows you to snap the slicer to the cell behind it preventing the slicer from being resized. If the cell moves, the slicer will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the slicer dimensions remain unchanged. · Don''t move or size with cells - this option allows you to prevent the slicer from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed.The Alternative Text tab allows you to specify the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the slicer contains. Delete a slicer To delete a slicer, 1. Select the slicer by clicking it. 2. Press the Delete key. Group data The ability to group rows and columns as well as create an outline allows you to make it easier to work with a spreadsheet that contains a large amount of data. You can collapse or expand grouped rows and columns to display the necessary data only. It''s also possible to create the multi-level structure of grouped rows/columns. When necessary, you can ungroup the previously grouped rows or columns. Group rows and columns To group rows or columns: 1. Select the cell range that you need to group. 2. Switch to the Data tab and use one of the necessary options on the top toolbar:o click the Group button, then choose the Rows or Columns option in the Group window that appears and click OK, o click the downwards arrow below the Group button and choose the Group rows option from the menu, o click the downwards arrow below the Group button and choose the Group columns option from the menu. The selected rows or columns will be grouped and the created outline will be displayed to the left of the rows or/and above the columns. To hide grouped rows/columns, click the Collapse icon. To show collapsed rows/columns, click the Expand icon. Change the outline To change the outline of grouped rows or columns, you can use options from the Group drop- down menu. The Summary rows below detail and Summary columns to the right of detail options are checked by default. They allow to change the location of the Collapse and Expand buttons: · Uncheck the Summary rows below detail option if you want to display the summary rows above the details. · Uncheck the Summary columns to right of detail option if you want to display the summary columns to the left of details. Create multi-level groups To create a multi-level structure, select a cell range within the previously created group of rows/columns, and group the newly selected range as described above. After that, you can hide and show groups by level using the icons with the level number: .For example, if you create a nested group within the parent group, three levels will be available. It''s possible to create up to 8 levels. · Click the first level icon to switch to the level which hides all grouped data: · Click the second level icon to switch to the level which displays details of the parent group, but hides the nested group data: · Click the third level icon to switch to the level which displays all details: It''s also possible to use the Collapse and Expand icons within the outline to display or hide the data corresponding to a certain level. Ungroup previously grouped rows and columns To ungroup previously grouped rows or columns: 1. Select the range of grouped cells that you need to ungroup.2. Switch to the Data tab and use one of the necessary options at the top toolbar: · click the Ungroup button, then choose the Rows or Columns option in the Group window that appears and click OK, · click the downwards arrow below the Ungroup button, then choose the Ungroup rows option from the menu to ungroup rows and clear the outline of rows, · click the downwards arrow below the Ungroup button and choose the Ungroup columns option from the menu to ungroup columns and clear the outline of columns, · click the downwards arrow below the Ungroup button and choose the Clear outline option from the menu to clear the outline of rows and columns without removing existing groups. Remove duplicates You can remove duplicate values from the selected data range or a formatted table. To remove duplicates: 1. Select the necessary cell range containing duplicate values. 2. Switch to the Data tab and click the Remove Duplicates button on the top toolbar. If you want to remove duplicates from a formatted table, you can also use the Remove duplicates option on the right sidebar. If you select a certain part of the data range, a warning window will appear where you will be asked if you want to expand the selection to include the entire data range or proceed with the currently selected data. Click the Expand or Remove in selected button. If you choose the Remove in selected option, duplicate values in cells adjacent to the selected range will not be removed.The Remove Duplicates window will open: 3. Check the necessary options in the Remove Duplicates window: o My data has headers - check this box to exclude column headers from the selection. o Columns - leave the Select All option selected by default or uncheck it and select the necessary columns only. 4. Click the OK button. The duplicate values from the selected data range will be removed, and you will see the window that contains the information on how many duplicate values have been removed and how many unique values have been left:If you want to restore the removed data right after deletion, use the Undo icon on the top toolbar or the Ctrl+Z key combination. Conditional Formatting Note: the ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor currently does not support creating and editing conditional formatting rules. Conditional formatting allows you to apply various formatting styles (color, font, decoration, gradient) to cells to work with data on the spreadsheet: highlight or sort through and display the data that meets the needed criteria. The criteria are defined by several rule types. The ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor currently does not support creating and editing conditional formatting rules. Rule types supported in the ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor View mode are cell value (+formula), top/bottom and above/below average value, unique values and duplicates, icon sets, data bars, gradient (color scale), and formula-based rules. · Cell value is used to find needed numbers, dates, and text within the spreadsheet. For example, you need to see sales for the current month (pink highlight), products named “Grain” (yellow highlight), and product sales amounting to less than $500 (blue highlight).· Cell value with formula is used to display a dynamically changed number or text value within the spreadsheet. For example, you need to find products named “Grain”, “Produce”, or “Dairy” (yellow highlight), or product sales amounting to a value between $100 and $500 (blue highlight). · Top and bottom value / Above and below average value is used to find and display the top and bottom values as well as above and below average values within the spreadsheet. For example, you need to see top values for fees in the cities you visited (orange highlight), the cities where the attendance was above average (green highlight), and bottom values for cities where you sold a small number of books (blue highlight).· Unique / Duplicates is used to display duplicate values within the spreadsheet and the cell range defined by the conditional formatting. For example, you need to find duplicate contacts. Enter the drop-down menu. The number of duplicates is shown to the right of the contact name. If you check the box, only the duplicates will be shown on the list. · Icon set is used to show the data by displaying a corresponding icon in the cell that meets the criteria. The Spreadsheet Editor supports various icon sets. Below you will find examples for the most common icon set conditional formatting cases. o Instead of numbers and percent values, you see formatted cells with corresponding arrows showing you revenue achievement in the “Status” column and the dynamics for trends in the future in the “Trend” column. o Instead of cells with rating numbers ranging from 1 to 5, the conditional formatting tool displays corresponding icons from the legend map at the top for each bike in the rating list.o Instead of manually comparing monthly profit dynamics data, the formatted cells have a corresponding red or green arrow. o Use the traffic lights system (red, yellow, and green circles) to visualize sales dynamics. · Data bars are used to compare values in the form of a diagram bar. For example, compare mountain heights by displaying their default value in meters (green bar) and the same value in 0 to 100 percent range (yellow bar); percentile when extreme values slant the data (light blue bar); bars only instead of numbers (blue bar); two-column data analysis to see both numbers and bars (red bar).· Gradient, or color scale, is used to highlight values within the spreadsheet through a gradient scale. The columns from “Dairy” through “Beverage” display data via a two-color scale with variation from yellow to red; the “Total Sales” column displays data via a three-color scale from the smallest amount in red to the largest amount in blue. · Formula-based formatting uses various formulas to filter data as per specific needs. For example, you can shade alternate rows,compare with a reference value (here it is $55), and show if it is higher (green) or lower (red), highlight the rows that meet the needed criteria (see what goals you shall achieve this month, in this case, it is October),and highlight unique rows only Data validation The ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor offers a data validation feature that controls the parameters of the information entered in cells by users.To access the data validation feature, choose a cell, a range of cells, or a whole spreadsheet you want to apply the feature to, open the Data tab, and click the Data Validation icon on the top toolbar. The opened Data Validation window contains three tabs: Settings, Input Message, and Error Alert. Settings The Settings section allows you to specify the type of data that can be entered: Note: Check the Apply these changes to all other cells with the same settings box to use the same settings to the selected range of cells or a whole worksheet. · choose the required option in the Allowmenu: o Any value: no limitations on information type. o Whole number: only whole numbers are allowed. o Decimal: only numbers with a decimal point are allowed. o List: only options from the drop-down list you created are allowed. Uncheck the Show drop-down list in cell box to hide the drop-down arrow.o Date: only cells with the date format are allowed. o Time: only cells with the time format are allowed. o Text length: sets the characters limit. o Other: sets the necessary validation parameter given as a formula. Note: Check the Apply these changes to all other cells with the same settings box to use the same settings to the selected range of cells or a whole worksheet. · specify a validation condition in the Datamenu: o between: the data in cells should be within the range set by the validation rule. o not between: the data in cells should not be within the range set by the validation rule. o equals: the data in cells should be equal to the value set by the validation rule. o does not equal: the data in cells should not be equal to the value set by the validation rule. o greater than: the data in cells should exceed the values set by the validation rule. o less than: the data in cells should be less than the values set by the validation rule. o greater than or equal to: the data in cells should exceed or be equal to the value set by the validation rule. o less than or equal to: the data in cells should be less than or equal to the value set by the validation rule. · create a validation rule depending on the allowed information type: Validation condition Vrualleidation Description Availability Between / not between Minimum / Maximum Sets the value range Whole number / Decimal / Text lengthStart date / End date Sets the date range Date Start time / End time Sets the time period Time Compare to Sets the value for Whole number / comparison Decimal Date Sets the date for comparison Date Equals / does not equal Elapsed Sets the time for time comparison Time Length Sets the text length value for comparison Text length Minimum Sets the lower limit Whole number / Decimal / Text length Greater than / greater than or equal to Start date Sets the starting date Date Start time Sets the starting time Time Maximum Sets the higher limit Whole number / Decimal / Text length Less than / less than or equal to End date Sets the ending date Date End time Sets the ending time Time As well as: o Source: provide the source of information for the List information type. o Formula: enter the required formula to create a custom validation rule for the Other information type. Input Message The Input Message section allows you to create a customized message displayed when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the cell.· Specify the Title and the body of your Input Message. · Uncheck the Show input message when cell is selected to disable the display of the message. Leave it to display the message. Error Alert The Error Alert section allows you to specify the message displayed when the data given by users does not meet the validation rules.· Style: choose one of the available presets, Stop, Alert, or Message. · Title: specify the title of the alert message. · Error Message: enter the text of the alert message. · Uncheck the Show error alert after invalid data is entered box to disable the display of the alert message. Work with functions Insert function The ability to perform basic calculations is the principal reason for using a spreadsheet. Some of them are performed automatically when you select a cell range in your spreadsheet: · Average is used to analyze the selected cell range and find the average value. · Count is used to count the number of the selected cells with values ignoring the empty cells. · Min is used to analyze the range of data and find the smallest number. · Max is used to analyze the range of data and find the largest number. · Sum is used to add all the numbers in the selected range ignoring the empty cells or those contaning text. The results of these calculations are displayed in the right lower corner on the status bar. You can manage the status bar by right-clicking on it and choosing only those functions to display that you need.To perform any other calculations, you can insert the required formula manually using the common mathematical operators or insert a predefined formula - Function. The abilities to work with Functions are accessible from both the Home and Formula tab or by pressing Shift+F3 key combination. On the Home tab, you can use the Insert function button to add one of the most commonly used functions (SUM, AVERAGE, MIN, MAX, COUNT) or open the Insert Function window that contains all the available functions classified by category. Use the search box to find the exact function by its name.On the Formula tab you can use the following buttons: · Function - to open the Insert Function window that contains all the available functions classified by category. · Autosum - to quickly access the SUM, MIN, MAX, COUNT functions. When you select a functions from this group, it automatically performs calculations for all cells in the column above the selected cell so that you don''t need to enter arguments. · Recently used - to quickly access 10 recently used functions. · Financial, Logical, Text and data, Date and time, Lookup and references,Math and trigonometry - to quickly access functions that belongs to the corresponding categories. · More functions - to access the functions from the following groups: Database, Engineering, Information and Statistical. · Named ranges - to open the Name Manager, or define a new name, or paste a name as a function argument. · Calculation - to force the program to recalculate functions. To insert a function, 1. Select a cell where you wish to insert a function. 2. Proceed in one of the following ways: · switch to the Formula tab and use the buttons available on the top toolbar to access a function from a specific group, then click the necessary function to open the Function Arguments wizard. You can also use the Additional option from the menu or click the Function button on the top toolbar to open the Insert Function window. · switch to the Home tab, click the Insert function icon, select one of the commonly used functions (SUM, AVERAGE, MIN, MAX, COUNT) or click the Additional option to open the Insert Function window. · right-click within the selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the contextual menu. · click the icon before the formula bar. 3. In the opened Insert Function window, enter its name in the search box or select the necessary function group, then choose the required function from the list and click OK. Once you click the necessary function, the Function Arguments window will open:4. In the opened Function Arguments window, enter the necessary values of each argument. You can enter the function arguments either manually or by clicking the icon and selecting a cell or cell range to be included as an argument. Note: generally, numeric values, logical values (TRUE, FALSE), text values (must be quoted), cell references, cell range references, names assigned to ranges and other functions can be used as function arguments. The function result will be displayed below. 5. When all the agruments are specified, click the OK button in the Function Arguments window. To enter a function manually using the keyboard, 1. Select a cell. 2. Enter the equal sign (=). Each formula must begin with the equal sign (=). 3. Enter the function name. Once you type the initial letters, the Formula Autocomplete list will be displayed. As you type, the items (formulas and names) that match the entered characters are displayed in it. If you hover the mouse pointer over a formula, a tooltip with the formuladescription will be displayed. You can select the necessary formula from the list and insert it by clicking it or pressing the Tab key. 4. Enter the function arguments either manually or by dragging to select a cell range to be included as an argument. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas. Arguments must be enclosed into parentheses. The opening parenthesis ''('' is added automatically if you select a function from the list. When you enter arguments, a tooltip that contains the formula syntax is also displayed. 5. When all the agruments are specified, enter the closing parenthesis '')'' and press Enter. If you enter new data or change the values used as arguments, recalculation of functions is performed automatically by default. You can force the program to recalculate functions by using the Calculation button on the Formula tab. Click the Calculation button to recalculate the entire workbook, or click the arrow below the button and choose the necessary option from the menu: Calculate workbook or Calculate current sheet. You can also use the following key combinations: F9 to recalculate the workbook, Shift +F9 to recalculate the current worksheet. Here is the list of the available functions grouped by categories: FCuantecgtioorny Description Functions AAST;CD; Text and Data Used to correctly ; LO C EL H NL A ;A R LR ; E; C NE L BX E ;A A LC N OT ; W; CFOEIRN D ;D E M; ;FCIDIN O Functions display the text data ; MD NBCID; A BF T ;I EXNNEUD AT M;BL E EE ; RF CTOV; NLCFTB in the spreadsheet. TR EIG; PHRTOB;PSEERA;RRCEHP;LSAECAER; RCEHPBL;ASCEB; REPT; RIG AHL E U T; A;LTUEEXTJOIN; TRIM; UNICHAR; UN UIBCSOTDITEU;TUEP;PTE;RT;EVX ARVEDEV; AVERAGE; AVERAGEA; AVERAGEIF; Used to analyze NA data: finding the BV G; BEIINFOS;MBDEISTAT;DBISINTO; BME.DTA.DIST; BETA.INV; BE ATVAEI Statistical average value, the DINOM.INV; CHIDIST; CHIIN ISVT;;CBHINISOQM.D.DISISTT;.RCAHNISGQE.; Functions largest or smallest QI values in a cell I . STET.SRTT;;CCOHNISFQID.IENNVC; CE;HCISOQN.IFNV.RT; CHITEST; CHIS range. KDC; E OC N VO C AU E RN .T IAT ; NIF C C; O EC RREL; COUNT; CIDOEUNNCTEA.N; COORUMN; BCLOANNF .SO;UCNRTIITFBSI;NCOOMV;ADRE;VCSOQV;AERXIPAONNC.ED.IP; ;EFX.IPNOVN.RDTI;SFTI;SFH.DERIS;TF;IFSDHIESRTI;NFV.D; IFSOTR.RETC;AFS.ITN;VF;OFRIN ST EV ;CEAT A SS S.TS.EEATSS;OFNOARLEITCYA;SFTO.RETESC.ACSOTN.EFTINST.S; TFAO ; T.LINEAR; FREQUENCY; FTEST; F.TES TRT; E ;F C GO A AR S ME T MC . AAINGVA;MGMAMA.MDAISLTN; ;GGAAMMMMAADLINST.P;RGEACMISMEA;.IGNAVU; SGSA;MGMOPLG M E EEOAMN;.DGISRTO;WINTTHE;RHCAERPMTE;AKNU;RHTY; PLAGREGOEMDIST; HY NL OOGGENSOTR, MLODGISINT;VM; LAOXG; MNORM.DIST; LOGN ;OLRINME.SINTV; ; RN ;EMGINBAI ; MINIFS; MODE; M AXOAD;EM.MAXUILFTS;;MMOEDDEIA.SNN; GMLI ; MM.DIS NT;ONMODRISMTIN; NVE; NGOBIRNMO.MIN.VD;ISNTO;RNMOSRDMDIST; NO REC .SE.DNITSITLE; N; POERRMCSEINNVT;ILNORM.S.INV; PEAR ISSOT;NN; OPER NRPQO KC.IISN E SC NTRANK; PERCENET.ERXACN;KP.EEXRCC;EPNETRILCEE.INNTCR;AP O;NP.EDRISMTU; TP;RPOEBR;MQUUTAARTTIOILNEA; Q; PUHAIR; POISSON; SDK UEAWRT; ISLKEE.IWNC.P; ;RSALNOKP; RANK.AVG; RANK. TEIQLE; .RESXQC;; V. P EAV;; STDEV.S; STDEV EA;;SSMTDAELLV;PS;TSATNDDEAVR.PD;ISZETD; SET TINV; T S.TINEVY.X2;TT; DTIINSVT;; TT.RDEISNTD; T.DIST.2T; T.DIST.RT; T EEIBSUTL;LV;AWRE; IVBAURLAL.;DVISATR;PZ;TVEA , SR T T. RPI; Z; M .V M TA E ER A S.TS N;;VTATREPSAT;;WT. AAB Used to perform BC RSEA ; ILB A IINC C G; O ;A S CS ; EIN ACOSH; ACOT; ACOTH; AGGREGATE; IL; IANSGIN.MHA;TAHT;ACNE; IALTINAGN.2P;RAETCAINH; BASE; basic math and HI Math and trigonometry P; ND;ECCOIMMABLIN; AD;ECGORSE;ECSO; SEHC;MCOT; COTH; C SSEC; C; COSMC Trigonometry operations such as FGL ; OFAOCRT.M; FAATCTDOUBLE; FLOO AR.C; EFLILOINOGR;.PERVEECNI;SEEX; Functions adding, multiplying, R; LOG10; M HD;EGTCEDR;MIN; MT;INISVOE.RCSEEIL;IMNGM;ULLCTM; M; LON; LO dividing, rounding, RO etc. YO UDNUDC;TM; QUULOTITNIOENMTIA; LR;AMDUIANNITS; ODD; PI; POWEDR; ;MP N;S; RRAONUDNBDEUTPW; SEEECN;; SREOMAN; RO ;URNADN;DR;ORUANNDDDARORWA MIPYI NFH2S ; SQRT; SQRTPI; SCUHB;TSOETRAIEL;SSSUUMM;; SSUIGMNIF; ;SSINU; ; ;SSUUMMXPMRYO2D; TUACNT;;TSAUNMHS;QT;RSUUNMCX2MY2; SUMX2 D Date and Used to correctly 0 Time display the date and T; AETDEA; TDEA;TEEODMIFO; DNATHTE; HVOALUURE; ;ISDAY; DAYS; DAYS36 Functions time in the LK; EN; MOWON; STHEC; NOENTDW; TOIRKDAYS; N OETWWEOEKRNKUDMAY; SM.IINNUT spreadsheet. ADRA; YYE; WAREFERKANCUM; W MOER;KTDIMAYE;VWALOUREK;DTAOYD.AINYT;LW; YEEE Used to perform B some engineering TB EINS2SHEELXI; ;BBEINSS2OELCJT;;BBEITSASNEDLK; B; BITELSSELY; BIN2DEC; Engineering calculations: Functions converting between different bases ED R number systems, CR ESFC H C2 I ;H FT EE ; RX B F; I CD T .PE X RC OR; COMPLEX; CONSVHEIFRTT;;BDIETOC2RB; IBNI; E2OCCISTE;;DGEELSTTAE; PE;RHFE; XE2RBFI.NP;RHEECXIS2E; finding complex M;CSC H CO E HN X ;J 2 IU O MG C DA T IVT ; ;E IM I;MI AMBEXC S PO ; ;S IM IM; AILM G NC IN ;O A IMS R LH Y O; ; IMARGUMENT;DIE GIM1C0;OIMT;LIOMGC2S;CIM; IPMnumbers etc. OI WER; IMPRODUCT; IMREAL; IMSEC; IMSECH; IMS INN;; IOMCSTIN2DHE; ICM;SOQCRTT2;HIEMXSUB; IMSUM; IMTAN; OCT2B Used to perform calculations for the Database values in a certain D Functions field of the database MAR;IN VERAGE; DCOUNT; DCOUNTA; DGET; DMAX; D that meet the D;VDAPRRPODUCT; DSTDEV; DSTDEVP; DSUM; DVA specified criteria. AOC Used to perform DU CPRDIANYTB; SA;CCCORUINPTDMA;YAMORDEGRC; AMORLINC; C some financial BE; ; DCDOBU;PDNIUSM; COUPPC SD;;CCOUUMPIPDMAYT;SCNUCM; CPORUINPCN;CD Financial calculations: Functions calculating the net PFFECT; FV C; F; DVSOCLLHAERDDUEL;ED; OINLTLRAARTFER;;IPDMURT;AITION; present value, DM payments etc. PDF TP; MRIDCUER; OATDIDOFNY; IMEILRDR; ;ONDODMINAL; NPER; NP RVR;;OIS EDEM U EQLD; AR ;T T YB ;A II PT EL VIOLLP ; NR; PMT; PPMT; PRIC LPER; PICREIC; OEDDDISLCY;IEPLRDIC; DR A DIIC T SE E C; ; ; T R YB E IEIL C LL E DY IV MIE E AL D TD ;;RVRDIB; S; XLNIR;RS;YXDN;PTVB;ILYLI Lookup and Used to easily find ALDDRESS; CHOOSE; COLUMN; COLUMNReference information from Functions the data list. TAP;OL T SO E EO XT ; K ; UU H NP L IQ; O UM O EA K ;T U VC P LH ; O; H OO Y KF P UF ERLINLK; INDEXS; ;INFDOIRRMECU PS,EXTL;OROOKWU;PROWS; TRANS Used to provide Information information about C Functions the data in the EI V EELLN;;EISRFROORRM.TUYLPAE; ;ISISLBOLGAINCK; ISERR; ISERROR; IS selected cell or cell range. SSHNEUEMTBSE; RTY; PISEODD; ISREF; IS ATLE;XISTN; NA;; NISAN;OSNHTEEEXTT; ; Logical Used to check if a Functions condition is true or ATCNHD;; TFRAULSfalse. EE; ;XIOF;RIFERROR; IFNA; IFS; NOT; OR; SWI Use named ranges Names are meaningful notations that can be assigned to a cell or cell range and used to simplify working with formulas. Creating a formula, you can insert a name as its argument instead of using a reference to a cell range. For example, if you assign the Annual_Income name to a cell range, it will be possible to enter =SUM(Annual_Income) instead of =SUM(B1:B12). Thus, formulas become clearer. This feature can also be useful in case a lot of formulas are referred to one and the same cell range. If the range address is changed, you can make the correction once by using the Name Manager instead of editing all the formulas one by one. There are two types of names that can be used:· Defined name – an arbitrary name that you can specify for a certain cell range. Defined names also include the names created automatically when setting up print areas. · Table name – a default name that is automatically assigned to a new formatted table (Table1, Table2 etc.). You can edit this name later. If you have created a slicer for a formatted table, an automatically assigned slicer name will also be displayed in the Name Manager (Slicer_Column1, Slicer_Column2 etc. This name consists of the Slicer_ part and the field name corresponding to the column header from the source data set). You can edit this name later. Names are also classified by Scope, i.e. the location where a name is recognized. A name can be scoped to the whole workbook (it will be recognized for any worksheet within this workbook) or to a separate worksheet (it will be recognized for the specified worksheet only). Each name must be unique within a single scope, the same names can be used within different scopes. Create new names To create a new defined name for a selection: 1. Select a cell or cell range you want to assign a name to. 2. Open a new name window in a suitable way: · Right-click the selection and choose the Define Name option from the contextual menu, · or click the Named ranges icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the Define Name option from the menu. · or click the Named ranges button on the Formula tab of the top toolbar and select the Name manager option from the menu. Choose option New in the opened window. The New Name window will open: 3. Enter the necessary Name in the text entry field. Note: a name cannot start with a number, contain spaces or punctuation marks. Underscores (_) are allowed. Case does not matter.4. Specify the name Scope. The Workbook scope is selected by default, but you can specify an individual worksheet selecting it from the list. 5. Check the selected Data Range address. If necessary, you can change it. Click the icon - the Select Data Range window will open. Change the link to the cell range in the entry field or select a new range on the worksheet with the mouse and click OK. 6. Click OK to save the new name. To quickly create a new name for the selected cell range, you can also enter the desired name into the name box located to the left of the the formula bar and press Enter. The name created in such a way is scoped to the Workbook. Manage names All the existing names can be accessed via the Name Manager. To open it: · click the Named ranges icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the Name manager option from the menu, · or click the arrow in the name field and select the Name Manager option. The Name Manager window will open:For your convenience, you can filter the names selecting the name category you want to be displayed: All, Defined names, Table names, Names Scoped to Sheet or Names Scoped to Workbook. The names that belong to the selected category will be displayed in the list, the other names will be hidden. To change the sort order for the displayed list, you can click on the Named Ranges or Scope titles in this window. To edit a name, select it in the list and click the Edit button. The Edit Name window will open: For a defined name, you can change the name and the data range it refers to. For a table name, you can change the name only. When all the necessary changes are made, click OK to apply them. To discard the changes, click Cancel. If the edited name is used in a formula, the formula will be automatically changed accordingly. To delete a name, select it in the list and click the Delete button.Note: if you delete the name that is used in a formula, the formula will no longer work (it will return the #NAME? error). You can also create a new name in the Name Manager window by clicking the New button. Use names when working with the spreadsheet To quickly navigate through cell ranges, you can click the arrow in the name box and select the necessary name from the name list – the data range that corresponds to this name will be selected in the worksheet. Note: the name list displays the defined names and table names scoped to the current worksheet and to the whole workbook. To add a name as an argument of a formula: 1. Place the insertion point where you need to add a name. 1. Make one of the following steps: · enter the name of the necessary named range manually using the keyboard. Once you type the initial letters, the Formula Autocomplete list will be displayed. As you type, the items (formulas and names) that match the entered characters are displayed in it. You can select the necessary defined name or table name from the list and insert it into the formula by double- clicking it or pressing the Tab key. · or click the Named ranges icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the Paste name option from the menu, choose the necessary name from the Paste Name window and click OK:Note: the Paste Name window displays the defined names and table names scoped to the current worksheet and to the whole workbook. To use a name as an internal hyperlink: 1. Place the insertion point where you need to add a hyperlink. 2. Go to the Insert tab and click the Hyperlink button. 3. In the opened Hyperlink Settings window, select the Internal Data Range tab and choose a named range. 4. Click OK.Operations on objects Insert images The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to insert images in the most popular formats into your worksheet. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. Insert an image To insert an image into the spreadsheet, 1. place the cursor where the image should be added, 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. click the Image icon on the top toolbar, 4. select one of the following options to load the image: · the Image from File option will open the standard dialog window to select a file. Browse the hard disk drive of your computer to find the required file and click the Open button · the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the web address of the required image and click the OK button · the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button After that the image will be added to the worksheet. Adjust the image settings Once the image is added, you can change its size and position. To specify the exact dimensions of the image: 1. select the required image with the mouse, 2. click the Image settings icon on the right sidebar,3. in the Size section, set the necessaryWidth and Height values. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button. To crop the image: Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of each side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the Arrow icon and drag the area. · To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side. · To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles. · To equally crop two opposite sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides. · To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles. When the cropping area is specified, click the Crop button once again, or press the Esc key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes. After the cropping area is selected, it''s also possible to use the Fill and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need: · If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while other parts of the image will be removed. · If you select the Fit option, the image will be resized so that it fits the height or width of the cropping area. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area. To rotate the image: 1. select the required image with the mouse, 2. click the Image settings icon on the right sidebar, 3. in the Rotation section, click one of the buttons: · to rotate the image by 90 degrees counterclockwise · to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise · to flip the image horizontally (left to right) · to flip the image vertically (upside down) Note: alternatively, you can right-click the image and use the Rotate option from the contextual menu. To replace the inserted image, 1. select the required image with the mouse,2. click the Image settings icon on the right sidebar, 3. click the Replace Image button, 4. choose the necessary option: From File, From Storage, or From URL and select the desired image. Note: alternatively, you can right-click the image and use the Replace image option from the contextual menu. The selected image will be replaced. When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Stroke type, its size and color as well as change the shape type by selecting another shape from the Change Autoshapemenu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. On the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image. Adjust the image advanced settings To change its advanced settings, click the image with the right mouse button and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The image properties window will open:The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: · Angle - use this option to rotate the image by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. · Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the image horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the image vertically (upside down). The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters: · Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the image to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the image will bemoved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the image will change its size as well. · Move but don''t size with cells - this option allows you to snap the image to the cell behind it preventing the image from being resized. If the cell moves, the image will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the image dimensions remain unchanged. · Don''t move or size with cells - this option allows you to prevent the image from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative Text tab allows you to specify the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the image contains. To delete the inserted image, click it and press the Delete key. Insert charts Insert a chart To insert a chart into the speadsheet, 1. Select the cell range that contain the data you wish to use for the chart, 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. Click the Chart icon on the top toolbar, 4. select the needed chart type from the available ones: · Column Charts o Clustered column o Stacked columno 100% stacked column o 3-D Clustered Column o 3-D Stacked Column o 3-D 100% stacked column o 3-D Column · Line Charts o Line o Stacked line o 100% stacked line o Line with markers o Stacked line with markers o 100% stacked line with markers o 3-D Line · Pie Charts o Pie o Doughnut o 3-D Pie · Bar Charts o Clustered bar o Stacked bar o 100% stacked bar o 3-D clustered bar o 3-D stacked bar o 3-D 100% stacked bar · Area Charts o Area o Stacked area o 100% stacked area o Stock Charts · XY (Scatter) Charts o Scatter o Stacked bar o Scatter with smooth lines and markers o Scatter with smooth lines o Scatter with straight lines and markers o Scatter with straight lines · Combo Charts o Clustered column - line o Clustered column - line on secondary axis o Stacked area - clustered column o Custom combination After that the chart will be added to the worksheet.Adjust the chart settings Now you can change the settings of the inserted chart. To change the chart type, 1. select the chart with the mouse, 2. click the Chart settings icon on the right sidebar, 3. open the Type drop-down list and select the type you need, 4. open the Style drop-down list below and select the style which suits you best. The selected chart type and style will be changed. To edit chart data: 1. Click the Select Data button on the right-side panel. 2. Use the Chart Data dialog to manage Chart Data Range, Legend Entries (Series), Horizontal (Category) Axis Label and Switch Row/Column.· Chart Data Range - select data for your chart. o Click the icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select data range. · Legend Entries (Series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries. o In Legend Entries (Series), click Add button. o In Edit Series, type a new legend entry or click the icon on the right of the Select name box.· Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels - change text for category labels. o In Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels, click Edit. o In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select data range. · Switch Row/Column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis. 3. Click OK button to apply the changes and close the window. Click Show Advanced Settings to change other settings such as Layout, Vertical Axis, Secondary Vertical Axis, Horizontal Axis, Secondary Horizontal Axis, Cell Snapping and Alternative Text.The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. · Specify the Chart Title position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: o None to not display a chart title, o Overlay to overlay and center the title in the plot area, o No Overlay to display the title above the plot area. · Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: o None to not display the legend, o Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, o Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, o Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, o Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, o Left Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left in the plot area, o Right Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right in the plot area. · Specify the Data Labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters:o specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. § For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner Bottom, Inner Top, Outer Top. § For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. § For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to Width, Inner Top, Outer Top. § For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line and Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. o select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series Name, Category Name, Value, o enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data Labels Separator entry field. · Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines. · Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines andMarkers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only.The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. · select Hide to hide vertical axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have vertical axis displayed. · specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: o None to not display a vertical axis title o Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, o Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. · Minimum Value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. · Maximum Value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculatedautomatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. · Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. · Display Units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you''re working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000,Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. · Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. · The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. TheMajor/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: o None to not display major/minor tick marks, o Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, o In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, o Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. · The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: o None to not display tick mark labels, o Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, o High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, o Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. o To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: · General · Number · Scientific · Accounting · Currency · Date · Time · Percentage · Fraction· Text · Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. o Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only. Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series vary considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart. The Secondary Vertical /Horizontal Axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary Vertical/Horizontal Axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal Axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/Horizontal Axis options, see description above/below.The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. · select Hide to hide horizontal axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have horizontal axis displayed. · specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: o None when you don’t want to display a horizontal axis title, o No Overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis, · Gridlines is used to specigy the Horizontal Gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None, Major,Minor, orMajor and Minor. . · Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point attheMinimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. · Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks. · Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. · The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: o Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. o Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. · The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. o Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. o Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. o Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select theManual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. o To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. o Available label format categories: o General o Number o Scientific o Accounting o Currency o Date o Time o Percentageo Fraction o Text o Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. o Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters: · Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well. · Move but don''t size with cells - this option allows to snap the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged. · Don''t move or size with cells - this option allows to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed.The Alternative Text tab allows to specify the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, style, size, or color. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since the shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape Settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill and Stroke. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape Settings tab on the right panel you can not only adjust the chart area itself, but also change the chart elements, such as the plot area, data series, chart title, legend, etc. and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element by clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specifythe fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available on the Shape Settings tab: color, width and type. Note: the Show shadow option is also available on the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. If necessary, you can change the chart size and position. To delete the inserted chart, click it and press the Delete key.Edit sparklines Sparkline is a little chart that fits in one cell. Sparklines can be useful if you want to visually represent information for each row or column in large data sets. This makes it easier to show trends in multiple data series. If your spreadsheet already contains sparklines created with another application, you can change the sparkline properties. To do that, select the cell that contains a sparkline with the mouse and click the Chart settings icon on the right sidebar. If the selected sparkline is included into a sparkline group, the changes will be applied to all sparklines in the group. · Use the Type drop-down list to select one of the available sparkline types: o Column - this type is similar to a regular Column Chart. o Line - this type is similar to a regular Line Chart. o Win/Loss - this type is suitable for representing data that include both positive and negative values. · In the Style section, you can do the following: o select the style which suits you best from the Template drop-down list. o choose the necessary Color for the sparkline. o choose the necessary Line Weight (available for the Line type only).· The Show section allows you to select which sparkline elements you want to highlight to make them clearly visible. Check the box to the left of the element to be highlighted and select the necessary color by clicking the colored box: o High Point - to highlight points that represent maximum values, o Low Point - to highlight points that represent minimum values, o Negative Point - to highlight points that represent negative values, o First/Last Point - to highlight the point that represents the first/last value, o Markers (available for the Line type only) - to highlight all values. Click the Show advanced settings link situated on the right-side panel to open the Sparkline - Advanced Settings window. The Type & Data tab allows you to change the sparkline Type and Style as well as specify the Hidden and Empty cells display settings: · Show empty cells as - this option allows you to control how sparklines are displayed if some cells in a data range are empty. Select the necessary option from the list: o Gaps - to display the sparkline with gaps in place of missing data, o Zero - to display the sparkline as if the value in an empty cell was zero,o Connect data points with line (available for the Line type only) - to ignore empty cells and display a connecting line between data points. · Show data in hidden rows and columns - check this box if you want to include values from the hidden cells into sparklines. The Axis Options tab allows you to specify the following Horizontal/Vertical Axis parameters: · In the Horizontal Axis section, the following parameters are available: o Show axis - check this box to display the horizontal axis. If the source data contain negative values, this option helps to display them more vividly. o Reverse order - check this box to display data in the reverse sequence. · In the Vertical Axis section, the following parameters are available: o Minimum/Maximum Value § Auto for Each - this option is selected by default. It allows you to use own minimum/maximum values for each sparkline. The minimum/maximum values are taken from the separate data series that are used to plot each sparkline. The maximum value for each sparkline will be located at the top of the cell, and the minimum value will be at the bottom.§ Same for All - this option allows you to use the same minimum/maximum value for the entire sparkline group. The minimum/maximum values are taken from the whole data range that is used to plot the sparkline group. The maximum/minimum values for each sparkline will be scaled relative to the highest/lowest value within the range. If you select this option, it will be easier to compare several sparklines. § Fixed - this option allows you to set a custom minimum/maximum value. The values which are lower or higher than the specified ones are not displayed in the sparklines. Insert and format autoshapes Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape to your spreadsheet, 1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 2. click the Shape icon on the top toolbar, 3. select one of the available autoshape groups: basic shapes, figured arrows, math, charts, stars & ribbons, callouts, buttons, rectangles, lines, 4. click the necessary autoshape within the selected group, 5. place the mouse cursor where the shape sholud be added, 6. once the autoshape is added, you can change its size and position as well as its settings. Adjust the autoshape settings Some of the autoshape settings can be changed using the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar that will open if you select the inserted autoshape with the mouse and click the Shape settings icon. The following settings can be changed: · Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options:o Color Fill - select this option to specify a solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: § Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. § Standard Colors - the default colors set. § Custom Color - click this caption if there is no needed color in the available palettes. Select the necessary color range by moving the vertical color slider and set the specific color by dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also specify a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the necessary numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is specified, click the Add button. The custom color will be applied to your autoshape and added to the Custom color palette. o Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fillmenu on the right sidebar:Available menu options: o Style - choose between Linear or Radial: § Linear is used when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top- to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. Click Direction to choose a preset direction and click Angle for a precise gradient angle. § Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. o Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. § Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. § Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. § To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. o Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background.§ If you wish to use an image as the shape background, you can click the Select Picture button and add an image From File selecting it on the hard disc drive of your computer, From Storage using your ONLYOFFICE file manager, or From URL inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window. § If you wish to use a texture as the shape background, open the From Texturemenu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. § In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the size of the image to fit the autoshape so that it could fill all the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. o Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. § Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. § Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. § Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. o No Fill - select this option if you don''t want to use any fill.· Opacity - use this section to set the Opacity level by dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It means full opacity. The 0% value means full transparency. · Stroke - use this section to change the stroke width, color or type of the autoshape. o To change the stroke width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don''t want to use any stroke. o To change the stroke color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. o To change the stroke type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). · Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: o to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise o to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise o to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) o to flip the shape vertically (upside down) · Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. · Show shadow - check this option to display the shape with shadow. Adjust shape advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The ''Shape - Advanced Settings'' window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters:· Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the autoshape. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: · Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. · Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down).TheWeights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: · Line Style - this option group allows you to specify the following parameters: o Cap Type - this option allows you to set the style of the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with an open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: § Flat - the end points will be flat. § Round - the end points will be rounded. § Square - the end points will be square. o Join Type - this option allows you to set the style of the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of a triangle or rectangle outline: § Round - the corner will be rounded. § Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. § Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. · Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows you to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists. The Text Box tab allows you to Resize shape to fit text, Allow text to overflow shape or change the Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled.The Columns tab allows you to add columns of text within the autoshape specifying the necessary Number of columns (up to 16) and Spacing between columns. Once you click OK, the text that already exists or any other text you enter within the autoshape will appear in columns and will flow from one column to another one. The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters: · Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the shape to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the shape will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the shape will change its size as well. · Move but don''t size with cells - this option allows you to snap the shape to the cell behind it preventing the shape from being resized. If the cell moves, the shape will bemoved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the shape dimensions remain unchanged. · Don''t move or size with cells - this option allows you to prevent the shape from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative Text tab allows you to specify the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains. Insert and format text within the autoshape To insert a text into the autoshape, select the shape with the mouse and start typing your text. The text will become part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text also moves or rotates with it). All the formatting options you can apply to the text within the autoshape are listed here. Join autoshapes using connectors You can connect autoshapes using lines with connection points to demonstrate dependencies between the objects (e.g. if you want to create a flowchart). To do that, 1. click the Shape icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the Lines group from the menu, 3. click the necessary shape within the selected group (excepting the last three shapes which are not connectors, namely Curve, Scribble and Freeform),4. hover the mouse cursor over the first autoshape and click one of the connection points that appear on the shape outline, 5. drag the mouse cursor towards the second autoshape and click the necessary connection point on its outline. If you move the joined autoshapes, the connector remains attached to the shapes and moves together with them. You can also detach the connector from the shapes and then attach it to any other connection points. Insert text objects To draw attention to a specific part of the spreadsheet, you can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows you to enter text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows you to apply some text effects). Add a text object You can add a text object anywhere in the worksheet. To do that: 1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the necessary text object type: · to add a text box, click the Text Box icon on the top toolbar, then click where the text box should be inserted, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, and you will bу able to enter your text.Note: it''s also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the Insert Text autoshape from the Basic Shapes group. · to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon on the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added in the center of the worksheet. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text. 3. click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the worksheet. The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it). As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame with text in it (Text Art objects have invisible text box borders by default) and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties. To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key on the keyboard. The text within the text box will also be deleted. Format a text box Select the text box by clicking on its border to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines. · to manually resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape. · to edit the text box fill, stroke, replace the rectangular box with a different shape, or access the shape advanced settings, click the Shape settings icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options. · to arrange text boxes as related to other objects, align several text boxes as related to each other, rotate or flip a text box, right-click on the text box border and use the contextual menu options. · to create columns of text within the text box, right-click on the text box border, click the Shape Advanced Settings option and switch to the Columns tab in the Shape - Advanced Settings window. Format the text within the text box Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines.Note: it''s also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to all the text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to a previously selected portion of the text separately. · Adjust the font formatting settings (change the font type, its size, color and apply decoration styles) using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Some additional font settings can be also changed on the Font tab of the paragraph properties window. To access it, right-click the text in the text box and select the Text Advanced Settings option. · Align the text horizontally within the text box by using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar or in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. · Align the text vertically within the text box by using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. You can also right-click the text, select the Vertical Alignment option and then choose one of the available options: Align Top, Align Center or Align Bottom. · Rotate the text within the text box. To do that, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (is selected by default), Rotate Text Down (sets a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (sets a vertical direction, from bottom to top). · Create a bulleted or numbered list. To do that, right-click the text, select the Bullets and Numbering option from the contextual menu and then choose one of the available bullet characters or numbering styles.The List Settings option allows you to open the List Settings window where you can adjust the settings for a corresponding list type: Type (bulleted) - allows you to select the necessary character for the bulleted list. When you click on the New bullet field, the Symbol window will open, and you will be able to choose one of the available characters. Type (numbered) - allows you to select the necessary format for the numbered list. o Size - allows you to select the necessary bullet/number size depending on the current size of the text. The value can vary from 25% up to 400%. o Color - allows you to select the necessary bullet/number color. You can select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color. o Start at - allows you to set the necessary numeric value you want to start numbering with. · Insert a hyperlink. · Set line and paragraph spacing for the multi-line text within the text box by using the Text settings tab of the right sidebar that will open if you click the Textsettings icon. Set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current and the previous or the following paragraph. o Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among three options: at least (sets the minimum line spacing that is needed to fit the largest font or graphic on the line), multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right. o Paragraph Spacing - set the amount of space between paragraphs. § Before - set the amount of space before the paragraph. § After - set the amount of space after the paragraph. Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. Adjust paragraph advanced settings Change the advanced settings of the paragraph (you can adjust paragraph indents and tab stops for the multi-line text within the text box and apply some font formatting settings). Put the cursor within the required paragraph - the Text settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. Click the Show advanced settings link. It''s also possible to right-click the text in a text box and use the Text advanced settings item from the contextual menu. The paragraph properties window will be opened:The Indents & Spacing tab allows you to: · change the alignment type for the paragraph text, · change the paragraph indents as related to internal margins of the text box, o Left - set the paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, o Right - set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, o Special - set an indent for the first line of the paragraph: select the corresponding menu item ((none), First line, Hanging) and change the default numeric value specified for First Line or Hanging, · change the paragraph line spacing.The Font tab contains the following parameters: · Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. · Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a double line going through the letters. · Superscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. · Subscript is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. · Small caps is used to make all letters lower case. · All caps is used to make all letters upper case. · Character Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below.The Tab tab allows you to change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the Tab key on the keyboard. · Default Tab is set at 2.54 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. · Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons and click the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. · Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center or Right option in the Alignment drop-down list and click the Specify button. o Left - lines up your text to the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop while you type. o Center - centres the text at the tab stop position. o Right - lines up your text to the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop while you type. To delete tab stops from the list select a tab stop and click the Remove or Remove All button. Edit a Text Art style Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar.· Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size etc. · Change the font fill and stroke. The available options are the same as the ones for autoshapes. · Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of the text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle. Insert symbols and characters During working process you may need to insert a symbol which is not on your keyboard. To insert such symbols into your document, use the Insert symbol option and follow these simple steps: · place the cursor at the location where a special symbol should be inserted, · switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar,· click the Symbol, · The Symbol dialog box will appear and you will be able to select the appropriate symbol, · use the Range section to quickly find the necessary symbol. All symbols are divided into specific groups, for example, select ''Currency Symbols'' if you want to insert a currency character. If this character is not in the set, select a different font. Many of them also have characters that differ from the standard set. Or enter the Unicode hex value of the required symbol in the Unicode hex value field. This code can be found in the Character map. You can also use the Special characters tab to choose a special character from the list.The previously used symbols are also displayed in the Recently used symbols field, · click Insert. The selected character will be added to the document. Insert ASCII symbols The ASCII table is also used to add characters. To do this, hold down the ALT key and use the numeric keypad to enter the character code. Note: be sure to use the numeric keypad, not the numbers on the main keyboard. To enable the numeric keypad, press the Num Lock key. For example, to add a paragraph character (§), press and hold down ALT while typing 789, and then release the ALT key. Insert symbols using Unicode table Additional characters and symbols can also be found in the Windows symbol table. To open this table, do one of the following: · either write ''Character table'' in the Search field and open it, · or simultaneously press Win + R and then type charmap.exe in the window below and click OK.In the opened Character Map, select one of the Character sets, Groups, and Fonts. Next, click on the necessary characters, copy them to the clipboard, and paste in the right place of the document. Manipulate objects You can resize, move, rotate and arrange autoshapes, images and charts inserted into your worksheet. Resize objects To change the size of an autoshape/image/chart, drag small squares situated on the edges of the object. To maintain the original proportions of the selected object while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. Note: to resize the inserted chart or image you can also use the right sidebar that will be activated once you select the necessary object. To open it, click the Chart settings or the Image settings icon to the right.Move objects To change the position of an autoshape/image/chart, use the Arrow icon that appears after hovering the mouse cursor over the object. Drag the object to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. To move the object by one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. To move the object strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging. Rotate objects To manually rotate the autoshape/image, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. To rotate a shape or image by 90 degrees counterclockwise/clockwise or flip the object horizontally/vertically you can use the Rotation section of the right sidebar that will be activated once you select the necessary object. To open it, click the Shape settings icon or the Image settings icon to the right. Click one of the buttons: · to rotate the object by 90 degrees counterclockwise · to rotate the object by 90 degrees clockwise · to flip the object horizontally (left to right) · to flip the object vertically (upside down) It''s also possible to right-click the image or shape, choose the Rotate option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available rotation options. To rotate a shape or image by an exactly specified angle, click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar and use the Rotation tab of the Advanced Settings window. Specify the necessary value measured in degrees in the Angle field and click OK. Reshape autoshapes When modifying some shapes, for example Figured arrows or Callouts, the yellow diamond- shaped icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow.Align objects To align two or more selected objects in relation to each other, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the objects with the mouse, then click the Align icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary alignment type from the list: · Align Left - to align objects relative to each other to the left edge of the leftmost object, · Align Center - to align objects relative to each other in the center, · Align Right - to align objects relative to each other to the right edge of the rightmost object, · Align Top - to align objects relative to each other to the top edge of the topmost object, · Align Middle - to align objects relative to each other in the middle, · Align Bottom - to align objects relative to each other to the bottom edge of the bottommost object. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available alignment options. Note: the alignment options are disabled if you select less than two objects. Distribute objects To distribute three or more selected objects horizontally or vertically between two outermost selected objects so that there is equal distance between them, click the Align icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary distribution type from the list: · Distribute Horizontally - to distribute objects evenly between the leftmost and rightmost selected objects. · Distribute Vertically - to distribute objects evenly between the topmost and bottommost selected objects. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available distribution options. Note: the distribution options are disabled if you select less than three objects. Group several objects To manipulate several objects at once, you can group them. Hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the objects with the mouse, then click the arrow next to the Group icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the list: · Group - to combine several objects into a group so that they can be simultaneously rotated, moved, resized, aligned, arranged, copied, pasted, formatted like a single object. · Ungroup - to ungroup the selected group of the previously combined objects.Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Arrange option from the contextual menu and then use the Group or Ungroup option. Note: the Group option is disabled if you select less than two objects. The Ungroup option is available only when a group of the previously combined objects is selected. Arrange several objects To arrange the selected object or several objects (e.g. to change their order when several objects overlap each other), you can use the Bring Forward and Send Backward icons on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list. To move the selected object(s) forward, click the arrow next to the Bring Forward icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list: · Bring To Foreground - to move the object(s) in front of all other objects, · Bring Forward - to move the selected object(s) by one level forward as related to other objects. To move the selected object(s) backward, click the arrow next to the Send Backward icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list: · Send To Background - to move the object(s) behind all other objects, · Send Backward - to move the selected object(s) by one level backward as related to other objects. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected object(s), choose the Arrange option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available arrangement options.Math equations Insert equations Spreadsheet Editor allows you to build equations using the built-in templates, edit them, insert special characters (including mathematical operators, Greek letters, accents etc.). Add a new equation To insert an equation from the gallery, 1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 2. click the arrow next to the Equation icon on the top toolbar, 3. in the opened drop-down list, select the equation category you need. The following categories are currently available: Symbols, Fractions, Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Brackets, Functions, Accents, Limits and Logarithms, Operators, Matrices, 4. click the certain symbol/equation in the corresponding set of templates. The selected symbol/equation will be added to the worksheet. The upper left corner of the equation box will coincide with the upper left corner of the currently selected cell, but the equation box can be freely moved, resized or rotated in the sheet. To do that, click on the equation box border (it will be displayed as a solid line) and use corresponding handles. Each equation template represents a set of slots. A slot is a position of each element that makes up the equation. An empty slot (also called as a placeholder) has a dotted outline . You need to fill in all the placeholders specifying the necessary values. Enter values The insertion point specifies where the next character will appear. To position the insertion point precisely, click within a placeholder and use the keyboard arrows to move the insertion point by one character left/right. Once the insertion point is positioned, you can fill in the placeholder:· enter the desired numeric/literal value using the keyboard, · insert a special character using the Symbols palette from the Equationmenu on the Insert tab of the top toolbar or typing them from the keyboard, · add another equation template from the palette to create a complex nested equation. The size of the primary equation will be automatically adjusted to fit its content. The size of the nested equation elements depends on the primary equation placeholder size, but it cannot be smaller than the sub-subscript size. To add some new equation elements, you can also use the right-click menu options: · To add a new argument that goes before or after the existing one within Brackets, you can right-click on the existing argument and select the Insert argument before/after option from the menu. · To add a new equation within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group, you can right-click on an empty placeholder or entered equation within it and select the Insert equation before/after option from the menu. · To add a new row or a column in a Matrix, you can right-click on a placeholder within it, select the Insert option from the menu, then select Row Above/Below or Column Left/Right. Note: currently, equations cannot be entered using the linear format, i.e. \sqrt(4&x^3). When entering the values of the mathematical expressions, you do not need to use Spacebar because the spaces between the characters and signs of operations are set automatically. If the equation is too long and does not fit a single line within the equation box, automatic line breaking occurs while you type. You can also insert a line break in a specific position by right- clicking on a mathematical operator and selecting the Insert manual break option from the menu. The selected operator will start a new line. To delete the added manual line break, right- click on the mathematical operator that starts a new line and select the Delete manual break option. Format equations By default, the equation within the equation box is horizontally centered and vertically aligned to the top of the equation box. To change its horizontal/vertical alignment, put the cursor within the equation box (the equation box borders will be displayed as dashed lines) and use the corresponding icons at the top toolbar.To increase or decrease the equation font size, click anywhere within the equation box and use the Increment font size and Decrement font size buttons on the Home tab of the top toolbar or select the necessary font size from the list. All the equation elements will change correspondingly. The letters within the equation are italicized by default. If necessary, you can change the font style (bold, italic, strikeout) or color for a whole equation or its part. The underlined style can be applied to the entire equation only, not to individual characters. Select the necessary part of the equation by clicking and dragging. The selected part will be highlighted blue. Then use the necessary buttons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to format the selection. For example, you can remove the italic format for ordinary words that are not variables or constants. To modify some equation elements, you can also use the right-click menu options: · To change the Fractions format, you can right-click on a fraction and select the Change to skewed/linear/stacked fraction option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected fraction type). · To change the Scripts position relating to text, you can right-click on the equation that includes scripts and select the Scripts before/after text option from the menu. · To change the argument size for Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Limits and Logarithms, Operators as well as for overbraces/underbraces and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the argument you want to change and select the Increase/Decrease argument size option from the menu. · To specify whether an empty degree placeholder should be displayed or not for a Radical, you can right-click on the radical and select the Hide/Show degree option from the menu. · To specify whether an empty limit placeholder should be displayed or not for an Integral or Large Operator, you can right-click on the equation and select the Hide/Show top/bottom limit option from the menu. · To change the limits position relating to the integral or operator sign for Integrals or Large Operators, you can right-click on the equation and select the Change limits location option from the menu. The limits can be displayed to the right of the operator sign (as subscripts and superscripts) or directly above and below the operator sign. · To change the limits position relating to text for Limits and Logarithms and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Limit over/under text option from the menu.· To choose which of the Brackets should be displayed, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Hide/Show opening/closing bracket option from the menu. · To control the Brackets size, you can right-click on the expression within them. The Stretch brackets option is selected by default so that the brackets can grow according to the expression within them, but you can deselect this option to prevent brackets from stretching. When this option is activated, you can also use the Match brackets to argument height option. · To change the character position relating to text for overbraces/underbraces or overbars/underbars from the Accents group, you can right-click on the template and select the Char/Bar over/under text option from the menu. · To choose which borders should be displayed for a Boxed formula from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Border properties option from the menu, then select Hide/Show top/bottom/left/right border or Add/Hide horizontal/vertical/diagonal line. · To specify whether empty placeholders should be displayed or not for a Matrix, you can right-click on it and select the Hide/Show placeholder option from the menu. To align some equation elements, you can use the right-click menu options: · To align equations within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group, you can right-click on an equation, select the Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom. · To align a Matrix vertically, you can right-click on the matrix, select the Matrix Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom. · To align elements within a Matrix column horizontally, you can right-click on a placeholder within the column, select the Column Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Left, Center, or Right. Delete equation elements To delete a part of the equation, select the part you want to delete by dragging the mouse or holding down the Shift key and using the arrow buttons, then press the Delete key on the keyboard. A slot can only be deleted together with the template it belongs to. To delete the entire equation, click on the equation box border (it will be displayed as a solid line) and and press the Delete key on the keyboard. To delete some equation elements, you can also use the right-click menu options:· To delete a Radical, you can right-click on it and select the Delete radical option from the menu. · To delete a Subscript and/or Superscript, you can right-click on the expression that contains them and select the Remove subscript/superscript option from the menu. If the expression contains scripts that go before text, the Remove scripts option is available. · To delete Brackets, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Delete enclosing characters or Delete enclosing characters and separators option from the menu. · If the expression within Brackets inclides more than one argument, you can right-click on the argument you want to delete and select the Delete argument option from the menu. · If Brackets enclose more than one equation (i.e. Cases with several conditions), you can right-click on the equation you want to delete and select the Delete equation option from the menu. · To delete a Limit, you can right-click on it and select the Remove limit option from the menu. · To delete an Accent, you can right-click on it and select the Remove accent character, Delete char or Remove bar option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected accent). · To delete a row or a column of a Matrix, you can right-click on the placeholder within the row/column you need to delete, select the Delete option from the menu, then select Delete Row/Column. Spreadsheet co-editing Collaborative Spreadsheet Editing Spreadsheet Editor offers you the possibility to work on a spreadsheet collaboratively with other users. This feature includes: · simultaneous multi-user access to the edited spreadsheet · visual indication of cells that are being edited by other users · real-time changes display or synchronization of changes with one button click · chat to share ideas concerning particular parts of the spreadsheet · comments containing the description of a task or problem that should be solved (it''s also possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version) Connecting to the online version In the desktop editor, open the Connect to cloud option on the left side of the main program window. Connect to your cloud office specifying your account login and password.Co-editing The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to select one of the two available co-editing modes: · Fast is used by default and shows the changes made by other users in real time. · Strict is selected to hide other user''s changes until you click the Save icon to save your own changes and accept the changes made by others. The mode can be selected in the Advanced Settings. It''s also possible to choose the necessary mode using the Co-editing Mode icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar: Note: when you co-edit a spreadsheet in the Fastmode, the possibility to Undo/Redo the last operation is not available. When a spreadsheet is being edited by several users simultaneously in the Strictmode, the edited cells as well as the tab of the sheet where these cells are situated are marked with dashed lines of different colors. By hovering the mouse cursor over one of the edited cells, the name of the user who is editing it at the moment is displayed. The Fastmode will show the actions and the names of the co-editors when they are editing the text. The number of users who are working on the current spreadsheet is specified on the right side of the editor header - . If you want to see who exactly is editing the file now, you can click this icon or open the Chat panel with the full list of the users. When no users are viewing or editing the file, the icon in the editor header will look like allowing you to manage the users who have access to the file right from the spreadsheet: invite new users giving them permissions to edit, read or comment the spreadsheet, or deny some users access rights to the file. Click this icon to manage the access to the file; this can be done both when there are no other users who view or co-edit the spreadsheet at the moment and when there are other users and the icon looks like . It''s also possible to set access rights using the Sharing icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. As soon as one of the users saves his/her changes by clicking the icon, the others will see a note in the upper left corner stating that they have updates. To save the changes you made, so that other users can view them, and get the updates saved by your co-editors, click the icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar.Anonymous Portal users who are not registered and do not have a profile are considered to be anonymous, although they still can collaborate on documents. To have a name assigned to them, the anonymous user should enter a name they prefer in the corresponding field appearing in the right top corner of the screen when they open the document for the first time. Activate the “Don’t ask me again” checkbox to preserve the name. Chat You can use this tool to coordinate the co-editing process on-the-fly, for example, to arrange tasks with your collaborators, etc. The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the spreadsheet content, it is better to use comments which are stored until they are deleted. To access the chat and leave a message for other users, 1. click the icon on the left sidebar, or switch to the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Chat button, 2. enter your text into the corresponding field below, 3. press the Send button. All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven''t read yet, the chat icon will look like this - . To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon once again. Comments It''s possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version. To leave a comment, 1. select a cell where you think there is an error or problem, 2. switch to the Insert or Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Comment button, or use the Comments icon on the left sidebar to open the Comments panel and clickthe Add Comment to Document link, or right-click within the selected cell and select the Add Сomment option from the menu, 3. enter the needed text, 4. click the Add Comment/Add button. The comment will be seen on the panel on the left. The orange triangle will appear in the upper right corner of the cell you commented. If you need to disable this feature, click the File tab on the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option and uncheck the Turn on display of the comments box. In this case, the commented cells will be marked only if you click the Comments icon. If you are using the Strict co-editing mode, new comments added by other users will become visible only after you click the icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar. To view the comment, just click within the cell. You or any other user can answer to the added comment asking questions or reporting on the work he/she has done. For this purpose, use the Add Reply link, type in your reply text in the entry field and press the Reply button. You can manage the added comments using the icons in the comment balloon or on the Comments panel on the left: · edit the currently selected by clicking the icon, · delete the currently selected by clicking the icon, · close the currently selected discussion by clicking the icon if the task or problem you stated in your comment was solved, after that the discussion you opened with your comment gets the resolved status. To open it again, click the icon. If you want to hide resolved comments, click the File tab on the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, uncheck the Turn on display of the resolved comments box and click Apply. In this case the resolved comments will be highlighted only if you click the icon. Adding mentions When entering comments, you can use thementions feature that allows you to attract somebody''s attention to the comment and send a notification to the mentioned user via email and Talk. To add a mention enter the "+" or "@" sign anywhere in the comment text - a list of the portal users will open. To simplify the search process, you can start typing the required name in the comment field - the user list will change while you type. Select the necessary person from the list. If the file has not been shared with the mentioned user yet, the Sharing Settings window will open. The Read only access type is selected by default. Change it if necessary and click OK. The mentioned user will receive an email notification that he/she has been mentioned in a comment. If the file has been shared, the user will also receive a corresponding notification. To remove comments,1. click the Remove button on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the necessary option from the menu: · Remove Current Comments - to remove the currently selected comment. If some replies have been added to the comment, all its replies will be removed as well. · Remove My Comments - to remove comments you added without removing comments added by other users. If some replies have been added to your comment, all its replies will be removed as well. · Remove All Comments - to remove all the comments in the spreadsheet that you and other users added. To close the panel with comments, click the Comments icon on the left sidebar once again. Manage sheet view presets Note: this feature is available in the paid version only starting from ONLYOFFICE Docs v. 6.1. The ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor offers a sheet viewmanager for view presets that are based on the applied filters. Now you can save the required filtering parameters as a view preset and use it afterwards together with your colleagues as well as create several presets and switch among them effortlessly. If you are collaborating on a spreadsheet, create individual view presets and continue working with the filters you need without being disrupted by other co-editors. Creating a new sheet view preset Since a view preset is designed to save customized filtering parameters, first you need to apply the said parameters to the sheet. There are two ways to create a new sheet view preset. You can either · go to the View tab and click the Sheet View icon, · choose the View manager option from the drop-down menu, · click the New button in the opened Sheet View Manager window, · specify the name of the sheet view preset, or · click the New button on the View tab located at the top toolbar. The preset will be created under a default name “View1/2/3...”. To change the name, go to the Sheet View Manager, select the required preset, and click Rename. Click Go to view to activate the created view preset. Switching among sheet view presets 1. Go to the View tab and click the Sheet View icon. 2. Choose the View manager option from the drop-down menu.3. Select the sheet view preset you want to activate in the Sheet views field. 4. Click Go to view to switch to the selected preset. To exit the current sheet view preset, Close icon on the View tab located at the top toolbar. Managing sheet view presets 1. Go to the View tab and click the Sheet View icon. 2. Choose the View manager option from the drop-down menu. 3. Select the sheet view preset you want to edit in the opened Sheet View Manager window. 4. Choose one of the editing options: · Rename to rename the selected preset, · Duplicate to create a copy of the selected preset, · Delete to delete the selected preset. 5. Click Go to view to activate the selected preset. Plugins Edit an image ONLYOFFICE comes with a very powerful photo editor, that allows you to adjust the image with filters and make all kinds of annotations. 1. Select an image in your spreadsheet. 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Photo Editor. You are now in the editing environment. · Below the image you will find the following checkboxes and slider filters: o Grayscale, Sepia, Sepia 2, Blur, Emboss, Invert, Sharpen; o Remove White (Threshhold, Distance), Gradient transparency, Brightness, Noise, Pixelate, Color Filter; o Tint,Multiply, Blend. · Below the filters you will find buttons for o Undo, Redo and Resetting; o Delete, Delete all; o Crop (Custom, Square, 3:2, 4:3, 5:4, 7:5, 16:9); o Flip (Flip X, Flip Y, Reset); o Rotate (30 degree, -30 degree,Manual rotation slider); o Draw (Free, Straight, Color, Size slider); o Shape (Recrangle, Circle, Triangle, Fill, Stroke, Stroke size); o Icon (Arrows, Stars, Polygon, Location, Heart, Bubble, Custom icon, Color); o Text (Bold, Italic, Underline, Left, Center, Right, Color, Text size);o Mask. Feel free to try all of these and remember you can always undo them. 3. When finished, click the OK button. The edited picture is now included in the spreadsheet. Include a video You can include a video in your spreadsheet. It will be shown as an image. By double-clicking the image the video dialog opens. Here you can start the video. 1. Copy the URL of the video you want to include. (the complete address shown in the address line of your browser) 2. Go to your spreadsheet and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the video. 3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose YouTube. 4. Paste the URL and click OK. 5. Check if it is the correct video and click the OK button below the video. The video is now included in your spreadsheet. Insert highlighted code You can embed highlighted code with the already adjusted style in accordance with the programming language and coloring style of the program you have chosen. 1. Go to your spreadsheet and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the code. 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Highlight code. 3. Specify the programming Language. 4. Select a Style of the code so that it appears as if it were open in this program. 5. Specify if you want to replace tabs with spaces. 6. Choose Background color. To do this, manually move the cursor over the palette or insert the RBG/HSL/HEX value. 7. Click OK to insert the code. Translate text You can translate your spreadsheet from and to numerous languages. 1. Select the text that you want to translate. 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left.3. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The text will be translated to the required language. Changing the language of your result: 1. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The translation will change immediately. Replace a word by a synonym If you are using the same word multiple times, or a word is just not quite the word you are looking for, ONLYOFFICE let you look up synonyms. It will show you the antonyms too. 1. Select the word in your spreadsheet. 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Thesaurus. 3. The synonyms and antonyms will show up in the left sidebar. 4. Click a word to replace the word in your spreadsheet. Tools and settings View file information To access the detailed information about the currently edited spreadsheet, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Spreadsheet Info option. General Information The spreadsheet information includes a number of file properties which describe the spreadsheet. Some of these properties are updated automatically, and some of them can be edited. · Location - the folder in the Documentsmodule where the file is stored. Owner - the name of the user who has created the file. Uploaded - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the online version only. · Title, Subject, Comment - these properties allow you to simplify the classification of your documents. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields. · Last Modified - the date and time when the file was last modified. · Last Modified By - the name of the user who has made the latest change to the spreadsheet if the spreadsheet has been shared and it can be edited by several users. · Application - the application the spreadsheet was created with. · Author - the person who has created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author.If you changed the file properties, click the Apply button to apply the changes. Note: The Online Editors allow you to change the spreadsheet title directly from the editor interface. To do that, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Rename... option, then enter the necessary File name in the opened window and click OK. Permission Information In the online version, you can view the information about permissions assigned to the files stored in the cloud. Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To find out who has the rights to view or edit the spreadsheet, select the Access Rights... option on the left sidebar. You can also change currently selected access rights by clicking the Change access rights button in the Persons who have rights section. To close the File pane and return to your spreadsheet, select the Close Menu option. Scale a worksheet If you want to fit an entire spreadsheet on one page to print it, you can use the Scale to Fit function. This function helps scale data on the specified number of pages. To do so, follow these simple steps: · on the top toolbar, enter the Layout tab and select the Scale to fit function, o in the Height section select 1 page and setWidth on Auto to print all sheets on one page. The scale value will be changed automatically. This value is displayed in the Scale section; o you can also change the scale value manually. To do this, set the Height andWidth parameters to Auto and use the «+» and «-» buttons to change the scale of the worksheet. The borders of the printing page will be covered with dashed lines in the spreadsheet, · on the File tab, click Print, or use the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl + P and adjust the print settings in the opened window. For example, if there are many columns in a sheet, itmight be useful to change the Page Orientation to Portrait. Or print the pre- selected cell range. Note: keep in mind, however, that the printout may be difficult to read because the editor shrinks the data to fit. Save/print/download your spreadsheet Saving By default, the online Spreadsheet Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you are working on it preventing your data from loss if the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the Fastmode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strictmode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page.To save your current spreadsheet manually in the current format and location, · click the Save icon on the left side of the editor header, or · use the Ctrl+S key combination, or · click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. Note: in the desktop version, to prevent data loss if the program closes unexpectedly, you can turn on the Autorecover option on the Advanced Settings page. In the desktop version, you can save the spreadsheet with another name, in a new location or format, 1. click the File tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the Save as... option, 3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, PDFA. You can also choose the Spreadsheet template (XLTX or OTS) option. Downloading In the online version, you can download the resulting spreadsheet onto your computer hard disk drive, 1. click the File tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the Download as... option, 3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS. Note: if you select the CSV format, all features (font formatting, formulas etc.) except the plain text will not be preserved in the CSV file. If you continue saving, the Choose CSV Options window will open. By default, Unicode (UTF-8) is used as the Encoding type. The default Delimiter is comma (,), but the following options are also available: semicolon (;), colon (:), Tab, Space and Other (this option allows you to set a custom delimiter character). Saving a copy In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal, 1. click the File tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the Save Copy as... option, 3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS, 4. select a location of the file on the portal and press Save. Printing To print out the current spreadsheet, · click the Print icon on the left side of the editor header, or· use the Ctrl+P key combination, or · click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. The Print Settings window will open, and you will be able to change the default print settings. Click the Show Details button at the bottom of the window to display all the parameters. Note: you can also adjust the print settings on the Advanced Settings... page: click the File tab of the top toolbar and follow Advanced Settings... >> Page Settings. Some of these settings (pageMargins, Orientation, Size, Print Area as well as Scale to Fit) are also available on the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Here you can adjust the following parameters: · Print Range - specify what to print: the whole Current Sheet, All Sheets of your spreadsheet or previously selected range of cells (Selection), If you previously set a constant print area but want to print the entire sheet, check the Ignore Print Area box.· Sheet Settings - specify individual print settings for each separate sheet, if you have selected the All Sheets option in the Print Range drop-down list, · Page Size - select one of the available sizes from the drop-down list, · Page Orientation - choose the Portrait option if you wish to print vertically on the page, or use the Landscape option to print horizontally, · Scaling - if you do not want some columns or rows to be printed on the second page, you can shrink sheet contents to fit it on one page by selecting the corresponding option: Fit Sheet on One Page, Fit All Columns on One Page or Fit All Rows on One Page. Leave the Actual Size option to print the sheet without adjusting. If you choose the Custom Options item from the menu, the Scale Settings window will open: 1. Fit To: allows you to select the necessary number of pages you want to fit the printed worksheet to. Select the necessary number of pages from theWidth and Height lists. 2. Scale To: allows you to enlarge or reduce the scale of the worksheet to fit printed pages by manually specifying the percentage of normal size. · Print titles - if you want to print row or column titles on every page, use Repeat rows at top or Repeat columns at left and select one of the available options from the drop- down list: repeat elements in the selected range, maintain frozen rows, repeat the first row/column only. · Margins - specify the distance between the worksheet data and the edges of the printed page changing the default sizes in the Top, Bottom, Left and Right fields, · Print - specify the worksheet elements to print by checking the corresponding boxes: Print Gridlines and Print Row and Column Headings. In the desktop version, the file will be printed directly. In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing.Setting up the print area If you want to print the selected cell range only instead of the entire worksheet, you can use the Selection option from the Print Range drop-down list. When the workbook is saved, this setting is not saved, it is intended for single use. If a cell range should be printed frequently, you can set a constant print area on the worksheet. When the workbook is saved, the print area is also saved, it can be used when you open the spreadsheet next time. It''s also possible to set several constant print areas in a sheet, in this case each area will be printed on a separate page. To set the print area: 1. select the necessary cell range on the worksheet. To select multiple cell ranges, hold down the Ctrl key, 2. switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar, 3. click the arrow next to the Print Area button and select the Set Print Area option. The created print area is saved when the workbook is saved. When you open the file next time, the specified print area will be printed. Note: when you create a print area, a Print_Area named range is also automatically created, which is displayed in the Name Manager. To highlight the borders of all the print areas on the current worksheet, you can click the arrow in the name box located to the left of the the formula bar and select the Print_Area name from the name list. To add cells to the print area: 1. open the necessary worksheet where the print area is added, 2. select the necessary cell range on the worksheet, 3. switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar, 4. click the arrow next to the Print Area button and select the Add to Print Area option. A new print area will be added. Each print area will be printed on a separate page. To remove the print area: 1. open the necessary worksheet where the print area is added, 2. switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar, 3. click the arrow next to the Print Area button and select the Clear Print Area option. All the existing print areas in this sheet will be removed. Then the entire sheet will be printed.Advanced Settings of the Spreadsheet Editor The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to change its general advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings... option. You can also click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select the Advanced settings option. The General advanced settings are: · Commenting Display is used to turn on/off the live commenting option: o Turn on display of the comments - if you disable this feature, the commented cells will be marked in the sheet only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. o Turn on display of the resolved comments - this feature is disabled by default to hide the resolved comments in the sheet. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display the resolved comments in the sheet. · Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes made during the editing process. · Autorecover - is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows you to automatically recover spreadsheets if the program closes unexpectedly. · Reference Style is used to turn on/off the R1C1 reference style. By default, this option is disabled and the A1 reference style is used. When the A1 reference style is used, columns are designated by letters, and rows are designated by numbers. If you select the cell located in row 3 and column 2, its address displayed in the box to the left of the the formula bar looks like this: B3. If the R1C1 reference style is enabled, both rows and columns are designated by numbers. If you select the cell at the intersection of row 3 and column 2, its address will look like this: R3C2. Letter R indicates the row number and letter C indicates the column number. In case you refer to other cells using the R1C1 reference style, the reference to a target cell is formed based on the distance from an active cell. For example, when you select the cell in row 5 and column 1 and refer to the cell in row 3 and column 2, the reference is R[-2]C[1]. The numbers in square brackets designate the position of the cell relative to the current cell position, i.e. the target cell is 2 rows up and 1 column to the right of the active cell. If you select the cell in row 1 and column 2 and refer to the same cell in row 3and column 2, the reference is R[2]C, i.e. the target cell is 2 rows down from the active cell and in the same column. · Co-editing Mode is used to select how the changes made during the co-editing are displayed: o By default, the Fastmode is selected, and the co-authors will see all the changes in real time as soon as they are made by others. o If you prefer not to see the changes made by other users (so that they do not disturb you), select the Strictmode, and all the changes will be shown only after you click the Save icon, and you will be informed that there are changes by other users. · Interface theme is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface. o Light color scheme incorporates standard green, white, and light-gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during daytime. o Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard green, white, and light-gray colors. o Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark-gray, and light-gray colors suitable for working during nighttime. · Default Zoom Value is used to set the default zoom value by selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 200%. · Font Hinting is used to specify how a font is displayed in the Spreadsheet Editor: o Choose As Windows to display fonts in the same manner as on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. o Choose As OS if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. o Choose Native to display the text with hinting embedded into the font files. o Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue with the enabled hardware acceleration in the Google Chrome browser occurs. The Spreadsheet Editor has two cache modes: 1. In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. 2. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in thispicture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies two above mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: o When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. o When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. · Unit of Measurement is used to specify what units are used for measuring elements parameters such as width, height, spacing, margins etc. You can select the Centimeter, Point, or Inch option. · Formula Language is used to select the language for displaying and entering formula names. · Regional Settings is used to select the default display format for currency and date and time. · Separator is used to specify the characters that you want to use as separators for decimals and thousands. The Use separators based on regional settings option is selected by default. If you want to use custom separators, uncheck this box and enter the necessary characters in the Decimal separator and Thousands separator fields below. · Cut, copy and paste - used to show the Paste Options button when content is pasted. Check the box to enable this feature. · Macros Settings - used to set macros display with a notification. o Choose Disable all to disable all macros within the spreadsheet; o Show notification to receive notifications about macros within the spreadsheet; o Enable all to automatically run all macros within the spreadsheet. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button. View Settings and Navigation Tools To help you view and select cells in large spreadsheets, the Spreadsheet Editor offers several tools: adjustable bars, scrollbars, sheet navigation buttons, sheet tabs and zoom. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the spreadsheet, click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options from the View settings drop-down list: · Hide Toolbar - hides the top toolbar with commands while the tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar isdisplayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode, click the View settings icon and click the Hide Toolbar option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time. Note: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. · Hide Formula Bar - hides the bar below the top toolbar which is used to enter and review the formulas and their contents. To show the hidden Formula Bar, click this option once again. Dragging formula bar bottom line to expand it toggles Formula Bar height to show one row. · Hide Headings - hides the column heading at the top and row heading on the left side of the worksheet. To show the hidden Headings, click this option once again. · Hide Gridlines - hides the lines around the cells. To show the hidden Gridlines, click this option once again. · Freeze Panes - freezes all the rows above the active cell and all the columns to the left of the active cell so that they remain visible when you scroll the spreadsheet to the right or down. To unfreeze the panes, just click this option once again or right-click anywhere within the worksheet and select the Unfreeze Panes option from the menu. · Show Frozen Panes Shadow - shows that columns and/or rows are frozen (a subtle line appears). The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object (e.g. image, chart, shape) and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. You can also change the size of the opened Comments or Chat panel using the simple drag- and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the sidebar width. To restore its original width, move the border to the left.Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your spreadsheet, use the following tools: The Scrollbars (at the bottom or on the right side) are used to scroll up/down and left/right the current sheet. To navigate a spreadsheet using the scrollbars: · click the up/down or right/left arrows on the scrollbars; · drag the scroll box; · click any area to the left/right or above/below the scroll box on the scrollbar. You can also use themouse scroll wheel to scroll your spreadsheet up or down. The Sheet Navigation buttons are situated in the left lower corner and are used to scroll the sheet list to the right/left and navigate among the sheet tabs. · click the Scroll to first sheet button to scroll the sheet list to the first sheet tab of the current spreadsheet; · click the Scroll sheet list left button to scroll the sheet list of the current spreadsheet to the left; · click the Scroll sheet list right button to scroll the sheet list of the current spreadsheet to the right; · click the Scroll to last sheet button to scroll the sheet list to the last sheet tab of the current spreadsheet. To activate the appropriate sheet, click its Sheet Tab at the bottom next to the Sheet Navigation buttons. The Zoom buttons are situated in the lower right corner and are used to zoom in and out of the current sheet. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200%) or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. The Zoom settings are also available in the View settings drop-down list. Search and Replace Functions To search for the required characters, words or phrases used in the current spreadsheet, click the Search icon situated on the left sidebar or use the Ctrl+F key combination. If you want to search for/replace some values only within a certain area in the current sheet, select the necessary cell range and then click the Search icon. The Find and Replace window will open:1. Type in your inquiry into the corresponding data entry field. 2. Specify search options clicking the icon next to the data entry field and checking the necesary options: o Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is ''Editor'' and this option is selected, such words as ''editor'' or ''EDITOR'' etc. will not be found). o Entire cell contents - is used to find only the cells that do not contain any other characters besides the ones specified in your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is ''56'' and this option is selected, the cells containing such data as ''0.56'' or ''156'' etc. will not be found). o Highlight results - is used to highlight all found occurrences at once. To disable this option and remove the highlight, click the option once again. o Within - is used to search within the active Sheet only or the wholeWorkbook. If you want to perform a search within the selected area in the sheet, make sure that the Sheet option is selected. o Search - is used to specify the direction that you want to search: to the right by rows or down by columns. o Look in - is used to specify whether you want to search the Value of the cells or their underlying Formulas. 3. Click one of the arrow buttons on the right. The search will be performed either towards the beginning of the worksheet (if you click the button) or towards the end of the worksheet (if you click the button) from the current position. The first occurrence of the required characters in the selected direction will be highlighted. If it is not the word you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next occurrence of the characters you entered. To replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, click the Replace link below the data entry field or use the Ctrl+H key combination. The Find and Replace window will change:1. Type in a new text into the bottom data entry field to replace the existing one. 2. Click the Replace button to replace the currently selected occurrence or the Replace All button to replace all the found occurrences. To hide the replace field, click the Hide Replace link. Spell-checking The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to check the spelling of the text in a certain language and correct mistakes while editing. In the desktop version, it''s also possible to add words into a custom dictionary which is common for all three editors. Click the Spell checking icon on the left sidebar to open the spell checking panel. The upper left cell that contains a misspelled text value will be automatically selected in the current worksheet. The first misspelled word will be displayed in the spell checking field, and the suggested similar words with correct spelling will appear in the field below. Use the Go to the next word button to navigate through misspelled words.Replace misspelled words To replace the currently selected misspelled word with the suggested one, choose one of the suggested similar words spelled correctly and use the Change option: · click the Change button, or · click the downward arrow next to the Change button and select the Change option. The current word will be replaced and you will proceed to the next misspelled word. To quickly replace all the identical words repeated on the worksheet, click the downward arrow next to the Change button and select the Change all option. Ignore words To skip the current word: · click the Ignore button, or · click the downward arrow next to the Ignore button and select the Ignore option. The current word will be skipped, and you will proceed to the next misspelled word. To skip all the identical words repeated in the worksheet, click the downward arrow next to the Ignore button and select the Ignore all option. If the current word is missed in the dictionary, you can add it to the custom dictionary using the Add to Dictionary button on the spell checking panel. This word will not be treated as a mistake next time. This option is available in the desktop version. The Dictionary Language which is used for spell-checking is displayed in the list below. You can change it, if necessary. Once you verify all the words in the worksheet, the Spellcheck has been completemessage will appear on the spell-checking panel. To close the spell-checking panel, click the Spell checking icon on the left sidebar. Change the spell check settings To change the spell-checking settings, go to the spreadsheet editor advanced settings (File tab -> Advanced Settings...) and switch to the Spell checking tab. Here you can adjust the following parameters:· Dictionary language - select one of the available languages from the list. The Dictionary Language on the spell-checking panel will be changed correspondingly. · Ignore words in UPPERCASE - check this option to ignore words written in capital letters, e.g. acronyms like SMB. · Ignore words with numbers - check this option to ignore words containing numbers, e.g. acronyms like B2B. · Proofing - used to automatically replace word or symbol typed in the Replace: box or chosen from the list by a new word or symbol displayed in the By: box. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button. AutoCorrect Features The AutoCorrect features in ONLYOFFICE Docs are used to automatically format text when detected or insert special math symbols by recognizing particular character usage. The available AutoCorrect options are listed in the corresponding dialog box. To access it, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Spell Checking -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options. The AutoCorrect dialog box consists of three tabs: Math Autocorrect, Recognized Functions, and AutoFormat As You Type. Math AutoCorrect When working with equations, you can insert a lot of symbols, accents, and mathematical operation signs typing them on the keyboard instead of choosing a template from the gallery. In the equation editor, place the insertion point within the necessary placeholder, type a math autocorrect code, then press Spacebar. The entered code will be converted into the corresponding symbol, and the space will be eliminated. Note: The codes are case sensitive. You can add, modify, restore, and remove autocorrect entries from the AutoCorrect list. Go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Spell Checking -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options ->Math AutoCorrect.Adding an entry to the AutoCorrect list · Enter the autocorrect code you want to use in the Replace box. · Enter the symbol to be assigned to the code you entered in the By box. · Click the Add button. Modifying an entry on the AutoCorrect list · Select the entry to be modified. · You can change the information in both fields: the code in the Replace box or the symbol in the By box. · Click the Replace button. Removing entries from the AutoCorrect list · Select an entry to remove from the list. · Click the Delete button. To restore the previously deleted entries, select the entry to be restored from the list and click the Restore button. Use the Reset to default button to restore default settings. Any autocorrect entry you added will be removed and the changed ones will be restored to their original values. To disable Math AutoCorrect and to avoid automatic changes and replacements, uncheck the Replace text as you type box.The table below contains all the currently supported codes available in the Spreadsheet Editor. The full list of the supported codes can also be found on the File tab in the Advanced Settings... -> Spell Checking -> Proofing section. Recognized Functions In this tab, you will find the list of math expressions that will be recognized by the Equation editor as functions and therefore will not be automatically italicized. For the list of recognized functions go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Spell Checking -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Recognized Functions. To add an entry to the list of recognized functions, enter the function in the blank field and click the Add button. To remove an entry from the list of recognized functions, select the function to be removed and click the Delete button. To restore the previously deleted entries, select the entry to be restored from the list and click the Restore button. Use the Reset to default button to restore default settings. Any function you added will be removed and the removed ones will be restored. AutoFormat As You Type By default, the editor automatically includes new rows and columns in the formatted table when you enter new data in the row below the table or in the column next to it.If you need to disable auto-formatting presets, uncheck the box for the unnecessary options, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Spell Checking -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> AutoFormat As You Type. Helpful hints About Spreadsheet Editor The Spreadsheet Editor is an online application that allows you to edit spreadsheets directly in your browser. Using the Spreadsheet Editor, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor, print the edited spreadsheets keeping all the formatting details or download them onto your computer hard disk drive as XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS file. To view the current version of the software and licensor details in the online version, click the About icon on the left sidebar. To view the current version of the software and licensor details in the desktop version, select the Aboutmenu item on the left sidebar of the main program window.Supported Formats of Spreadsheets A spreadsheet is a table of data organized in rows and columns. It is most frequently used to store financial information because of its ability to re-calculate the entire sheet automatically after a change to a single cell is made. The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to open, view and edit the most popular spreadsheet file formats. Formats Description View Edit Download XLS File extension for spreadsheet files created by Microsoft Excel + + XLSX Default file extension for spreadsheet files written in Microsoft Office Excel 2007 (or later versions) + + + Excel Open XML Spreadsheet Template Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for XLTX spreadsheet templates. An XLTX template contains + + + formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple spreadsheets with the same formatting ODS File extension for spreadsheet files used by OpenOffice and StarOffice suites, an open standard for spreadsheets + + + OpenDocument Spreadsheet Template OpenDocument file format for spreadsheet templates. An OTS OTS template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and + + + can be used to create multiple spreadsheets with the same formatting Comma Separated Values CSV File format used to store tabular data (numbers and text) + + + in plain-text form Portable Document Format PDF File format used to represent documents regardless of the application software, hardware, and operating + systems used. Portable Document Format / A PDF/A An ISO-standardized version of the Portable Document Format (PDF) specialized for use in the archiving and long- + + term preservation of electronic documents. Keyboard shortcuts For Windows/Linux:Working with Spreadsheet Open the File panel to save, download, print the Open ''File'' current spreadsheet, view its info, create a new panel Alt+F spreadsheet or open an existing one, access the help menu of the Spreadsheet Editor or its advanced settings. Open ''Find and Open the Find and Replace dialog box to start Replace'' dialog Ctrl+F searching for a cell containing the required box characters. Open ''Find and Replace'' dialog Open the Find and Replace dialog box with the box with Ctrl+H replacement field to replace one or more replacement occurrences of the found characters. field Open ''Comments'' Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own panel comment or reply to other users'' comments. Open comment field Alt+H Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open ''Chat'' panel Alt+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save all the changes to the spreadsheet currently Save spreadsheet Ctrl+S edited with the Spreadsheet Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print spreadsheet Ctrl+P Print your spreadsheet with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Open the Download as... panel to save the Download as... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S currently edited spreadsheet to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS. Full screen F11 Switch to the full screen view to fit the Spreadsheet Editor on the screen. Help menu F1 Open the Helpmenu of the Spreadsheet Editor . Open existing Open the standard dialog box on the Open local file (Desktop Ctrl+O file tab in the Desktop Editors that allows you to Editors) select an existing file.Close file (Desktop Tab/Shift+Tab Close the current spreadsheet window in Editors) the Desktop Editors. Element contextual ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the contextual menu of the selected menu element. Reset the ‘Zoom’ Ctrl+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current parameter spreadsheet to a default 100%. Navigation Move one cell up, down, left, ← → ↑ ↓ Outline a cell above/below the currently selected or right one or to the left/to the right of it. Jump to the edge of the current data Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Outline a cell at the edge of the current data region in a worksheet. region Jump to the beginning of Home Outline a cell in the column A of the current row. the row Jump to the beginning of the Ctrl+Home Outline the cell A1. spreadsheet Jump to the End, end of the row Ctrl+→ Outline the last cell of the current row. Jump to the Outline the lower right used cell in the worksheet end of the Ctrl+End situated in the bottommost row with data of the spreadsheet rightmost column with data. If the cursor is in the formula bar, it will be placed to the end of the text. Move to the previous sheet Alt+Page Up Move to the previous sheet in your spreadsheet. Move to the next sheet Alt+Page Down Move to the next sheet in your spreadsheet. Move up one ↑ ro ⇧, Outline the cell above the current one in the same w Shift+↵ Enter column. Move down ↓, Outline the cell below the current one in the sameone row ↵ Enter column. Move left one ← column ⇧, Shift+↹ Tab Outline the previous cell of the current row. Move right one → column ↹, Tab Outline the next cell of the current row. Move down one screen Page Down Move one screen down in the worksheet. Move up one screen Page Up Move one screen up in the worksheet. Zoom In Ctrl++ Zoom in the currently edited spreadsheet. Zoom Out Ctrl+- Zoom out the currently edited spreadsheet. Navigate between controls in ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Navigate between controls to give focus to the next modal or previous control in modal dialogues. dialogues Data Selection Ctrl+A, Select all Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Select the entire worksheet. Spacebar Select column Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Select an entire column in a worksheet. Select row ⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Select an entire row in a worksheet. Select fragment ⇧ Shift+→ ← Select a fragment cell by cell. Select from cursor to beginning of ⇧ Shift+Home Select a fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current row. row Select from cursor to end ⇧ Shift+End Select a fragment from the cursor to the end of the of row current row. Extend the selection to beginning of Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the beginning of the worksheet. worksheetSelect a fragment from the current selected cells to the last used cell in the worksheet (in the Extend the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column selection to the Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End with data). If the cursor is in the formula bar, this last used cell will select all text in the formula bar from the cursor position to the end without affecting the height of the formula bar. Select one cell to the left ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Select one cell to the left in a table. Select one cell to the right ↹ Tab Select one cell to the right in a table. Extend the selection to the nearest ⇧ Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell in Shift+Alt+End, nonblank cell Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ the same row to the right of the active cell. If the next cell is blank, the selection will be extended to to the right the next nonblank cell. Extend the selection to the nearest ⇧ Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell in Shift+Alt+Home, nonblank cell Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← the same row to the left of the active cell. If the next cell is blank, the selection will be extended to the to the left next nonblank cell. Extend the selection to the Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell in nearest nonblank cell Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ↓ the same column up/down from the active cell. If the next cell is blank, the selection will be extended up/down the to the next nonblank cell. column Extend the selection down ⇧ Shift+Page Down Extend the selection to include all the cells one one screen screen down from the active cell. Extend the selection up ⇧ Shift+Page Up Extend the selection to include all the cells one one screen screen up from the active cell. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and PasteCut the the selected data and send them to the computer clipboard memory. The cut data can be Cut C⇧trl+X,Shift+Delete later inserted to another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Send the selected data to the computer clipboard Copy Ctrl+C, memory. The copied data can be later inserted to Ctrl+Insert another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Insert the previously copied/cut data from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor Paste C⇧trl+V,Shift+Insert position. The data can be previously copied from the same worksheet, from another spreadsheet, or from some other program. Data Formatting Make the font of the selected text fragment darker Bold Ctrl+B and heavier than normal or remove the bold formatting. Make the font of the selected text fragment Italic Ctrl+I italicized and slightly slanted or remove italic formatting. Underline Ctrl+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going under the letters or remove underlining. Make the selected text fragment struck out with a Strikeout Ctrl+5 line going through the letters or remove strikeout formatting. Add Hyperlink Ctrl+K Insert a hyperlink to an external website or another worksheet. Edit the active cell and position the insertion point Edit active cell F2 at the end of the cell contents. If editing in a cell is turned off, the insertion point will be moved into the Formula Bar. Data Filtering Enable/Remove Filter Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L Enable a filter for a selected cell range or remove the filter. Format as table template Ctrl+L Apply a table template to a selected cell range.Data Entry Complete cell entry and ↵ Enter Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the move down formula bar, and move to the cell below. Complete cell entry and ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter Complete a cell entry in the selected cell, and move move up to the cell above. Start new line Alt+↵ Enter Start a new line in the same cell. Cancel Esc Cancel an entry in the selected cell or the formula bar. Delete one character to the left in the formula bar Delete to the left ← Backspace or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated. Also removes the content of the active cell. Delete one character to the right in the formula bar Delete to the or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is right Delete activated. Also removes the cell contents (data and formulas) from selected cells without affecting cell formats or comments. Clear cell D e the content (data and formulas) from ←elete, Remov content Backspace selected cells without affecting the cell format or comments. Complete a cell entry and move to the ↹ Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the right. right Complete a cell entry and move to the ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the left . left Open the dialog box for inserting new cells within Insert cells Ctrl+⇧ Shift+= current spreadsheet with an added parameter of a shift to the right, a shift down, inserting an entire row or an entire column. Open the dialog box for deleting cells within current Delete cells Ctrl+⇧ Shift+- spreadsheet with an added parameter of a shift to the left, a shift up, deleting an entire row or an entire column.Insert the current date Ctrl+; Insert the today date within an active cell. Insert the current time Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Insert the current time within an active cell. Insert the Ctrl+; then ␣ current date Spacebar then Ctrl+⇧ Insert the current date and time within an active and time Shift+; cell. Functions Insert function ⇧ Shift+F3 Open the dialog box for inserting a new function by choosing from the provided list. SUM function Alt+= Insert the SUM function into the selected cell. Open drop- down list Alt+↓ Open a selected drop-down list. Open contextual ≣Menu Open a contextual menu for the selected cell or cell menu range. Recalculate functions F9 Recalculate the entire workbook. Recalculate functions ⇧ Shift+F9 Recalculate the current worksheet. Data Formats Open the ''Number Format'' dialog Ctrl+1 Open the Number Format dialog box. box Apply the General format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ Apply the General number format. Apply the Currency Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ Apply the Currency format with two decimal places format (negative numbers in parentheses). Apply the Percentage Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% Apply the Percentage format with no decimal format places. Apply the Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ Apply the Exponential number format with twoExponential decimal places. format Apply the Date format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# Apply the Date format with the day, month, and year. Apply the Time format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ Apply the Time format with the hour and minute, and AM or PM. Apply the Ap e Number format with two decimal places, Number Ctrl+⇧ ply th Shift+! thousands separator, and minus sign (-) for format negative values. Modifying Objects Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree ⇧ Shift + drag (when Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree rotation rotating) increments. Maintain ⇧ Shift + drag (when Maintain the proportions of the selected object proportions resizing) when resizing. Draw straight ⇧ Shift + drag (when line or arrow drawing Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or lines/arrows) arrow. Movement by one-pixel Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows increments to move the selected object by one pixel at a time. For Mac OS: Working with Spreadsheet Open the File panel to save, download, print the Open ''File'' current spreadsheet, view its info, create a new panel ⌥ Option+F spreadsheet or open an existing one, access the help menu of the Spreadsheet Editor or its advanced settings. Open ''Find and Replace'' dialog ^ e Find and Replace dialog box to start ⌘Ctrl+F, Open th Cmd+F searching for a cell containing the required box characters. Open ''Find and ^ Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace dialog box with theReplace'' dialog replacement field to replace one or more box with occurrences of the found characters. replacement field Open ''Comments'' ^ trl+⇧ pane ⌘C ⇧Shift+H, Open the Comments panel to add your own l Cmd+ Shift+H comment or reply to other users'' comments. Open comment y field where you can add the text field ⌥ Option+H Open a data entr of your comment. Open ''Chat'' panel ⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save all the changes to the spreadsheet currently Save ^ spreadsheet ⌘Ctrl+S, edited with the Spreadsheet Editor. The active file Cmd+S will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print ^ trl+P, Print your spreadsheet with one of the available spreadsheet ⌘CCmd+P printers or save it to a file. Open the Download as... panel to save the Download as... ^⌘Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, currently edited spreadsheet to the computer hard Cmd+⇧ Shift+S disk drive in one of the supported formats: XLSX, PDF, ODS, CSV, XLTX, PDF/A, OTS. Help menu F1 Open the Helpmenu of the Spreadsheet Editor . Close file (Desktop ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Clos Editors) DeetshketcouprrEednittosrpsreadsheet window in the . Element contextual ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the contextual menu of the selected menu element. Reset the ‘Zoom’ ^ Ctrl+0 or⌘ Cmd+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current parameter spreadsheet to a default 100%. Navigation Move one cell up, down, left, ← → ↑ ↓ Outline a cell above/below the currently selected or right one or to the left/to the right of it. Jump to the Outline a cell at the edge of the current data region edge of the ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ in a worksheet.current data region Jump to the beginning of Home Outline a cell in the column A of the current row. the row Jump to the beginning of the ^ Ctrl+Home Outline the cell A1. spreadsheet Jump to the E⌘nd,end of the row Cmd+→ Outline the last cell of the current row. Jump to the Outline the lower right used cell in the worksheet end of the ^ Ctrl+End situated in the bottommost row with data of the spreadsheet rightmost column with data. If the cursor is in the formula bar, it will be placed to the end of the text. Move to the previous sheet ⌥ Option+Page Up Move to the previous sheet in your spreadsheet. Move to the ⌥ Option+Page next sheet Down Move to the next sheet in your spreadsheet. Move up one row ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Outline the cell above the current one in the same column. Move down one row ↵ Return Outline the cell below the current one in the same column. Move left one ←⇧, column Shift+↹ Tab Outline the previous cell of the current row. Move right one →↹, column Tab Outline the next cell of the current row. Move down one screen Page Down Move one screen down in the worksheet. Move up one screen Page Up Move one screen up in the worksheet. Zoom In ^⌘Ctrl+=,Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited spreadsheet. Zoom Out ^⌘Ctrl+-,Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited spreadsheet. Navigate ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Navigate between controls to give focus to the nextbetween or previous control in modal dialogues. controls in modal dialogues Data Selection Select all ⌘ Cmd+A Select the entire worksheet. Select column ^ Ctrl+␣ Spacebar Select an entire column in a worksheet. Select row ⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Select an entire row in a worksheet. Select fragment ⇧ Shift+→ ← Select a fragment cell by cell. Select from cursor to beginning of ⇧ Shift+Home Select a fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current row. row Select from cursor to end ⇧ Shift+End Select a fragment from the cursor to the end of the of row current row. Extend the selection to beginning of ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the beginning of the worksheet. worksheet Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the last used cell in the worksheet (in the Extend the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column selection to the ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End with data). If the cursor is in the formula bar, this last used cell will select all text in the formula bar from the cursor position to the end without affecting the height of the formula bar. Select one cell to the left ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Select one cell to the left in a table. Select one cell to the right ↹ Tab Select one cell to the right in a table. Extend the selection to the nearest ⇧ Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell in Shift+⌥ the same row to the right of the active cell. If the nonblank cell Option+End next cell is blank, the selection will be extended to to the right the next nonblank cell.Extend the selection to the nearest ⇧ Ex Shift+⌥ tend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell in the same row to the left of the active cell. If the next nonblank cell Option+Home cell is blank, the selection will be extended to the to the left next nonblank cell. Extend the selection down ⇧ Shift+Page Down Extend the selection to include all the cells one one screen screen down from the active cell. Extend the selection up ⇧ Shift+Page Up Extend the selection to include all the cells one one screen screen up from the active cell. Undo and Redo Undo ⌘ Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo ⌘ Cmd+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut the the selected data and send them to the computer clipboard memory. The cut data can be Cut ⌘ Cmd+X later inserted to another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Send the selected data to the computer clipboard Copy ⌘ Cmd+C memory. The copied data can be later inserted to another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Insert the previously copied/cut data from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor Paste ⌘ Cmd+V position. The data can be previously copied from the same worksheet, from another spreadsheet, or from some other program. Data Formatting Bold ^ Ctrl+B, Make the font of the selected text fragment darker ⌘ Cmd+B and heavier than normal or remove the bold formatting. Italic ⌘^ Ctrl+I, Make the font of the selected text fragment Cmd+I italicized and slightly slanted or remove italicformatting. Underline ^⌘Ctrl+U, Make the selected text fragment underlined with a Cmd+U line going under the letters or remove underlining. selected text fragment struck out with a Strikeout ^⌘Ctrl+5, Make the Cmd+5 line going through the letters or remove strikeout formatting. Add Hyperlink ⌘ Cmd+K Insert a hyperlink to an external website or another worksheet. Edit the active cell and position the insertion point Edit active cell F2 at the end of the cell contents. If editing in a cell is turned off, the insertion point will be moved into the Formula Bar. Data Filtering Enable/Remove ^⌘Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, Enable a filter for a selected cell range or remove Filter Cmd+⇧ Shift+L the filter. Format as table ^⌘Ctrl+L,template Cmd+L Apply a table template to a selected cell range. Data Entry Complete cell entry and ↵ Return Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the move down formula bar, and move to the cell below. Complete cell entry and ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Complete a cell entry in the selected cell, and move move up to the cell above. Cancel Esc Cancel an entry in the selected cell or the formula bar. Delete one character to the left in the formula bar Delete to the or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is left ← Backspace activated. Also removes the content of the active cell. Delete one character to the right in the formula bar Delete to the Delete, or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is right Fn+← Backspace activated. Also removes the cell contents (data and formulas) from selected cells without affecting cell formats or comments.Clear cell Dele he content (data and formulas) from content ← te, Remove t Backspace selected cells without affecting the cell format or comments. Complete a cell entry and move to the ↹ Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the right. right Complete a cell entry and move to the ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the left . left Open the dialog box for inserting new cells within Insert cells Ctrl+⇧ Shift+= current spreadsheet with an added parameter of a shift to the right, a shift down, inserting an entire row or an entire column. Open the dialog box for deleting cells within current Delete cells Ctrl+⇧ Shift+- spreadsheet with an added parameter of a shift to the left, a shift up, deleting an entire row or an entire column. Insert the current date Ctrl+; Insert the today date within an active cell. Insert the current time Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Insert the current time within an active cell. Insert the Ctrl+; then ␣ current date Spacebar then Ctrl+⇧ Insert the current date and time within an active and time Shift+; cell. Functions Insert function ⇧ Shift+F3 Open the dialog box for inserting a new function by choosing from the provided list. SUM function ⌥ Option+= Insert the SUM function into the selected cell. Recalculate functions F9 Recalculate the entire workbook. Recalculate functions ⇧ Shift+F9 Recalculate the current worksheet. Data FormatsOpen the ''Number Format'' dialog ^ Ctrl+1 Open the Number Format dialog box. box Apply the General format ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ Apply the General number format. Apply the Currency ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ Apply the Currency format with two decimal places format (negative numbers in parentheses). Apply the Percentage ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% Apply the Percentage format with no decimal format places. Apply the Exponential ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ Apply the Exponential number format with two format decimal places. Apply the Date format ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# Apply the Date format with the day, month, and year. Apply the Time format ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ Apply the Time format with the hour and minute, and AM or PM. Apply the A y the Number format with two decimal places, Number ^ Ctrl+⇧ ppl Shift+! thousands separator, and minus sign (-) for format negative values. Modifying Objects Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree ⇧ Shift + drag (when Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree rotation rotating) increments. Maintain ⇧ Shift + drag (when Maintain the proportions of the selected object proportions resizing) when resizing. Draw straight ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or line or arrow lines/arrows) arrow.ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor Program Interface IEndtritoodrucing the user interface of the Presentation The Presentation Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs according to their functionality. Main window of the Online Presentation Editor: Main window of the Desktop Presentation Editor:The editor interface consists of the following main elements: 1. The Editor header displays the logo, tabs for all opened presentations with their names and menu tabs. On the left side of the Editor header, the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located. On the right side of the Editor header, along with the user name the following icons are displayed: · Open file location - in the desktop version, it allows opening the folder, where the file is stored, in the File Explorer window. In the online version, it allows opening the folder of the Documentsmodule, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab. · View Settings - allows adjusting the View Settings and accessing the Advanced Settings of the editor. · Manage document access rights - (available in the online version only) allows setting access rights for the documents stored in the cloud. · Mark as favorite - click the star to add a file to favorites as to make it easy to find. The added file is just a shortcut so the file itself remains stored in its original location. Deleting a file from favorites does not remove the file from its original location. · 2. The Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Collaboration, Protection, Plugins.The Copy and Paste options are always available on the left side of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. 3. The Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains the Start slideshow icon, some navigation tools: slide number indicator and zoom buttons. The Status bar also displays some notifications (such as "All changes saved", etc.) and allows setting the text language and enable spell checking. 4. The Left sidebar contains the following icons: o - allows using the Search and Replace tool, o - allows opening the Comments panel, o - (available in the online version only) allows opening the Chat panel, o - (available in the online version only) allows contacting our support team, o - (available in the online version only) allows viewing the information about the program. 5. The Right sidebar allows adjusting additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object on a slide, the corresponding icon is activated on the right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the right sidebar. 6. The horizontal and vertical Rulers help you place objects on a slide and allow you to set up tab stops and paragraph indents within the text boxes. 7. TheWorking area allows viewing the presentation content, entering and editing data. 8. The Scroll bar on the right allows scrolling the presentation up and down. For your convenience, you can hide some components and display them again when necessary. File tab The File tab allows performing some basic file operations. The corresponding window of the Online Presentation Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Presentation Editor:Using this tab, you can: · in the online version, save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), download as (save the document in the selected format to the hard disk drive of your computer), save copy as (save a copy of the document in the selected format to the portal documents), print or rename it, in the desktop version, save the current file keeping the current format and location using the Save option or save the current file under a different name and change its location or format using the Save as option, print the file. · protect the file using a password, change or remove the password (available in the desktop version only); · create a new presentation or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only), · view general information about the presentation or change some file properties, · manage access rights (available in the online version only), · access the Advanced Settings of the editor, · in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File Explorer window. In the online version, open the folder of the Documentsmodule, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab. Home tab The Home tab opens by default when you open a presentation. It allows you to set general slide parameters, format text, insert some objects, align and arrange them. The corresponding window of the Online Presentation Editor:The corresponding window of the Desktop Presentation Editor: Using this tab, you can: · manage slides and start a slideshow, · format text within a text box, · insert text boxes, pictures, shapes, · align and arrange objects on a slide, · copy/clear text formatting, · change a theme, color scheme or slide size. Insert tab The Insert tab allows adding visual objects and comments to your presentation. The corresponding window of the Online Presentation Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Presentation Editor: Using this tab, you can: · insert tables, · insert text boxes and Text Art objects, pictures, shapes, charts, · insert comments and hyperlinks, · insert footers, date and time, slide numbers. · insert equations, symbols, · insert audio and video records stored on the hard disk drive of your computer (available in the desktop version only, not available for Mac OS). Note: to be able to playback video, you''ll need to install codecs, for example, K-Lite.Collaboration tab The Collaboration tab allows collaborating on presentations. In the online version, you can share a file, select a co-editing mode and manage comments. In the commenting mode, you can add and remove comments and use the chat. In the desktop version, you can only manage comments. The corresponding window of the Online Presentation Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Presentation Editor: Using this tab, you can: · specify the sharing settings (available in the online version only), · switch between the Strict and Fast co-editing modes (available in the online version only), · add comments to your presentation and remove them, · open the Chat panel (available in the online version only). Plugins tab The Plugins tab makes it possible to access the advanced editing features using the available third-party components. Here you can also use macros to simplify routine operations. The corresponding window of the Online Presentation Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Presentation Editor:The Settings button allows you to open the window where you can view and manage all installed plugins and add your own ones. TheMacros button allows to open the window where you can create your own macros and run them. Currently, the following plugins are available: · Send allows sending the presentation via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only), · Highlight code allows highlighting the code syntax by selecting the necessary language, style, background color, etc., · Photo Editor allows editing images: cropping, flipping, rotating, drawing lines and shapes, adding icons and text, loading a mask and applying filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc., · Thesaurus allows finding synonyms and antonyms for the selected word and replacing it with the chosen one, · Translator allows translating the selected text into other languages, Note: this plugin doesn''t work in Internet Explorer. · YouTube allows embedding YouTube videos into your presentation. Basic operations Create a new presentation or open an existing one To create a new presentation In the online editor 1. click the File tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the Create New option. In the desktop editor 1. in the main program window, select the Presentationmenu item from the Create new section of the left sidebar - a new file will open in a new tab, 2. when all the necessary changes are made, click the Save icon in the upper left corner or switch to the File tab and choose the Save asmenu item. 3. in the file manager window, select the file location, specify its name, choose the format you want to save the presentation to (PPTX, Presentation template (POTX), ODP, OTP, PDF or PDFA) and click the Save button. To open an existing presentation In the desktop editor 1. in the main program window, select the Open local filemenu item on the left sidebar,2. choose the necessary presentation from the file manager window and click the Open button. You can also right-click the necessary presentation in the file manager window, select the Open with option and choose the necessary application from the menu. If the office documents files are associated with the application, you can also open presentations by double-clicking the file name in the file explorer window. All the directories that you have accessed using the desktop editor will be displayed in the Recent folders list so that you can quickly access them afterwards. Click the necessary folder to select one of the files stored in it. To open a recently edited presentation In the online editor 1. click the File tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the Open Recent... option, 3. choose the presentation you need from the list of recently edited documents. In the desktop editor 1. in the main program window, select the Recent filesmenu item on the left sidebar, 2. choose the presentation you need from the list of recently edited documents. To open the folder where the file is stored in a new browser tab in the online version, in the file explorer window in the desktop version, click the Open file location icon on the right side of the editor header. Alternatively, you can switch to the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Open file location option. Copy/paste data, undo/redo your actions Use basic clipboard operations To cut, copy and paste the selected objects (slides, text passages, autoshapes) in the current presentation or undo/redo your actions, use the corresponding options from the right-click menu, keyboard shortcuts or icons available on any tab of the top toolbar: · Cut – select an object and use the Cut option from the right-click menu to delete the selection and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The cut data can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. · Copy – select an object and use the Copy option from the right-click menu or the Copy icon on the top toolbar to copy the selection to the computer clipboard memory. The copied object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. · Paste – find the place in your presentation where you need to paste the previously copied object and use the Paste option from the right-click menu or the Paste iconon the top toolbar. The object will be inserted to the current cursor position. The object can be previously copied from the same presentation. In the online version, the following key combinations are only used to copy or paste data from/into another presentation or some other program, in the desktop version, both the corresponding buttons/menu options and key combinations can be used for any copy/paste operations: · Ctrl+C key combination for copying; · Ctrl+V key combination for pasting; · Ctrl+X key combination for cutting. Use the Paste Special feature Once the copied data is pasted, the Paste Special button appears next to the inserted text passage/object. Click this button to select the necessary paste option. When pasting text passages, the following options are available: · Use destination theme - allows applying the formatting specified by the theme of the current presentation. This option is used by default. · Keep source formatting - allows keeping the source formatting of the copied text. · Picture - allows pasting the text as an image so that it cannot be edited. · Keep text only - allows pasting the text without its original formatting. When pasting objects (autoshapes, charts, tables), the following options are available: · Use destination theme - allows applying the formatting specified by the theme of the current presentation. This option is used by default. · Picture - allows pasting the object as an image so that it cannot be edited. To enable / disable the automatic appearance of the Paste Special button after pasting, go to the File tab > Advanced Settings... and check / uncheck the Cut, copy and paste checkbox. Use the Undo/Redo operations To undo/redo your actions, use the corresponding icons on the left side of the editor header or keyboard shortcuts: · Undo – use the Undo icon to undo the last operation you performed.· Redo – use the Redo icon to redo the last undone operation. · You can also use the Ctrl+Z key combination for undoing or Ctrl+Y for redoing. Note: when you co-edit a presentation in the Fastmode, the possibility to Redo the last undone operation is not available. Working with slides Manage slides By default, a newly created presentation has one blank Title Slide. You can create new slides, copy a slide to paste it later to another place in the slide list, duplicate slides, move slides to change their order, delete unnecessary slides and mark some slides as hidden. To create a new Title and Content slide: · click the Add Slide icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, or · right-click any slide in the list and select the New Slide option from the contextual menu, or · press the Ctrl+M key combination. To create a new slide with a different layout: 1. click the arrow next to the Add Slide icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, 2. select a slide with the necessary layout from the menu. Note: you can change the layout of the added slide anytime. A new slide will be inserted after the selected one in the list of the existing slides on the left. To duplicate a slide: 1. right-click the necessary slide in the list of the existing slides on the left, 2. select the Duplicate Slide option from the contextual menu. The duplicated slide will be inserted after the selected one in the slide list. To copy a slide: 1. in the list of the existing slides on the left, select the slide you need to copy, 2. press the Ctrl+C key combination, 3. in the slide list, select the slide after which the copied slide should be pasted, 4. press the Ctrl+V key combination. To move an existing slide: 1. left-click the necessary slide in the list of the existing slides on the left,2. without releasing the mouse button, drag it to the necessary place in the list (a horizontal line indicates a new location). To delete an unnecessary slide: 1. right-click the slide you want to delete in the list of the existing slides on the left, 2. select the Delete Slide option from the contextual menu. To mark a slide as hidden: 1. right-click the slide you want to hide in the list of the existing slides on the left, 2. select the Hide Slide option from the contextual menu. The number that corresponds to the hidden slide in the slide list on the left will be crossed out. To display the hidden slide as a regular one in the slide list, click the Hide Slide option once again. Note: use this option if you do not want to demonstrate some slides to your audience, but want to be able to access them if necessary. If you start the slideshow in the Presentermode, you can see all the existing slides in the list on the left, while hidden slides numbers are crossed out. If you wish to show a slide marked as hidden to others, just click it in the slide list on the left - the slide will be displayed. To select all the existing slides at once: 1. right-click any slide in the list of the existing slides on the left, 2. select the Select All option from the contextual menu. To select several slides: 1. hold down the Ctrl key, 2. select the necessary slides by left-clicking them in the list of the existing slides on the left. Set slide parameters To customize your presentation, you can select a theme, color scheme, slide size and orientation for the entire presentation, change the background fill or slide layout for each separate slide, apply transitions between the slides. It''s also possible to add explanatory notes to each slide that can be helpful when demonstrating the presentation in the Presentermode.· Themes allow you to quickly change the presentation design, notably the slides background appearance, predefined fonts for titles and texts and the color scheme that is used for the presentation elements. To select a theme for the presentation, click on the necessary predefined theme from the themes gallery on the right side of the top toolbar on the Home tab. The selected theme will be applied to all the slides if you have not previously selected certain slides to apply the theme to. To change the selected theme for one or more slides, you can right-click the selected slides in the list on the left (or right-click a slide in the editing area), select the Change Theme option from the contextual menu and choose the necessary theme. · Color Schemes affect the predefined colors used for the presentation elements (fonts, lines, fills etc.) and allow you to maintain color consistency throughout the entire presentation. To change a color scheme, click the Change color scheme icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary scheme from the drop-down list. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list and applied to all the slides. · To change the size of all the slides in the presentation, click the Select slide size icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the drop-down list. You can select: o one of the two quick-access presets - Standard (4:3) orWidescreen (16:9), o the Advanced Settings option that opens the Slide Size Settings window where you can select one of the available presets or set a Custom size specifying the desiredWidth and Height values.The available presets are: Standard (4:3), Widescreen (16:9), Widescreen (16:10), Letter Paper (8.5x11 in), Ledger Paper (11x17 in), A3 Paper (297x420 mm), A4 Paper (210x297 mm), B4 (ICO) Paper (250x353 mm), B5 (ICO) Paper (176x250 mm), 35 mm Slides, Overhead, Banner. The Slide Orientationmenu allows changing the currently selected orientation type. The default orientation type is Landscape that can be switched to Portrait. · To change a background fill: 1. in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply the fill to. Or click at any blank space within the currently edited slide in the slide editing area to change the fill type for this separate slide. 2. on the Slide settings tab of the right sidebar, select the necessary option: § Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected slides. § Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the slide with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. § Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the slide background. § Pattern - select this option to fill the slide with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. § No Fill - select this option if you don''t want to use any fill. § Opacity - drag the slider or enter the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. · Transitions help make your presentation more dynamic and keep your audience''s attention. To apply a transition: 1. in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply a transition to, 2. choose a transition in the Effect drop-down list on the Slide settings tab,Note: to open the Slide settings tab, you can click the Slide settings icon on the right or right-click the slide in the slide editing area and select the Slide Settings option from the contextual menu. 3. adjust the transition properties: choose a transition variation, duration and the way to advance slides, 4. click the Apply to All Slides button if you want to apply the same transition to all slides in the presentation. · To change a slide layout: 1. in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply a new layout to, 2. click the Change slide layout icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, 3. select the necessary layout from the menu. Alternatively, you can right-click the necessary slide in the list on the left or in the editing area, select the Change Layout option from the contextual menu and choose the necessary layout. Note: currently, the following layouts are available: Title Slide, Title and Content, Section Header, Two Content, Comparison, Title Only, Blank, Content with Caption, Picture with Caption, Title and Vertical Text, Vertical Title and Text. · To add objects to a slide layout: 1. click the Change slide layout icon and select a layout you want to add an object to, 2. using the Insert tab of the top toolbar, add the necessary object to the slide (image, table, chart, shape), then right-click on this object and select Add to Layout option, 3. on the Home tab, click Change slide layout and apply the changed layout.The selected objects will be added to the current theme''s layout. Note: objects placed on a slide this way cannot be selected, resized, or moved. · To return the slide layout to its original state: 1. in the slide list on the left, select the slides that you want to return to the default state, Note: hold down the Ctrl key and select one slide at a time to select several slides at once, or hold down the Shift key to select all slides from the current to the selected. 2. right-click on one of the slides and select the Reset slide option in the context menu, All text frames and objects located on slides will be reset and situated in accordinance with the slide layout. · To add notes to a slide: 1. in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add a note to, 2. click the Click to add notes caption below the slide editing area, 3. type in the text of your note. Note: you can format the text using the icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. When you start the slideshow in the Presentermode, you will be able to see all the slide notes below the slide preview area.Apply transitions A transition is an effect that appears between two slides when one slide advances to the next one when displayed. You can apply the same transition to all slides or apply different transitions to each separate slide and adjust the transition properties. To apply a transition to a single slide or several selected slides: 1. Select the necessary slide (or several slides in the slide list) you want to apply a transition to. The Slide settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. To open it, click the Slide settings icon on the right. Alternatively, you can right-click a slide in the slide editing area and select the Slide Settings option from the contextual menu. 2. In the Effect drop-down list, select the transition you want to use. The following transitions are available: Fade, Push, Wipe, Split, Uncover, Cover, Clock, Zoom. 3. In the drop-down list below, select one of the available effect options. They define exactly how the effect appears. For example, if the Zoom transition is selected, the Zoom In, Zoom Out and Zoom and Rotate options are available. 4. Specify how long you want the transition to last. In the Duration box, enter or select the necessary time value, measured in seconds. 5. Press the Preview button to view the slide with the applied transition in the slide editing area. 6. Specify how long you want the slide to be displayed until it advances to another one: · Start on click – check this box if you don''t want to restrict the time while the selected slide is displayed. The slide will advance to another one only when you click on it with the mouse. · Delay – use this option if you want the selected slide to be displayed within a specified period of time until it advances to the next one. Check this box and enter or select the necessary time value, measured in seconds. Note: if you check only the Delay box, the slides will advance automatically within a specified time interval. If you check both the Start on click and the Delay boxes and set the delay value, the slides will advance automatically as well, but you will also be able to click a slide to advance from it to the next.To apply a transition to all the slides in your presentation: perform the procedure described above and press the Apply to All Slides button. To delete a transition: select the necessary slide and choose the None option in the Effect list. To delete all transitions: select any slide, choose the None option in the Effect list and press the Apply to All Slides button. Insert footers Footers allow adding some additional info to a slide, such as date and time, slide number, or a text. To insert a footer in a presentation: 1. switch to the Insert tab, 2. click the Edit footer button on the top toolbar, 3. the Footer Settings window will open. Check the data you want to add to the footer. The changes are displayed in the preview window on the right. · check the Date and time box to insert a date or time in the selected format. The selected date will be added to the left field of the slide footer. Specify the necessary data format: o Update automatically - check this radio button if you want to automatically update the date and time according to the current date and time. Then select the necessary date and time Format and Language from the lists. o Fixed - check this radio button if you do not want to automatically update the date and time. · check the Slide number box to insert the current slide number. The slide number will be added in the right field of the slide footer. · check Text in footer box to insert any text. Enter the necessary text in the entry field below. The text will be added in the central field of the slide footer.4. check the Don''t show on the title slide option if necessary, 5. click the Apply to all button to apply changes to all slides or use the Apply button to apply the changes to the current slide only. To quickly insert a date or a slide number to the footer of the selected slide, you can use the Show slide Number and Show Date and Time options on the Slide Settings tab of the right sidebar. In this case, the selected settings will be applied to the current slide only. The date and time or slide number added in such a way can be adjusted later using the Footer Settings window. To edit the added footer, click the Edit footer button on the top toolbar, make the necessary changes in the Footer Settings window, and click the Apply or Apply to All button to save the changes. Insert date and time and slide number into the text box It''s also possible to insert date and time or slide number into the selected text box using the corresponding buttons on the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Insert date and time 1. put the mouse cursor within the text box where you want to insert the date and time, 2. click the Date & Time button on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. select the necessary Language from the list and choose the necessary date and time Format in the Date & Time window,4. if necessary, check the Update automatically box or press the Set as default box to set the selected date and time format as default for the specified language, 5. click the OK button to apply the changes. The date and time will be inserted in the current cursor position. To edit the inserted date and time, 1. select the inserted date and time in the text box, 2. click the Date & Time button on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. choose the necessary format in the Date & Time window, 4. click the OK button. Insert a slide number 1. put the mouse cursor within the text box where you want to insert the slide number, 2. click the Slide Number button on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. check the Slide number box in the Footer Settings window, 4. click the OK button to apply the changes. The slide number will be inserted in the current cursor position. Preview your presentation Start the preview To preview the current presentation, you can:· click the Start slideshow icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar or on the left side of the status bar, or · select a certain slide within the slide list on the left, right-click it and choose the Start Slideshow option from the contextual menu. The preview will start from the currently selected slide. You can also click the arrow next to the Start slideshow icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select one of the available options: · Show from Beginning - to start the preview from the very first slide, · Show from Current slide - to start the preview from the currently selected slide, · Show presenter view - to start the preview in the Presentermode that allows you to show the presentation to your audience without slide notes while viewing the presentation with the slide notes on a different monitor. · Show Settings - to open the settings window that allows you to set only one option: Loop continuously until ''Esc'' is pressed. Check this option if necessary and click OK. If you enable this option, the presentation will be displayed until you press the Escape key, i.e. when the last slide of the presentation is reached, you will be able to go to the first slide again, etc. If you disable this option, once the last slide of the presentation is reached, a black screen will appear indicating that the presentation is finished, and you can exit from the Preview. Use the Preview mode In the Previewmode, you can use the following controls at the bottom left corner: · the Previous slide button allows you to return to the previous slide. · the Pause presentation button allows you to stop previewing. When the button is pressed, it turns into the button. · the Start presentation button allows you to resume previewing. When the button is pressed, it turns into the button. · the Next slide button allows you to advance to the following slide. · the Slide number indicator displays the current slide number as well as the overall number of slides in the presentation. To go to a certain slide in the preview mode, clickon the Slide number indicator, enter the necessary slide number in the opened window and press Enter. · the Full screen button allows you to switch to the full screen mode. · the Exit full screen button allows you to exit the full screen mode. · the Close slideshow button allows you to exit the preview mode. You can also use the keyboard shortcuts to navigate between the slides in the preview mode. Use the Presenter mode Note: in the desktop version, the presenter mode can be activated only if the second monitor is connected. In the Presentermode, you can view your presentations with slide notes in a separate window, while demonstrating it without notes on a different monitor. The notes for each slide are displayed below the slide preview area. To navigate among the slides, you can use the and buttons or click slides in the list on the left. The hidden slide numbers are crossed out in the slide list on the left. If you wish to show a slide marked as hidden to others, just click it in the slide list on the left - the slide will be displayed. You can use the following controls below the slide preview area: · the Timer displays the elapsed time of the presentation in the hh.mm.ss format. · the Pause presentation button allows you to stop previewing. When the button is pressed, it turns into the button. · the Start presentation button allows you to resume previewing. When the button is pressed, it turns into the button. · the Reset button allows to reset the elapsed time of the presentation. · the Previous slide button allows you to return to the previous slide. · the Next slide button allows you to advance to the following slide. · the Slide number indicator displays the current slide number as well as the overall number of slides in the presentation. · the Pointer button allows you to highlight something on the screen when showing the presentation. When this option is enabled, the button looks like this: . To point some objects, hover your mouse pointer over the slide preview area and move the pointer around the slide. The pointer will look the following way: . To disable this option, click the button once again. · the End slideshow button allows you to exit the Presentermode.Text formatting Insert and format your text Insert your text You can add a new text in three different ways: · Add a text passage within the corresponding text placeholder on the slide layout. To do that, just put the cursor within the placeholder and type in your text or paste it using the Ctrl+V key combination instead of the default text. · Add a text passage anywhere on a slide. You can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows you to enter some text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows you to apply some text effects). Depending on the necessary text object type, you can do the following: o to add a text box, click the Text Box icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, then click where you want to insert the text box, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. Note: it''s also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the shape from the Basic Shapes group. o to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added in the center of the slide. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text. · Add a text passage within an autoshape. Select a shape and start typing your text. Click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the slide. The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it). As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame (it has invisible text box borders by default) with text in it and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties. To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key. The text within the text box will also be deleted. Format a text box Select the text box by clicking on its border to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines.· to resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape. · to edit the text box fill, stroke, replace the rectangular box with a different shape, or access the shape advanced settings, click the Shape settings icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options. · to align a text box on the slide, rotate or flip it, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, right-click on the text box border and use the contextual menu options. · to create columns of text within the text box, right-click on the text box border, click the Shape Advanced Settings option and switch to the Columns tab in the Shape - Advanced Settings window. Format the text within the text box Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines. Note: it''s also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to the whole text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected part of the text separately. Align your text within the text box The text is aligned horizontally in four ways: left, right, center or justified. To do that: 1. place the cursor to the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text), 2. drop-down the Horizontal align list on the Home tab of the top toolbar, 3. select the alignment type you would like to apply: o the Align text left option allows you to line up your text on the left side of the text box (the right side remains unaligned). o the Align text center option allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box (the right and the left sides remains unaligned). o the Align text right option allows you to line up your text on the right side of the text box (the left side remains unaligned).o the Justify option allows you to line up your text both on the left and on the right sides of the text box (additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment). Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. The text is aligned vertically in three ways: top, middle or bottom. To do that: 1. place the cursor to the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text), 2. drop-down the Vertical align list on the Home tab of the top toolbar, 3. select the alignment type you would like to apply: o the Align text to the top option allows you to line up your text to the top of the text box. o the Align text to the middle option allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box. o the Align text to the bottom option allows you to line up your text to the bottom of the text box. Change the text direction To Rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (selected by default), Rotate Text Down (used to set a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (used to set a vertical direction, from bottom to top). Adjust font type, size, color and apply decoration styles You can select the font type, its size and color as well as apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the presentation, select it with the mouse or using the keyboard and apply the formatting. Used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available Font ones. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available for use in the desktop version. Used to choose from the preset font size values in the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, Font size 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It''s also possible to manually enter a custom value up to 300 pt in the font size field. Press Enter to confirm. Increment Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time font size the button is pressed. Decrement Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each font size time the button is pressed.Font color Used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. Click the downward arrow next to the icon to select the color. Bold Used to make the font bold giving it a heavier appearance. Italic Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right. Underline Used to make the text underlined with a line going under the letters. Strikeout Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Superscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Set line spacing and change paragraph indents You can set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current and the previous or the following paragraph. To do that, 1. put the cursor within the required paragraph or select several paragraphs with the mouse, 2. use the corresponding fields of the Text settings tab on the right sidebar to achieve the desired results: o Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among three options: at least (sets the minimum line spacing that is needed to fit the largest font or graphic on the line), multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right. o Paragraph Spacing - set the amount of space between paragraphs. § Before - set the amount of space before the paragraph. § After - set the amount of space after the paragraph. Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Line spacing icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the required value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines. To change the paragraph offset from the left side of the text box, put the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse and use the respective icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar: Decrease indent and Increase indent . Adjust paragraph advanced settings To open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, right-click the text and choose the Text Advanced Settings option from the menu. It''s also possible to put the cursor within the required paragraph - the Text settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. Press the Show advanced settings link. The paragraph properties window will be opened: The Indents & Spacing tab allows you to: · change the alignment type for the paragraph text, · change the paragraph indents as related to internal margins of the text box, o Left - set the paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, o Right - set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, o Special - set an indent for the first line of the paragraph: select the corresponding menu item ((none), First line, Hanging) and change the default numeric value specified for First Line or Hanging, · change the paragraph line spacing.You can also use the horizontal ruler to set indents. Select the necessary paragraph(s) and drag the indent markers along the ruler. · First Line Indentmarker is used to set the offset from the left internal margin of the text box for the first line of the paragraph. · Hanging Indentmarker is used to set the offset from the left internal margin of the text box for the second and all the subsequent lines of the paragraph. · Left Indentmarker is used to set the entire paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box. · Right Indentmarker is used to set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box. Note: if you don''t see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them. The Font tab contains the following parameters: · Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. · Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a double line going through the letters. · Superscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. · Subscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. · Small caps is used to make all letters lower case.· All caps is used to make all letters upper case. · Character Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below. The Tab tab allows you to change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the Tab key. · Default Tab is set at 2.54 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary one in the box. · Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. · Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center or Right option from the Alignment drop-down list and press the Specify button. o Left - lines up your text on the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. o Center - centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. o Right - lines up your text on the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker.To delete tab stops from the list, select a tab stop and press the Remove or Remove All button. To set tab stops, you can also use the horizontal ruler: 1. Click the tab selector button in the upper left corner of the working area to choose the necessary tab stop type: Left , Center , Right . 2. Click on the bottom edge of the ruler where you want to place the tab stop. Drag it along the ruler to change its position. To remove the added tab stop, drag it out of the ruler. Note: if you don''t see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them. Edit a Text Art style Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar. · Change the applied text style selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size etc. · Change the font fill and stroke. The available options are the same as the ones for autoshapes. · Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of the text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle.Add hyperlinks To add a hyperlink, 1. place the cursor within the text box where a hyperlink should be added, 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. click the Hyperlink icon on the top toolbar, 4. after that the Hyperlink Settings window will appear where you can specify the hyperlink parameters: · Select a link type you wish to insert: o Use the External Link option and enter a URL in the format http://www.example.com in the Link to field below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to an external website. o Use the Slide In This Presentation option and select one of the options below if you need to add a hyperlink leading to a certain slide in the same presentation. The following options are available: Next Slide, Previous Slide, First Slide, Last Slide, Slide with the specified number.· Display - enter a text that will get clickable and lead to the web address/slide specified in the upper field. · ScreenTip text - enter a text that will become visible in a small pop-up window with a brief note or label pertaining to the hyperlink to be pointed. 5. Click the OK button. To add a hyperlink, you can also use the Ctrl+K key combination or click with the right mouse button where a hyperlink should be added and select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu. Note: it''s also possible to select a character, word or word combination with the mouse or using the keyboard and then open the Hyperlink Settings window as described above. In this case, the Display field will be filled with the text fragment you selected. By hovering the cursor over the added hyperlink, the ScreenTip will appear containing the text you specified. You can follow the link by pressing the CTRL key and clicking the link in your presentation. To edit or delete the added hyperlink, click it with the right mouse button, select the Hyperlink option in the right-click menu and then the action you want to perform - Edit Hyperlink or Remove Hyperlink. Create lists To create a list in your presentation,1. place the cursor where a list should start (this can be a new line or the already entered text), 2. switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, 3. select the list type you would like to start: · Unordered list with markers is created using the Bullets icon situated on the top toolbar · Ordered list with digits or letters is created using the Numbering icon situated at the top toolbar Note: click the downward arrow next to the Bullets or Numbering icon to select how the list is going to look like. 4. now each time you press the Enter key at the end of the line, a new ordered or unordered list item will appear. To stop that, press the Backspace key and continue with the common text paragraph. You can also change the text indentation in the lists and their nesting using the Decrease indent , and Increase indent icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: the additional indentation and spacing parameters can be changed on the right sidebar and in the advanced settings window. To learn more about it, read the Insert and format your text section. Change the list settings To change the bulleted or numbered list settings, such as a bullet type, size and color: 1. click an existing list item or select the text you want to format as a list, 2. click the Bullets or Numbering icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, 3. select the List Settings option, 4. the List Settings window will open. The bulleted list settings window looks like this: The numbered list settings window looks like this:For the bulleted list, you can choose a character used as a bullet, while for the numbered list you can choose what number the list Starts at. The Size and Color options are the same both for the bulleted and numbered lists. · Size - allows you to select the necessary bullet/number size depending on the current size of the text. It can be a value ranging from 25% to 400%. · Color - allows you to select the necessary bullet/number color. You can select one of the theme colors, or standard colors on the palette, or specify a custom color. · Bullet - allows you to select the necessary character used for the list. When you click on the Bullet field, the Symbol window opens, and you can choose one of the available characters. For Bulleted lists, you can also add a new symbol. · Start at - allows you to select the nesessary sequence number a numbered list starts from. 5. click OK to apply the changes and close the settings window. Copy/clear formatting To copy a certain text formatting, 1. select the text passage whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, 2. click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this ), 3. select the text passage you want to apply the same formatting to. To apply the copied formatting to multiple text passages, 1. select the text passage whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, 2. double-click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this and the Copy style icon will remain selected: ),3. select the necessary text passages one by one to apply the same formatting to each of them, 4. to exit this mode, click the Copy style icon once again or press the Esc key on the keyboard. To quickly remove the formatting that you have applied to a text passage, 1. select the text passage which formatting you want to remove, 2. click the Clear style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Operations on objects Insert and format autoshapes Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape to a slide, 1. in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add the autoshape to, 2. click the Shape icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. select one of the available autoshape groups: Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines, 4. click on the necessary autoshape within the selected group, 5. in the slide editing area, place the mouse cursor where you want the shape to be put, Note: you can click and drag to stretch the shape. 6. once the autoshape is added, you can change its size, position and properties. Note: to add a caption within the autoshape, make sure the shape is selected on the slide and start typing your text. The text you add in this way becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it). It''s also possible to add an autoshape to a slide layout. Adjust autoshape settings Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it, click the autoshape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties:· Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: o Color Fill - to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected shape. o Gradient Fill - to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. o Picture or Texture - to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. o Pattern - to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. o No Fill - select this option if you don''t want to use any fill. For more detailed information on these options, please refer to the Fill objects and select colors section. · Stroke - use this section to change the autoshape stroke width, color or type. o To change the stroke width, select one of the available options from the Size drop-down list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Or select the No Line option if you don''t want to use any stroke. o To change the stroke color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. You can use the selected theme color, a standard color or choose a custom color. o To change the stroke type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). · Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons:o to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise o to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise o to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) o to flip the shape vertically (upside down) · Change Autoshape - use this section to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. · Show shadow - check this option to display shape with shadow. To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click the shape and select the Shape Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or left-click it and press the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The shape properties window will be opened: The Size tab allows you to change the autoshapeWidth and/or Height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original autoshape aspect ratio.The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: · Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. · Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). TheWeights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: · Line Style - this option allows specifying the following parameters:o Cap Type - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines, etc.: § Flat - the end points will be flat. § Round - the end points will be rounded. § Square - the end points will be square. o Join Type - this option allows setting the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: § Round - the corner will be rounded. § Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. § Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. · Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows you to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the drop-down lists. The Text Padding tab allows you to change the autoshape Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled.The Columns tab allows adding columns of text within the autoshape specifying the necessary Number of columns (up to 16) and Spacing between columns. Once you click OK, the text that already exists or any other text you enter within the autoshape will appear in columns and will flow from one column to another. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the shape. To replace the added autoshape, left-click it and use the Change Autoshape drop-down list on the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To delete the added autoshape, left-click it and press the Delete key.To learn how to align an autoshape on the slide or arrange several autoshapes, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section. Join autoshapes using connectors You can connect autoshapes using lines with connection points to demonstrate dependencies between the objects (e.g. if you want to create a flowchart). To do that, 1. click the Shape icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the Lines group from the menu, 3. click the necessary shape within the selected group (excepting the last three shapes which are not connectors, namely Curve, Scribble and Freeform), 4. hover the mouse cursor over the first autoshape and click one of the connection points that appear on the shape outline, 5. drag the mouse cursor towards the second autoshape and click the necessary connection point on its outline. If you move the joined autoshapes, the connector remains attached to the shapes and moves together with them. You can also detach the connector from the shapes and then attach it to any other connection points.Insert and adjust images Insert an image In the Presentation Editor, you can insert images in the most popular formats into your presentation. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG. To add an image on a slide, 1. in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add the image to, 2. click the Image icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. select one of the following options to load the image: o the Image from File option will open the standard dialog window so that you can choose a file. Browse the hard disk drive your computer to select the necessary file and click the Open button o the Image from URL option will open the window where you can enter the web address of the necessary image and click the OK button o the Image from Storage option will open the Select data source window. Select an image stored on your portal and click the OK button 4. once the image is added, you can change its size and position. You can also add an image into a text placeholder pressing the Image from file in it and selecting the necessary image stored on your PC, or use the Image from URL button and specify the image URL address: It''s also possible to add an image to a slide layout. Adjust image settings The right sidebar is activated when you left-click an image and choose the Image settings icon on the right. It contains the following sections:Size - is used to view theWidth and Height of the current image or restore its Actual Size if necessary. The Crop button is used to crop the image. Click the Crop button to activate cropping handles which appear on the image corners and in the center of its each side. Manually drag the handles to set the cropping area. You can move the mouse cursor over the cropping area border so that it turns into the icon and drag the area. · To crop a single side, drag the handle located in the center of this side. · To simultaneously crop two adjacent sides, drag one of the corner handles. · To equally crop two opposite sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the handle in the center of one of these sides. · To equally crop all sides of the image, hold down the Ctrl key when dragging any of the corner handles. When the cropping area is specified, click the Crop button once again, or press the Esc key, or click anywhere outside of the cropping area to apply the changes. After the cropping area is selected, it''s also possible to use the Fill and Fit options available from the Crop drop-down menu. Click the Crop button once again and select the option you need: · If you select the Fill option, the central part of the original image will be preserved and used to fill the selected cropping area, while other parts of the image will be removed. · If you select the Fit option, the image will be resized so that it fits the cropping area height or width. No parts of the original image will be removed, but empty spaces may appear within the selected cropping area. Replace Image - is used to load another image instead of the current one from the desired source. You can select one of the options: From File, From Storage, or From URL. The Replace image option is also available in the right-click menu.Rotation is used to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the image horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: · to rotate the image by 90 degrees counterclockwise · to rotate the image by 90 degrees clockwise · to flip the image horizontally (left to right) · to flip the image vertically (upside down) When the image is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the Stroke type, size and color of the shape as well as change its type by selecting another shape from the Change Autoshapemenu. The shape of the image will change correspondingly. On the Shape Settings tab, you can also use the Show shadow option to add a shadow to the image. To change the advanced settings of the image, right-click the image and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or left-click the image and press the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The image properties window will be opened:The Placement tab allows you to set the following image properties: · Size - use this option to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. To restore the actual size of the added image, click the Actual Size button. · Position - use this option to change the image position on the slide (the position is calculated from the top and the left side of the slide). The Rotation tab contains the following parameters:· Angle - use this option to rotate the image by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. · Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the image horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the image vertically (upside down). The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the image. To delete the inserted image, left-click it and press the Delete key. Insert and edit charts Insert a chart To insert a chart into your presentation, 1. put the cursor where you want to add a chart, 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. click the Chart icon on the top toolbar, 4. select the needed chart type from the available ones: · Column Charts o Clustered column o Stacked column o 100% stacked column o 3-D Clustered Column o 3-D Stacked Columno 3-D 100% stacked column o 3-D Column · Line Charts o Line o Stacked line o 100% stacked line o Line with markers o Stacked line with markers o 100% stacked line with markers o 3-D Line · Pie Charts o Pie o Doughnut o 3-D Pie · Bar Charts o Clustered bar o Stacked bar o 100% stacked bar o 3-D clustered bar o 3-D stacked bar o 3-D 100% stacked bar · Area Charts o Area o Stacked area o 100% stacked area o Stock Charts · XY (Scatter) Charts o Scatter o Stacked bar o Scatter with smooth lines and markers o Scatter with smooth lines o Scatter with straight lines and markers o Scatter with straight lines · Combo Charts o Clustered column - line o Clustered column - line on secondary axis o Stacked area - clustered column o Custom combination 5. after that the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: · and for copying and pasting the copied data · and for undoing and redoing actions · for inserting a function · and for decreasing and increasing decimal places· for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells · for choosing a different type of chart. 6. Click the Select Data button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart Data window will open. 1. Use the Chart Data dialog to manage Chart Data Range, Legend Entries (Series), Horizontal (Category) Axis Label and Switch Row/Column.§ Chart Data Range - select data for your chart. § Click the icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select data range. § Legend Entries (Series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries. § In Legend Entries (Series), click Add button. § In Edit Series, type a new legend entry or click the icon on the right of the Select name box.§ Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels - change text for category labels. § In Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels, click Edit. § In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select data range. § Switch Row/Column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis. 2. Click OK button to apply the changes and close the window. 7. Click the Change Chart Type button in the Chart Editor window to choose chart type and style. Select a chart from the available sections: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, Stock, XY (Scatter), or Combo.When you choose Combo Charts, the Chart Type window lists chart series and allows choosing the types of charts to combine and selecting data series to place on a seconary axis.change the chart settings by clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open.The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. · Specify the Chart Title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: o None not to display the title of a chart, o Overlay to overlay and center the title in the plot area, o No Overlay to display the title above the plot area. · Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: o None not to display a legend, o Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, o Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, o Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, o Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, o Left Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area, o Right Overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area. · Specify the Data Labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: o specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type.· For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner Bottom, Inner Top, Outer Top. · For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. · For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to Width, Inner Top, Outer Top. · For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Bar and Combo charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. o select the data you wish to include into your labels by checking the corresponding boxes: Series Name, Category Name, Value, o enter a character (comma, semicolon, etc.) you wish to use to separate several labels into the Data Labels Separator entry field. · Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines among data points, Smooth to use smooth curves among data points, or None not to display lines. · Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines andMarkers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only.The Vertical Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. · select Hide to hide vertical axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have vertical axis displayed. · specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: o None to not display a vertical axis title o Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, o Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. · Minimum Value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. · Maximum Value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. · Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at theMinimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. · Display Units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you''re working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000,Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. · Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. · The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also definewhere gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. TheMajor/Minor Type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: o None to not display major/minor tick marks, o Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, o In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, o Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. · The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label Position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: o None to not display tick mark labels, o Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, o High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, o Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. o To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: o General o Number o Scientific o Accounting o Currency o Date o Time o Percentage o Fraction o Text o Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. o Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart.Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only. Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series vary considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart. The Secondary Vertical /Horizontal Axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary Vertical/Horizontal Axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal Axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/Horizontal Axis options, see description above/below.The Horizontal Axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. · select Hide to hide horizontal axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have horizontal axis displayed. · specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: o None when you don’t want to display a horizontal axis title, o No Overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis, · Gridlines is used to specify the Horizontal Gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None, Major,Minor, orMajor and Minor. · Axis Crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point attheMinimum/Maximum Value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. · Axis Position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On Tick Marks or Between Tick Marks. · Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. · The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: o Major/Minor Type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. o Interval between Marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. · The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. o Label Position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. o Axis Label Distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. o Interval between Labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select theManual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. o To specify a Label Format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: o General o Number o Scientific o Accounting o Currency o Date o Timeo Percentage o Fraction o Text o Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. o Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters: · Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well. · Move but don''t size with cells - this option allows to snap the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged. · Don''t move or size with cells - this option allows to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed.The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the chart. 9. once the chart is added, you can also change its size and position. You can specify the chart position on the slide by dragging it vertically or horizontally. You can also add a chart into a text placeholder by pressing the Chart icon within it and selecting the necessary chart type: It''s also possible to add a chart to a slide layout.Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels, etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, style, size, or color. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since the shape is used as the background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill, Stroke andWrapping Style. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape Settings tab on the right panel, you can not only adjust the chart area itself, but also change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend, etc. and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element by clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available on the Shape Settings tab: color, width and type. Note: the Show shadow option is also available on the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation.Adjust chart settings The chart size, type and style as well as the data used to create the chart can be altered using the right sidebar. To activate it, click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. The Size section allows you to change the chart width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio. The Change Chart Type section allows you to change the type of the selected chart type and/or its style using the corresponding drop-down menu. To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section.The Edit Data button allows you to open the Chart Editor window and start editing data as described above. Note: to quickly open the ''Chart Editor'' window, you can also double-click the chart on the slide. The Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar allows you to open the Chart - Advanced Settings window where you can set the alternative text: To delete the inserted chart, left-click it and press the Delete key. To learn how to align a chart on the slide or arrange several objects, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section. Insert and format tables Insert a table To insert a table into a slide, 1. select the slide where a table should be added, 2. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 3. click the Table icon on the top toolbar, 4. select one of the following options to create a table: · either a table with a predefined number of cells (10 x 8 cells maximum) If you want to quickly add a table, just select the number of rows (8 maximum) and columns (10 maximum).· or a custom table In case you need more than a 10 x 8 cell table, select the Insert Custom Table option that will open the window where you can enter the necessary number of rows and columns respectively, then click the OK button. 5. once the table is added, you can change its properties and position. You can also add a table into a text placeholder by pressing the Table icon within it and selecting the necessary number of cells or using the Insert Custom Table option: To resize a table, drag the handles situated on its edges until the table reaches the necessary size. You can also manually change the width of a certain column or the height of a row. Move the mouse cursor over the right border of the column so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the left or right to set the necessary width. To change the height of a single row manually, move the mouse cursor over the bottom border of the row until the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag it up or down. You can specify the table position on the slide by dragging it vertically or horizontally. Note: to move around in a table, you can use keyboard shortcuts. It''s also possible to add a table to a slide layout.Adjust table settings Most of the table properties as well as its structure can be altered by using the right sidebar. To activate it, click the table and choose the Table settings icon on the right. The Rows and Columns sections on the top allow you to emphasize certain rows/columns by applying a specific formatting to them, or highlight different rows/columns with different background colors to clearly distinguish them. The following options are available: · Header - emphasizes the topmost row in the table with special formatting. · Total - emphasizes the bottommost row in the table with special formatting. · Banded - enables the background color alternation for odd and even rows. · First - emphasizes the leftmost column in the table with special formatting. · Last - emphasizes the rightmost column in the table with special formatting. · Banded - enables the background color alternation for odd and even columns. The Select From Template section allows you to choose one of the predefined tables styles. Each template combines certain formatting parameters, such as a background color, border style, row/column banding etc. Depending on the options checked inthe Rows and/or Columns sections above, the templates set will be displayed differently. For example, if you''ve checked the Header option in the Rows section and the Banded option in the Columns section, the displayed templates list will include only templates with the header row and banded columns enabled: The Borders Style section allows you to change the applied formatting that corresponds to the selected template. You can select the entire table or a certain cell range and set all the parameters manually. · Border parameters - set the border width using the list (or choose the No borders option), select its Color in the available palettes and determine the way it will be displayed in the cells when clicking on the icons: · · Background color - select the color for the background within the selected cells. The Rows & Columns section allows you to perform the following operations: · Select a row, column, cell (depending on the cursor position), or the entire table. · Insert a new row above or below the selected one as well as a new column to the left or to the right of the selected one. · Delete a row, column (depending on the cursor position or the selection), or the entire table. · Merge Cells - to merge previously selected cells into a single one. · Split Cell... - to split any previously selected cell into a certain number of rows and columns. This option opens the following window: · Enter the Number of Columns and Number of Rows that the selected cell should be split into and press OK. Note: the options of the Rows & Columns section are also accessible from the right-click menu. The Cell Size section is used to adjust the width and height of the currently selected cell. In this section, you can also Distribute rows so that all the selected cells are of equal heightor Distribute columns so that all the selected cells are of equal width. The Distribute rows/columns options are also accessible from the right-click menu. Adjust table advanced settings To change the advanced table settings, click the table with the right mouse button and select the Table Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The table properties window will be opened: TheMargins tab allows setting the space between the text within the cells and the cell border: · enter necessary Cell Margins values manually, or · check the Use default margins box to apply the predefined values (if necessary, they can also be adjusted).The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the table. To format the entered text within the table cells, you can use icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. The right-click menu, which appears when you click the table with the right mouse button, includes two additional options: · Cell vertical alignment - it allows you to set the preferred type of the text vertical alignment within the selected cells: Align Top, Align Center, or Align Bottom. · Hyperlink - it allows you to insert a hyperlink into the selected cell. Insert symbols and characters When working on a presentation, you may need to insert a symbol which is not available on your keyboard. To insert such symbols into your presentation, use the Insert symbol option and follow these simple steps: · place the cursor where a special symbol should be inserted, · switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, · click the Symbol,· The Symbol dialog box will appear, and you will be able to select the required symbol, · use the Range section to quickly find the necessary symbol. All symbols are divided into specific groups, for example, select ''Currency Symbols'' if you want to insert a currency character. If this character is not in the set, select a different font. Many of them also have characters that differ from the standard set. Or, enter the Unicode hex value of the required symbol into the Unicode hex value field. This code can be found in the Character map. You can also use the Special characters tab to choose a special character from the list.The previously used symbols are also displayed in the Recently used symbols field, · click Insert. The selected character will be added to the presentation. Insert ASCII symbols ASCII table is also used to add characters. To do this, hold down the ALT key and use the numeric keypad to enter the character code. Note: be sure to use the numeric keypad, not the numbers on the main keyboard. To enable the numeric keypad, press the Num Lock key. For example, to add a paragraph character (§), press and hold down ALT while typing 789, and then release the ALT key. Insert symbols using Unicode table Additional characters and symbols might also be found via Windows symbol table. To open this table, do one of the following: · in the Search field, write ''Character table'' and open it, · simultaneously press Win + R, and then in the following window type charmap.exe and click OK.In the opened Character Map, select one of the Character sets, Groups, and Fonts. Next, click on the necessary characters, copy them to the clipboard, and paste in the right place of the presentation. Fill objects and select colors You can apply different fills for the slide, autoshape and Text Art font background. 1. Select an object · To change the slide background fill, select the necessary slides in the slide list. The Slide settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. · To change the autoshape fill, left-click the necessary autoshape. The Shape settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. · To change the Text Art font fill, left-click the necessary text object. The Text Art settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. 1. Set the necessary fill type 2. Adjust the selected fill properties (see the detailed description below for each fill type) Note: for the autoshapes and Text Art font, regardless of the selected fill type, you can also set an Opacity level by dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. The following fill types are available: · Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected shape/slide.Click on the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: o Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected theme/color scheme of the presentation. Once you apply a different theme or color scheme, the Theme Colors set will change. o Standard Colors - the default colors set. o Custom Color - click on this caption if there is no needed color in the available palettes. Select the necessary color range by moving the vertical color slider and set the specific color by dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also specify a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the necessary numeric values into the R, G, B (Red, Green, Blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color will appear in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is specified, click the Add button:The custom color will be applied to your object and added to the Custom color palette of the menu. Note: you can use the same color types when selecting the color of the autoshape stroke, adjusting the font color, or changing the table background or border color. · Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the slide/shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fillmenu: o Style - choose one of the available options: Linear (colors change in a straight line i.e. along a horizontal/vertical axis or diagonally at a 45 degree angle) or Radial (colors change in a circular path from the center to the edges). o Direction - choose a template from the menu. If the Linear gradient is selected, the following directions are available : top-left to bottom-right, top to bottom, top-right to bottom-left, right to left, bottom-right to top-left, bottom to top, bottom-left to top-right, left to right. If the Radial gradient is selected, only one template is available. o Angle - set the numeric value for a precise color transition angle.o Gradient Points are specific points of color transition. 1. Use the Add Gradient Point button or a slider bar to add a gradient point, and the Remove Gradient Point button to delete one. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each of the following gradient points added does not affect the current gradient appearance. 2. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify the Position in percentage for a precise location. 3. To apply a color to the gradient point, click on the required point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. · Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape/slide background. o If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape/slide, click the Select Picture button and add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. o If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape/slide, drop-down the From Texturemenu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: Canvas, Carton, Dark Fabric, Grain, Granite, Grey Paper, Knit, Leather, Brown Paper, Papyrus, Wood. o In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape or slide has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the drop-down list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the slide or autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions, or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the slide or autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary.· Pattern - select this option to fill the slide/shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. o Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. o Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. o Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. · No Fill - select this option if you don''t want to use any fill. Manipulate objects on a slide You can resize, move, rotate different objects on a slide manually using the special handles. You can also specify the dimensions and position of some objects exactly using the right sidebar or Advanced Settings window. Resize objects To change the autoshape/image/chart/table/text box size, drag small squares situated on the object edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected object while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To specify the precise width and height of a chart, select it on a slide and use the Size section of the right sidebar that will be activated.To specify the precise dimensions of an image or autoshape, right-click the necessary object on the slide and select the Image/Shape Advanced Settings option from the menu. Specify necessary values on the Size tab of the Advanced Settings window and press OK. Reshape autoshapes When modifying some shapes, for example Figured arrows or Callouts, the yellow diamond- shaped icon is also available. It allows adjusting some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow. Move objects To alter the autoshape/image/chart/table/text box position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the object. Drag the object to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. To move the object by the one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. To move the object strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging. To specify the precise position of an image, right-click it on a slide and select the Image Advanced Settings option from the menu. Specify necessary values in the Position section of the Advanced Settings window and press OK. Rotate objects To manually rotate an autoshape/image/text box, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. To rotate the object by 90 degrees counterclockwise/clockwise or flip the object horizontally/vertically, you can use the Rotation section of the right sidebar that will be activated once you select the necessary object. To open it, click the Shape settings or the Image settings icon to the right. Click one of the buttons: · to rotate the object by 90 degrees counterclockwise · to rotate the object by 90 degrees clockwise · to flip the object horizontally (left to right) · to flip the object vertically (upside down)It''s also possible to right-click the object, choose the Rotate option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available rotation options. To rotate the object by an exactly specified angle, click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar and use the Rotation tab of the Advanced Settings window. Specify the necessary value measured in degrees in the Angle field and click OK. Align and arrange objects on a slide The added autoshapes, images, charts or text boxes can be aligned, grouped, ordered, distributed horizontally and vertically on the slide. To perform any of these actions, first select a separate object or several objects in the slide editing area. To select several objects, hold down the Ctrl key and left-click the necessary objects. To select a text box, click on its border, not the text within it. After that you can use either the icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar described below or the analogous options from the right-click menu. Align objects To align two or more selected objects, 1. Click the Align shape icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options: o Align to Slide to align objects relative to the edges of the slide, o Align Selected Objects (this option is selected by default) to align objects relative to each other, 2. Click the Align shape icon once again and select the necessary alignment type from the list: o Align Left - to line up the objects horizontally on the left side of the leftmost object/left edge of the slide, o Align Center - to line up the objects horizontally in their centers/center of the slide, o Align Right - to line up the objects horizontally on the right side of the rightmost object/right edge of the slide, o Align Top - to line up the objects vertically to the top edge of the topmost object/top edge of the slide, o Align Middle - to line up the objects vertically in their middles/middle of the slide, o Align Bottom - to line up the objects vertically to the bottom edge of the bottommost object/bottom edge of the slide. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available alignment options. If you want to align a single object, it can be aligned relative to the edges of the slide. The Align to Slide option is selected by default in this case.Distribute objects To distribute three or more selected objects horizontally or vertically so that the equal distance appears between them, 1. Click the Align icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following options: o Align to Slide to distribute objects between the edges of the slide, o Align Selected Objects (this option is selected by default) to distribute objects between two outermost selected objects, 2. Click the Align shape icon once again and select the necessary distribution type from the list: o Distribute Horizontally - to distribute objects evenly between the leftmost and rightmost selected objects/left and right edges of the slide. o Distribute Vertically - to distribute objects evenly between the topmost and bottommost selected objects/top and bottom edges of the slide. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Align option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available distribution options. Note: the distribution options are disabled if you select less than three objects. Group objects To group two or more selected objects or ungroup them, click the Arrange shape icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the list: · Group - to combine several objects into a group so that they can be simultaneously rotated, moved, resized, aligned, arranged, copied, pasted, formatted like a single object. · Ungroup - to ungroup the selected group of the previously combined objects. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected objects, choose the Arrange option from the contextual menu and then use the Group or Ungroup option. Note: the Group option is disabled if you select less than two objects. The Ungroup option is available only when a group of the previously joined objects is selected. Arrange objects To arrange the selected object(s) (i.e. to change their order when several objects overlap each other), click the Arrange shape icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary arrangement type from the list. · Bring To Foreground - to move the object(s) in front of all other objects, · Send To Background - to move the object(s) behind all other objects, · Bring Forward - to move the selected object(s) one level forward as related to other objects.· Send Backward - to move the selected object(s) one level backward as related to other objects. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected object(s), choose the Arrange option from the contextual menu and then use one of the available arrangement options. Math equations Insert equations The Presentation Editor allows you to create equations using the built-in templates, edit them, insert special characters (including mathematical operators, Greek letters, accents, etc.). Add a new equation To insert an equation from the gallery, 1. switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, 2. click the arrow next to the Equation icon on the top toolbar, 3. in the opened drop-down list select the equation category you need. The following categories are currently available: Symbols, Fractions, Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Brackets, Functions, Accents, Limits and Logarithms, Operators, Matrices, 4. click the certain symbol/equation in the corresponding set of templates. The selected symbol/equation box will be inserted in the center of the current slide. If you do not see the equation box border, click anywhere within the equation - the border will be displayed as a dashed line. The equation box can be freely moved, resized or rotated on the slide. To do that, click on the equation box border (it will be displayed as a solid line) and use the corresponding handles. Each equation template represents a set of slots. A slot is a position for each element that makes up the equation. An empty slot (also called as a placeholder) has a dotted outline . You need to fill in all the placeholders specifying the necessary values.Enter values The insertion point specifies where the next character you enter will appear. To position the insertion point precisely, click within a placeholder and use the keyboard arrows to move the insertion point one character left/right. Once the insertion point is positioned, you can fill in the placeholder: · enter the desired numeric/literal value using the keyboard, · insert a special character using the Symbols palette from the Equationmenu on the Insert tab of the top toolbar or typing them from the keyboard (see theMath AutoСorrect option description), · add another equation template from the palette to create a complex nested equation. The size of the primary equation will be automatically adjusted to fit its content. The size of the nested equation elements depends on the primary equation placeholder size, but it cannot be smaller than the sub-subscript size. To add some new equation elements, you can also use the right-click menu options: · To add a new argument that goes before or after the existing one within Brackets, you can right-click on the existing argument and select the Insert argument before/after option from the menu. · To add a new equation within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group, you can right-click on an empty placeholder or entered equation within it and select the Insert equation before/after option from the menu. · To add a new row or a column in a Matrix, you can right-click on a placeholder within it, select the Insert option from the menu, then select Row Above/Below or Column Left/Right. Note: currently, equations cannot be entered using the linear format, i.e. \sqrt(4&x^3). When entering the values of mathematical expressions, you do not need to use Spacebar because spaces between the characters and signs of operations are set automatically. If the equation is too long and does not fit to a single line within the text box, automatic line breaking appears while you are typing. You can also insert a line break in a specific position byright-clicking on a mathematical operator and selecting the Insert manual break option from the menu. The selected operator will start a new line. To delete the added manual line break, right-click on the mathematical operator that starts a new line and select the Delete manual break option. Format equations By default, the equation within the text box is horizontally centered and vertically aligned to the top of the text box. To change its horizontal/vertical alignment, put the cursor within the the equation box (the text box borders will be displayed as dashed lines) and use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. To increase or decrease the equation font size, click anywhere within the equation box and select the necessary font size from the list on the Home tab of the top toolbar. All the equation elements will change correspondingly. The letters within the equation are italicized by default. If necessary, you can change the font style (bold, italic, strikeout) or color for a whole equation or its part. The underlined style can be applied to the entire equation only, not to individual characters. Select the necessary part of the equation by clicking and dragging. The selected part will be highlighted blue. Then use the necessary buttons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to format the selection. For example, you can remove the italic format for ordinary words that are not variables or constants. To modify some equation elements, you can also use the right-click menu options: · To change the Fractions format, you can right-click on a fraction and select the Change to skewed/linear/stacked fraction option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected fraction type). · To change the Scripts position relating to text, you can right-click on the equation that includes scripts and select the Scripts before/after text option from the menu. · To change the argument size for Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Limits and Logarithms, Operators as well as for overbraces/underbraces and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the argument you want to change and select the Increase/Decrease argument size option from the menu. · To specify whether an empty degree placeholder should be displayed or not for a Radical, you can right-click on the radical and select the Hide/Show degree option from the menu.· To specify whether an empty limit placeholder should be displayed or not for an Integral or Large Operator, you can right-click on the equation and select the Hide/Show top/bottom limit option from the menu. · To change the limits position relating to the integral or operator sign for Integrals or Large Operators, you can right-click on the equation and select the Change limits location option from the menu. The limits can be displayed to the right of the operator sign (as subscripts and superscripts) or directly above and below the operator sign. · To change the limits position relating to text for Limits and Logarithms and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Limit over/under text option from the menu. · To choose which of the Brackets should be displayed, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Hide/Show opening/closing bracket option from the menu. · To control the Brackets size, you can right-click on the expression within them. The Stretch brackets option is selected by default so that the brackets can grow according to the expression within them, but you can deselect this option to prevent brackets from stretching. When this option is activated, you can also use the Match brackets to argument height option. · To change the character position relating to text for overbraces/underbraces or overbars/underbars from the Accents group, you can right-click on the template and select the Char/Bar over/under text option from the menu. · To choose which borders should be displayed for a Boxed formula from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Border properties option from the menu, then select Hide/Show top/bottom/left/right border or Add/Hide horizontal/vertical/diagonal line. · To specify whether empty placeholders should be displayed or not for a Matrix, you can right-click on it and select the Hide/Show placeholder option from the menu. To align some equation elements, you can use the right-click menu options: · To align equations within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group, you can right-click on an equation, select the Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom. · To align a Matrix vertically, you can right-click on the matrix, select the Matrix Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom. · To align elements within a Matrix column horizontally, you can right-click on a placeholder within the column, select the Column Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Left, Center, or Right. Delete equation elements To delete a part of the equation, select the part you want to delete by dragging the mouse or holding down the Shift key and using the arrow buttons, then press the Delete key.A slot can only be deleted together with the template it belongs to. To delete the entire equation, click on the equation box border (it will be displayed as a solid line) and and press the Delete key. To delete some equation elements, you can also use the right-click menu options: · To delete a Radical, you can right-click on it and select the Delete radical option from the menu. · To delete a Subscript and/or Superscript, you can right-click on the expression that contains them and select the Remove subscript/superscript option from the menu. If the expression contains scripts that go before text, the Remove scripts option is available. · To delete Brackets, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Delete enclosing characters or Delete enclosing characters and separators option from the menu. · If the expression within Brackets inclides more than one argument, you can right-click on the argument you want to delete and select the Delete argument option from the menu. · If Brackets enclose more than one equation (i.e. Cases with several conditions), you can right-click on the equation you want to delete and select the Delete equation option from the menu. · To delete a Limit, you can right-click on it and select the Remove limit option from the menu. · To delete an Accent, you can right-click on it and select the Remove accent character, Delete char or Remove bar option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected accent). · To delete a row or a column of a Matrix, you can right-click on the placeholder within the row/column you need to delete, select the Delete option from the menu, then select Delete Row/Column. Presentation co-editing Collaborative Presentation Editing The Presentation Editor offers allows you to collaboratively work on a presentation collaboratively with other users. This feature includes: · simultaneous multi-user access to the edited presentation· visual indication of objects that are being edited by other users · real-time display of changes or their synchronization with one button click · a chat to share ideas concerning particular parts of the presentation · comments containing the description of a task or problem that should be solved (it''s also possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version) Connecting to the online version In the desktop editor, open the Connect to cloud option of the left-side menu in the main program window. Connect to your cloud office specifying your account login and password. Co-editing The Presentation Editor allows you to select one of the two available co-editing modes: · Fast is used by default and shows the changes made by other users in real time. · Strict is selected to hide other user''s changes until you click the Save icon to save your own changes and accept the changes made by the others. The mode can be selected in the Advanced Settings. It''s also possible to choose the necessary mode using the Co-editing Mode icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar: Note: when you co-edit a presentation in the Fastmode, the possibility to Redo the last undone operation is not available. When a presentation is being edited by several users simultaneously in the Strictmode, the edited objects (autoshapes, text objects, tables, images, charts) are marked with dashed lines of different colors. The object that you are editing is surrounded by the green dashed line. Red dashed lines indicate that objects are being edited by other users. By hovering the mouse cursor over one of the edited passages, the name of the user who is editing it at the moment is displayed. The Fastmode will show the actions and the names of the co-editors when they are editing the text. The number of users who are working on the current presentation is specified on the right side of the editor header - . If you want to see who exactly is editing the file now, you can click this icon or open the Chat panel with the full list of the users.When no users are viewing or editing the file, the icon in the editor header will look like allowing you to manage the users who have access to the file right from the document: invite new users giving them permissions to edit, read or comment the presentation, or deny some users access rights to the file. Click this icon to manage the access to the file; this can be done both when there are no other users who view or co-edit the document at the moment and when there are other users and the icon looks like . It''s also possible to set access rights using the Sharing icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. As soon as one of the users saves his/her changes by clicking the icon, the others will see a note within the status bar stating that they have updates. To save the changes you made, so that other users can view them, and get the updates saved by your co-editors, click the icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar. The updates will be highlighted for you to check what exactly has been changed. Anonymous Portal users who are not registered and do not have a profile are considered to be anonymous, although they still can collaborate on documents. To have a name assigned to them, the anonymous user should enter a name they prefer in the corresponding field appearing in the right top corner of the screen when they open the document for the first time. Activate the “Don’t ask me again” checkbox to preserve the name. Chat You can use this tool to coordinate the co-editing process on-the-fly, for example, to distribute tasks with your collaborators. The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the document content, it is better to use comments which are stored until you decide to delete them. To access the chat and leave a message for other users, 1. click the icon on the left sidebar, or switch to the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Chat button, 2. enter your text into the corresponding field below, 3. press the Send button.All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven''t read yet, the chat icon will look like this - . To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon on the left sidebar or the Chat button on the top toolbar once again. Comments It''s possible to work with comments in the offline mode, without connecting to the online version. To leave a comment to a certain object (text box, shape etc.): 1. select an object where you think there is an error or problem, 2. switch to the Insert or Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Comment button, or right-click the selected object and select the Add Сomment option from the menu, 3. enter the needed text, 4. click the Add Comment/Add button. The object you commented will be marked with the icon. To view the comment, just click on this icon. To add a comment to a certain slide, select the slide and use the Comment button on the Insert or Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. The added comment will be displayed in the upper left corner of the slide. To create a presentation-level comment which is not related to a certain object or slide, click the icon on the left sidebar to open the Comments panel and use the Add Comment to Document link. The presentation-level comments can be viewed on the Comments panel. Comments related to objects and slides are also available here. Any other user can answer to the added comment asking questions or reporting on the work he/she has done. For this purpose, click the Add Reply link situated under the comment, type in your reply text in the entry field and press the Reply button. If you are using the Strict co-editing mode, new comments added by other users will become visible only after you click the icon in the left upper corner of the top toolbar. You can manage the added comments using the icons in the comment balloon or on the Comments panel on the left: · edit the currently selected by clicking the icon, · delete the currently selected by clicking the icon, · close the currently selected discussion by clicking the icon if the task or problem you stated in your comment was solved, after that the discussion you opened with your comment gets the resolved status. To open it again, click the icon.Adding mentions When entering comments, you can use thementions feature that allows you to attract somebody''s attention to the comment and send a notification to the mentioned user via email and Talk. To add a mention enter the "+" or "@" sign anywhere in the comment text - a list of the portal users will open. To simplify the search process, you can start typing a name in the comment field - the user list will change as you type. Select the necessary person from the list. If the file has not yet been shared with the mentioned user, the Sharing Settings window will open. Read only access type is selected by default. Change it if necessary and click OK. The mentioned user will receive an email notification that he/she has been mentioned in a comment. If the file has been shared, the user will also receive a corresponding notification. To remove comments, 1. click the Remove button on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the necessary option from the menu: o Remove Current Comments - to remove the currently selected comment. If some replies have been added to the comment, all its replies will be removed as well. o Remove My Comments - to remove comments you added without removing comments added by other users. If some replies have been added to your comment, all its replies will be removed as well. o Remove All Comments - to remove all the comments in the presentation that you and other users added. To close the panel with comments, click the icon on the left sidebar once again. Plugins Edit an image ONLYOFFICE comes with a very powerful photo editor, that allows you to adjust the image with filters and make all kinds of annotations. 1. Select an image in your presentation. 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Photo Editor. You are now in the editing environment. · Below the image you will find the following checkboxes and slider filters: o Grayscale, Sepia, Sepia 2, Blur, Emboss, Invert, Sharpen; o Remove White (Threshhold, Distance), Gradient transparency, Brightness, Noise, Pixelate, Color Filter; o Tint,Multiply, Blend.· Below the filters you will find buttons for o Undo, Redo and Resetting; o Delete, Delete all; o Crop (Custom, Square, 3:2, 4:3, 5:4, 7:5, 16:9); o Flip (Flip X, Flip Y, Reset); o Rotate (30 degree, -30 degree,Manual rotation slider); o Draw (Free, Straight, Color, Size slider); o Shape (Recrangle, Circle, Triangle, Fill, Stroke, Stroke size); o Icon (Arrows, Stars, Polygon, Location, Heart, Bubble, Custom icon, Color); o Text (Bold, Italic, Underline, Left, Center, Right, Color, Text size); o Mask. Feel free to try all of these and remember you can always undo them. 3. When finished, click the OK button. The edited picture is now included in the presentation. Include a video You can include a video in your presentation. It will be shown as an image. By double-clicking the image the video dialog opens. Here you can start the video. 1. Copy the URL of the video you want to include. (the complete address shown in the address line of your browser) 2. Go to your presentation and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the video. 3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose YouTube. 4. Paste the URL and click OK. 5. Check if it is the correct video and click the OK button below the video. The video is now included in your presentation. Insert highlighted code You can embed highlighted code with the already adjusted style in accordance with the programming language and coloring style of the program you have chosen. 1. Go to your presentation and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the code. 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Highlight code. 3. Specify the programming Language. 4. Select a Style of the code so that it appears as if it were open in this program. 5. Specify if you want to replace tabs with spaces.6. Choose Background color. To do this, manually move the cursor over the palette or insert the RBG/HSL/HEX value. 7. Click OK to insert the code. Translate text You can translate your presentation from and to numerous languages. 1. Select the text that you want to translate. 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left. 3. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The text will be translated to the required language. Changing the language of your result: 1. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The translation will change immediately. Replace a word by a synonym If you are using the same word multiple times, or a word is just not quite the word you are looking for, ONLYOFFICE let you look up synonyms. It will show you the antonyms too. 1. Select the word in your presentation. 2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Thesaurus. 3. The synonyms and antonyms will show up in the left sidebar. 4. Click a word to replace the word in your presentation. Tools and settings View the information about your presentation To access the detailed information about the currently edited presentation, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Presentation Info option.General Information The spreadsheet information includes a number of file properties which describe the spreadsheet. Some of these properties are updated automatically, and some of them can be edited. · Location - the folder in the Documentsmodule where the file is stored. Owner - the name of the user who has created the file. Uploaded - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the online version only. · Title, Subject, Comment - these properties allow you to simplify the classification of your documents. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields. · Last Modified - the date and time when the file was last modified. · Last Modified By - the name of the user who has made the latest change to the presentation if it was shared and can be edited by several users. · Application - the application the presentation was created with. · Author - the person who has created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author. If you changed the file properties, click the Apply button to apply the changes. Note: Online Editors allow you to change the presentation title directly from the editor interface. To do that, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Rename... option, then enter the necessary File name in a new window that opens and click OK. Permission Information In the online version, you can view the information about permissions to the files stored in the cloud. Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To find out who has the rights to view or edit the presentation, select the Access Rights... option on the left sidebar. You can also change currently selected access rights by pressing the Change access rights button in the Persons who have rights section. To close the File pane and return to presentation editing, select the Close Menu option. Save/print/download your presentation Saving By default, the online Рresentation Editor automatically saves your file every 2 seconds when you are working on it preventing your data loss if the program closes unexpectedly. If you co- edit the file in the Fastmode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if there are any. When the file is co-edited in the Strictmode, changes areautomatically saved within 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your presentation manually in the current format and location, · press the Save icon on the left side of the editor header, or · use the Ctrl+S key combination, or · click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. Note: in the desktop version, to prevent data loss if the program closes unexpectedly, you can turn on the Autorecover option on the Advanced Settings page. In the desktop version, you can save the presentation under a different name, in a new location or format, 1. click the File tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the Save as... option, 3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: PPTX, ODP, PDF, PDFA. You can also choose the Рresentation template (POTX or OTP) option. Downloading In the online version, you can download the resulting presentation onto the hard disk drive of your computer, 1. click the File tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the Download as... option, 3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP. Saving a copy In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal, 1. click the File tab of the top toolbar, 2. select the Save Copy as... option, 3. choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, 4. select a location of the file on the portal and press Save. Printing To print out the current presentation, · click the Print icon on the left side of the editor header, or · use the Ctrl+P key combination, or · click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option.It''s also possible to print the selected slides using the Print Selection option from the contextual menu both in the Edit and Viewmodes (Right Mouse Button Click on the selected slides and choose option Print selection). In the desktop version, the file will be printed directly. In the online version, a PDF file based on your presentation will be generated. You can open and print it out, or save onto the hard disk drive of your computer or a removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing. Advanced Settings of the Presentation Editor The Presentation Editor allows you to change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings... option. You can also click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select the Advanced settings option. The advanced settings are: · Spell Checking is used to turn on/off the spell checking option. · Proofing - used to automatically replace word or symbol typed in the Replace: box or chosen from the list by a new word or symbol displayed in the By: box. · Alternate Input is used to turn on/off hieroglyphs. · Alignment Guides is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects and allow you to position them on the slide precisely. · Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing. · Autorecover - is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows you to automatically recover documents if the program closes unexpectedly. · Co-editing Mode is used to select a way of displaying changes made during co-editing: o By default, the Fastmode is selected, the users who take part in the presentation co-editing, will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users. o If you prefer not to see the changes made by other users (so that they will not disturb you, or for some other reason), select the Strictmode, and all the changes will be shown only after you click the Save icon with a notification that there are some changes made by other users. · Interface theme is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface. o Light color scheme incorporates standard orange, white, and light-gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during daytime. o Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard orange, white, and light- gray colors. o Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark-gray, and light-gray colors suitable for working during nighttime.· Default Zoom Value is used to set the default zoom value selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 200%. You can also choose the Fit to Slide or Fit to Width option. · Font Hinting is used to select a way fonts are displayed in the Presentation Editor: o Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. o Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. o Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with the hinting embedded into font files. o Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when the Google Chrome browser has problems with the enabled hardware acceleration. The Presentation Editor has two cache modes: 1. In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. 2. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies two above mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: § When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. § When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. · Unit of Measurement is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties windows for measuring elements parameters such as width, height, spacing, margins, etc. You can select the Centimeter, Point, or Inch option. · Cut, copy and paste - used to show the Paste Options button when content is pasted. Check the box to enable this feature. · Macros Settings - used to set macros display with a notification. o Choose Disable all to disable all macros within the presentation; o Show notification to receive notifications about macros within the presentation; o Enable all to automatically run all macros within the presentation. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button.View Settings and Navigation Tools The Presentation Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate through your presentation: zoom, previous/next slide buttons and slide number indicator. Adjust the View Settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the presentation, click the View settings icon on the right side of the editor header and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options from the View settings drop-down list: · Hide Toolbar - hides the top toolbar that contains commands while tabs remain visible. When this option is enabled, you can click any tab to display the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed until you click anywhere outside it. To disable this mode, click the View settings icon and click the Hide Toolbar option once again. The top toolbar will be displayed all the time. Note: alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. · Hide Status Bar - hides the bottommost bar where the Slide Number Indicator and Zoom buttons are situated. To show the hidden Status Bar, click this option once again. · Hide Rulers - hides rulers which are used to set up tab stops and paragraph indents within the text boxes. To show the hidden Rulers, click this option once again. The right sidebar is minimized by default. To expand it, select any object/slide and click the icon of the currently activated tab on the right. To minimize the right sidebar, click the icon once again. The left sidebar width is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the left to reduce the sidebar width or to the right to extend it. Use the Navigation Tools To navigate through your presentation, use the following tools: The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out the current presentation. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200%) or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. Click the Fit to width icon to fit the slide width to the visible part of the working area. To fit the whole slide to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit to slide icon. Zoom settings are also available in the View settings drop-down list that can be useful if you decide to hide the Status Bar.Note: you can set a default zoom value. Switch to the File tab of the top toolbar, go to the Advanced Settings... section, choose the necessary Default Zoom Value from the list and click the Apply button. To go to the previous or next slide when editing the presentation, you can use the and buttons at the top and bottom of the vertical scroll bar located to the right of the slide. The Slide Number Indicator shows the current slide as a part of all the slides in the current presentation (slide ''n'' of ''nn''). Click this caption to open the window where you can enter the slide number and quickly go to it. If you decide to hide the Status Bar, this tool will become inaccessible. Search and Replace Function To search for the needed characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited presentation, click the icon situated on the left sidebar or use the Ctrl+F key combination. The Find and Replace window will open: 1. Type in your inquiry into the corresponding data entry field. 2. Specify search parameters by clicking the icon and checking the necessary options: · Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is ''Editor'' and this option is selected, such words as ''editor'' or ''EDITOR'' etc. will not be found). To disable this option click it once again. 3. Click one of the arrow buttons on the right. The search will be performed either towards the beginning of the presentation (if you click the button) or towards the end of the presentation (if you click the button) from the current position. The first slide in the selected direction that contains the characters you entered will be highlighted in the slide list and displayed in the working area with the required characters outlined. If it is not the slide you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next slide containing the characters you entered.To replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, click the Replace link below the data entry field or use the Ctrl+H key combination. The Find and Replace window will change: 1. Type in the replacement text into the bottom data entry field. 2. Click the Replace button to replace the currently selected occurrence or the Replace All button to replace all the found occurrences. To hide the replace field, click the Hide Replace link. Spell-checking The Presentation Editor allows you to check the spelling of your text in a certain language and correct mistakes while editing. In the desktop version, it''s also possible to add words into a custom dictionary which is common for all three editors. First of all, choose a language for your presentation. Click the icon on the right side of the status bar. In the opened window, select the necessary language and click OK. The selected language will be applied to the whole presentation. To choose a different language for any piece of text within the presentation, select the necessary text passage with the mouse and use the menu on the status bar. To enable the spell checking option, you can: · click the Spell checking icon at the status bar, or · open the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, check the Turn on spell checking option box and click the Apply button.Incorrectly spelled words will be underlined with a red line. Right click on the necessary word to activate the menu and: · choose one of the suggested similar words spelled correctly to replace the misspelled word with the suggested one. If too many variants are found, the More variants... option appears in the menu; · use the Ignore option to skip just that word and remove underlining or Ignore All to skip all the identical words repeated in the text; · if the current word is missed in the dictionary, you can add it to the custom dictionary. This word will not be treated as a mistake next time. This option is available in the desktop version. · select a different language for this word. To disable the spell checking option, you can: · click the Spell checking icon on the status bar, or · open the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Advanced Settings... option, uncheck the Turn on spell checking option box and click the Apply button. AutoCorrect Features The AutoCorrect features in ONLYOFFICE Docs are used to automatically format text when detected or insert special math symbols by recognizing particular character usage. The available AutoCorrect options are listed in the corresponding dialog box. To access it, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options. The AutoCorrect dialog box consists of two tabs: Math Autocorrect and Recognized Functions. Math AutoCorrect When working with equations, you can insert a lot of symbols, accents and mathematical operation signs typing them on the keyboard instead of choosing a template from the gallery.In the equation editor, place the insertion point within the necessary placeholder, type a math autocorrect code, then press Spacebar. The entered code will be converted into the corresponding symbol, and the space will be eliminated. Note: The codes are case sensitive. You can add, modify, restore, and remove autocorrect entries from the AutoCorrect list. Go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options ->Math AutoCorrect. Adding an entry to the AutoCorrect list · Enter the autocorrect code you want to use in the Replace box. · Enter the symbol to be assigned to the code you entered in the By box. · Click the Add button. Modifying an entry on the AutoCorrect list · Select the entry to be modified. · You can change the information in both fields: the code in the Replace box or the symbol in the By box. · Click the Replace button. Removing entries from the AutoCorrect list · Select an entry to remove from the list. · Click the Delete button. To restore the previously deleted entries, select the entry to be restored from the list and click the Restore button. Use the Reset to default button to restore default settings. Any autocorrect entry you added will be removed and the changed ones will be restored to their original values. To disable Math AutoCorrect and to avoid automatic changes and replacements, uncheck the Replace text as you type box.The table below contains all the currently supported codes available in the Presentation Editor. The full list of the supported codes can also be found on the File tab in the Advanced Settings... -> Spell checking -> Proofing section. Recognized Functions In this tab, you will find the list of math expressions that will be recognized by the Equation editor as functions and therefore will not be automatically italicized. For the list of recognized functions go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> Recognized Functions. To add an entry to the list of recognized functions, enter the function in the blank field and click the Add button. To remove an entry from the list of recognized functions, select the function to be removed and click the Delete button. To restore the previously deleted entries, select the entry to be restored from the list and click the Restore button. Use the Reset to default button to restore default settings. Any function you added will be removed and the removed ones will be restored.AutoFormat as You Type By default, the editor formats the text while you are typing according to the auto-formatting presets, for instance, it automatically starts a bullet list or a numbered list when a list is detected, or replaces quotation marks, or converts hyphens to dashes. If you need to disable auto-formatting presets, uncheck the box for the unnecessary options, go to the File tab -> Advanced Settings -> Proofing -> AutoCorrect Options -> AutoFormat As You Type.Helpful hints About the Presentation Editor The Presentation Editor is an online application that lets you look through and edit presentations directly in your browser. Using the Presentation Editor, you can perform various editing operations like in any desktop editor, print the edited presentations keeping all the formatting details or download them onto the hard disk drive of your computer as PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP files. To view the current software version and licensor details in the online version, click the icon on the left sidebar. To view the current software version and licensor details in the desktop version, select the Aboutmenu item on the left sidebar of the main program window. Supported Formats of Electronic Presentation A presentation is a set of slides that may include different types of content such as images, media files, text, effects, etc. The Presentation Editor handles the following presentation formats:Formats Description View Edit Download PPT File format used by Microsoft PowerPoint + + Office Open XML Presentation PPTX Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and + + + word processing documents PowerPoint Open XML Document Template Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for POTX presentation templates. A POTX template contains + + + formatting settings, styles, etc. and can be used to create multiple presentations with the same formatting OpenDocument Presentation ODP File format that represents presentations created by Impress application, which is a part of OpenOffice based + + + office suites OpenDocument Presentation Template OpenDocument file format for presentation templates. An OTP OTP template contains formatting settings, styles, etc. and + + + can be used to create multiple presentations with the same formatting Portable Document Format PDF File format used to represent documents regardless of application software, hardware, and operating systems + used. Portable Document Format / A PDF/A An ISO-standardized version of the Portable Document Format (PDF) designed for archivation and long-term + preservation of electronic documents. Keyboard shortcuts For Windows/Linux: Working with Presentation Open the File panel to save, download, print the current Open ''File'' panel Alt+F presentation, view its info, create a new presentation or open an existing one, access the Presentation Editor help or advanced settings.Open ''Search'' Open the Search dialog box to start searching for a dialog box Ctrl+F character/word/phrase in the currently edited presentation. Open ''Comments'' Ctrl+⇧ Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or panel Shift+H reply to other users'' comments. Open comment field Alt+H Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open ''Chat'' panel Alt+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save all the changes to the presentation currently edited Save presentation Ctrl+S with the Presentation Editor. The active file will be saved under its current name, in the same location and file format. Print presentation Ctrl+P Print the presentation with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Open the Download as... panel to save the currently Download As... Ctrl+⇧ edited presentation to the hard disk drive of your Shift+S computer in one of the supported formats: PPTX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP. Full screen F11 Switch to the full screen view to fit the Presentation Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 Open the Presentation Editor Helpmenu. Open existing file (Desktop Ctrl+O On the Open local file tab in Desktop Editors, opens the Editors) standard dialog box that allows selecting an existing file. Close file (Desktop Ctrl+W, Close the current presentation window in Desktop Editors) Ctrl+F4 Editors. Element contextual ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. menu Reset the ‘Zoom’ Ctrl+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current presentation to parameter the default ''Fit to slide'' value. NavigationThe first slide Home Go to the first slide of the currently edited presentation. The last slide End Go to the last slide of the currently edited presentation. Next slide Page Down Go to the next slide of the currently edited presentation. Previous slide Page Up Go to the previous slide of the currently edited presentation. Zoom In Ctrl++ Zoom in the currently edited presentation. Zoom Out Tab/Shift+Tab Zoom out the currently edited presentation. Navigate between controls in ↹ Tab/⇧ Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or modal Shift+↹ Tab previous control in modal dialogues. dialogues Performing Actions on Slides New slide Ctrl+M Create a new slide and add it after the selected one in the list. Duplicate slide Ctrl+D Duplicate the selected slide in the list. Move slide up Ctrl+↑ Move the selected slide above the previous one in the list. Move slide down Ctrl+↓ Move the selected slide below the following one in the list. Move slide to Ctrl+⇧ beginning Shift+↑ Move the selected slide to the very first position in the list. Move slide to Ctrl+⇧ end Shift+↓ Move the selected slide to the very last position in the list. Performing Actions on Objects Create a copy Ctrl + drag, Hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the selected object Ctrl+D or press Ctrl+D (⌘ Cmd+D for Mac) to create its copy. Group Ctrl+G Group the selected objects. Ungroup Ctrl+⇧ Shift+G Ungroup the selected group of objects. Select the next object ↹ Tab Select the next object after the currently selected one.Select the previous ⇧ Shift+↹ Select the previous object before the currently selected object Tab one. ⇧ Shift + drag Draw straight (when line or arrow drawing Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or arrow. lines/arrows) Modifying Objects Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree- ⇧ Shift + drag rotation (when Constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments. rotating) Maintain ⇧ Shift + drag in the proportions of the selected object when proportions (when Mainta resizing) resizing. Movement pixel by pixel Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the Ctrl (⌘ Cmd for Mac) key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a ↹ Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. row Move to the previous cell ⇧ Shift+↹ in a ro Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row. w Move to the next row ↓ Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row ↑ Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph ↵ Enter Start a new paragraph within a cell. ↹ Tab in the Add new row lower right Add a new row at the bottom of the table. table cell.Previewing Presentation Start preview from the Ctrl+F5 Start a presentation from the beginning. beginning ↵ Enter, Navigate P forwar →age Down, ↓, Display the next transition effect or advance to the next d slide. ␣ , Spacebar Navigate P e previous transition effect or return to the backwar ←age Up, D spl y th ↑, i a d previous slide. Close preview Esc End a presentation. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste C Cu ⇧trl+X, Cut the selected object and send it to the computer t clipboard memory. The cut object can be later inserted to Shift+Delete another place in the same presentation. Copy Ctrl+C, Send the selected object to the computer clipboard Ctrl+Insert memory. The copied object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. Insert the previously copied object from the computer Paste C⇧trl+V, clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The Shift+Insert object can be previously copied from the same presentation. Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address or to a certain slide in the presentation. Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the Copy style Ctrl+⇧ currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later Shift+C applied to another text fragment in the same presentation. Apply style Ctrl+⇧ Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in theShift+V currently edited text box. Selecting with the Mouse Add to the selected ⇧ Shift Start the selection, hold down the ⇧ Shift key and click fragment where you need to end the selection. Selecting using the Keyboard Select all the slides (in the slides list) or all the objects Select all Ctrl+A within the slide (in the slide editing area) or all the text (within the text box) - depending on where the mouse cursor is located. Select text fragment ⇧ Shift+→ ← Select the text character by character. Select text from cursor to ⇧ Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of beginning of Shift+Home the current line. line Select text from cursor to ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the end of line current line. Select one character to ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. the right Select one character to ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. the left Select to the Ctrl+⇧ text fragment from the cursor to the end of a end of a word Shift+→ Select a word. Select to the beginning of a Ctrl+⇧ ment from the cursor to the beginning of word Shift+← Select a text frag a word. Select one line lect one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a up ⇧ Shift+↑ Se line). Select one line t one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of a down ⇧ Shift+↓ Selec line).Text Styling Bold Ctrl+B Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it a heavier appearance. Italic Ctrl+I Make the font of the selected text fragment slightly slanted to the right. Underline Ctrl+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going under the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript Ctrl+⇧ Make the selected text fragment smaller placing it to the Shift+> lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+⇧ Make the selected text fragment smaller placing it to the Shift+< upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Bulleted list Ctrl+⇧ Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text Shift+L fragment or start a new one. Remove Ctrl+␣ formatting Spacebar Remove formatting from the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center Ctrl+E Center the text between the left and the right edges. Justify the text in the paragraph adding additional space Align justified Ctrl+J between words so that the left and the right text edges will be aligned with the paragraph margins. Align right Ctrl+R Align right with the text lined up on the right side of the text box, the left side remains unaligned. Align left Ctrl+L Align left with the text lined up on the left side of the text box, the right side remains unaligned. Increase left indent Ctrl+M Increase the paragraph left indent by one tabulation position. Decrease left Ctrl+⇧ Decrease the paragraph left indent by one tabulation indent Shift+M position.Delete one character to ← Backspace Delete one character to the left of the cursor. the left Delete one character to Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor. the right Moving around in text Move one character to ← Move the cursor one character to the left. the left Move one character to → Move the cursor one character to the right. the right Move one line up ↑ Move the cursor one line up. Move one line down ↓ Move the cursor one line down. Move to the beginning of a word or one Ctrl+← Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to word to the the left. left Move one word to the Ctrl+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. right Move to next Move to the next title or body text placeholder. If it is the placeholder Ctrl+↵ Enter last placeholder on a slide, this will insert a new slide with the same slide layout as the original slide Jump to the beginning of Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. the line Jump to the end of the line End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Jump to the beginning of Ctrl+Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited text the text box box. Jump to the Ctrl+End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited text box.end of the text box For Mac OS: Working with Presentation Open the File panel to save, download, print the current Open ''File'' on, view its info, create a new presentation or panel ⌥ Option+F presentati open an existing one, access the Presentation Editor help or advanced settings. Open ''Search'' ^ l+F, Open the Search dialog box to start searching for a dialog box ⌘CtrCmd+F character/word/phrase in the currently edited presentation. Open ^ Ctrl+⇧ ''Comments'' S n the Comments panel to add your own comment or panel ⌘hift+H,Cmd+⇧ Ope reply to other users'' comments. Shift+H Open ata entry field where you can add the text of your comment field ⌥ Option+H Open a d comment. Open ''Chat'' panel ⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel and send a message. Save all the changes to the presentation currently edited Save ^ presentation ⌘Ctrl+S, with the Presentation Editor. The active file will be saved Cmd+S under its current name, in the same location and file format. Print ^ trl+P, Print the presentation with one of the available printers or presentation ⌘CCmd+P save it to a file. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Open the Download as... panel to save the currently Download As... S⌘hift+S, edited presentation to the hard disk drive of your Cmd+⇧ computer in one of the supported formats: PPTX, PDF, Shift+S ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP. Help menu F1 Open the Presentation Editor Helpmenu. Close file (Desktop ^⌘Ctrl+W, C Editors) Edloistoertshe current presentation window in Desktop Cmd+W . Element contextual ⇧ Shift+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu.menu Reset the ‘Zoom’ ^ Ctrl+0 or⌘ Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current presentation to parameter Cmd+0 the default ''Fit to slide'' value. Navigation The first slide Home, Fn+← Go to the first slide of the currently edited presentation. The last slide End, Fn+→ Go to the last slide of the currently edited presentation. Next slide Page Down, Fn+↓ Go to the next slide of the currently edited presentation. Previous slide Page Up, Fn+↑ Go to the previous slide of the currently edited presentation. Zoom In ^⌘Ctrl+=,Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited presentation. Zoom Out ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Zoom out the currently edited presentation. Navigate between controls in ↹ Tab/⇧ Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or modal Shift+↹ Tab previous control in modal dialogues. dialogues Performing Actions on Slides New slide ^ Ctrl+M Create a new slide and add it after the selected one in the list. Duplicate slide ⌘ Cmd+D Duplicate the selected slide in the list. Move slide up ⌘ Cmd+↑ Move the selected slide above the previous one in the list. Move slide down ⌘ Cmd+↓ Move the selected slide below the following one in the list. Move slide to ⌘ Cmd+⇧ beginning Shift+↑ Move the selected slide to the very first position in the list. Move slide to ⌘ Cmd+⇧ end Shift+↓ Move the selected slide to the very last position in the list.Performing Actions on Objects ^ Ctrl + drag, Create a copy ^ Ctrl+D, Hold down the Ctrl key when dragging the selected object ⌘ Cmd+D or press Ctrl+D (⌘ Cmd+D for Mac) to create its copy. Group ⌘ Cmd+G Group the selected objects. Ungroup ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+G Ungroup the selected group of objects. Select the next object ↹ Tab Select the next object after the currently selected one. Select the previous ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Select the previous object before the currently selected object one. ⇧ Shift + drag Draw straight (when Draw a straight vertical/horizontal/45-degree line or line or arrow drawing arrow. lines/arrows) Modifying Objects Constrain f the selected object movement ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement o horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree- ⇧ Shift + drag rotation (when Constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments. rotating) Maintain ⇧ Shift + drag in the proportions of the selected object when proportions (when Mainta resizing) resizing. Movement ⌘ Hold down the Ctrl (⌘ Cmd for Mac) key and use the pixel by pixel Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ keybord arrows to move the selected object by one pixel at a time. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a ↹ Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. row Move to the previous cell ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row.in a row Move to the next row ↓ Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row ↑ Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph ↵ Return Start a new paragraph within a cell. ↹ Tab in the Add new row lower right Add a new row at the bottom of the table. table cell. Previewing Presentation Start preview from the ^ Ctrl+F5 Start a presentation from the beginning. beginning ↵ Return, Navigate Page Down, Display the next transition effect or advance to the next forward →↓, slide. ␣ , Spacebar Navigate P ge Up, Display the previous transition effect or return to the backward ←a↑, previous slide. Close preview Esc End a presentation. Undo and Redo Undo ⌘^ Ctrl+Z, Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo ^⌘Ctrl+Y,Cmd+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste cted object and send it to the computer Cut ⌘ Cut the sele Cmd+X clipboard memory. The cut object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. Copy ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected object to the computer clipboardmemory. The copied object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. Insert the previously copied object from the computer Paste ⌘ Cmd+V clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The object can be previously copied from the same presentation. Insert ^ Ctrl+K, Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web hyperlink ⌘ Cmd+K address or to a certain slide in the presentation. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the Copy style S⌘hift+C, currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later Cmd+⇧ applied to another text fragment in the same Shift+C presentation. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Apply style S⌘hift+V, Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the Cmd+⇧ currently edited text box. Shift+V Selecting with the Mouse Add to the selected ⇧ Shift Start the selection, hold down the ⇧ Shift key and click fragment where you need to end the selection. Selecting using the Keyboard Select all the slides (in the slides list) or all the objects Select all ⌘^ Ctrl+A, within the slide (in the slide editing area) or all the text Cmd+A (within the text box) - depending on where the mouse cursor is located. Select text fragment ⇧ Shift+→ ← Select the text character by character. Select one character to ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. the right Select one character to ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. the left Select one line ect one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a up ⇧ Shift+↑ Sel line). Select one line ⇧ Shift+↓ Select one line down (with the cursor at the beginning of adown line). Text Styling Bold ⌘^ Ctrl+B, Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it a Cmd+B heavier appearance. Italic ^⌘Ctrl+I, Make the font of the selected text fragment slightly Cmd+I slanted to the right. Underline ^⌘Ctrl+U, Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line Cmd+U going under the letters. Strikeout ^⌘Ctrl+5, Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line Cmd+5 going through the letters. Subscript ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Make the selected text fragment smaller placing it to the Shift+> lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Make the selected text fragment smaller placing it to the Shift+< upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. ^ Ctrl+⇧ Bulleted list S⌘hift+L,Cmd+⇧ Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Shift+L Increase font ^⌘Ctrl+], Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment Cmd+] 1 point. Decrease font ^⌘Ctrl+[, Decrease the size of the font for the selected text Cmd+[ fragment 1 point. Increase left indent ^ Ctrl+M Increase the paragraph left indent by one tabulation position. Decrease left ^ Ctrl+⇧ Decrease the paragraph left indent by one tabulation indent Shift+M position. Delete one character to ← Backspace Delete one character to the left of the cursor. the left Delete one character to Fn+Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor. the right Moving around in textMove one character to ← Move the cursor one character to the left. the left Move one character to → Move the cursor one character to the right. the right Move one line up ↑ Move the cursor one line up. Move one line down ↓ Move the cursor one line down. Move to the beginning of a word or one ⌘ Cmd+← Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to word to the the left. left Move one word to the ⌘ Cmd+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. right ^ Ctrl+↵ Move to next R⌘eturn, Move to the next title or body text placeholder. If it is the placeholder Cmd+↵ last placeholder on a slide, this will insert a new slide with Return the same slide layout as the original slide Jump to the beginning of Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. the line Jump to the end of the line End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line.">